Note: Descriptions are shown in the official language in which they were submitted.
DEMANDES OU BR~VETS VOLUMINEUX
~ lTE PARTIE DE C~ I t DEMANDE OU CE BREVET
COMPREND PLUS D'UN TOME.
CECI EST I E TOME DE
NOTE: Pour les tomes additionels, veuillez contacter le Bureau canadien des
brevets
2 1~t5 SL~3
JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS
THIS SECTION OF THE APPLICATION/iATENT CONTAINS MORE
THAN ONE VOLUME
THIS IS VOLUME l- OF ~; -
NOTE: Fcr additional volumes please c~ntact the Canadian Patent Office
- 21~5423
CONTROL AND DATA TOKENS
This application claims priority from British Application
No. British Application No. 9405914.4 filed March 24, 1994 and
British Application No. (not yet known) filed February 28, 1995.
R~rRrROUND OF THE lNv~:L.LlON
The present invention is directed to improvements in
methods and apparatus for decompression which operates to
decompress and/or decode a plurality of differently encoded
input signals. The illustrative embodiment chosen for
description hereinafter relates to the decoding of a plurality
of encoded picture standards. More specifically, this
embodiment relates to the decoding of any one of the well known
standards known as JPEG, MPEG and H.261.
A serial pipeline processing system of the present
invention comprises a single two-wire bus used for carrying
unique and specialized interactive interfacing tokens, in the
form of control tokens and data tokens, to a plurality of
adaptive decompression circuits and the like positioned as a
reconfigurable pipeline processor.
Video compression/decompression systems are generally well-
known in the art. However, such systems have generally been
dedicated in design and use to a single compression standard.
They have also suffered from a number of other inefficiencies
and inflexibility in overall system and subsystem design and
data flow management.
Examples of prior art systems and subsystems are enumerated
as follows:
One prior art system is described in United States Patent
No. 5,216,724. The apparatus comprises a plurality of compute
modules, in a preferred embodiment, for a total of four compute
modules coupled in parallel. Each of the
2145423
compute modules has a processor, dual port memory, scratch-
pad memory, and an arbitration mechanism. A first bus
couples the compute modules and a host processor. The device
comprises a shared memory which is coupled to the host
processor and to the compute modules with a second bus.
United States Patent No. 4,785,349 discloses a full
motion color digital video signal that is compressed,
formatted for transmission, recorded on compact disc media
and decoded at conventional video frame rates. During
compression, regions of a frame are individually analyzed to
select optimum fill coding methods specific to each region.
Region decoding time estimates are made to optimize
compression thresholds. Region descriptive codes conveying
the size and locations of the regions are grouped together in
a first segment of a data stream. Region fill codes
conveying pixel amplitude indications for the regions are
grouped together according to fill code type and placed in
other segments of the data stream. The data stream segments
are individually variable length coded according to their
respective statistical distributions and formatted to form
data frames. The number of bytes per frame is withered by
the addition of auxiliary data determined by a reverse frame
sequence analysis to provide an average number selected to
minimize pauses of the compact disc during playback, thereby
avoiding unpredictable seek mode latency periods
characteristic of compact discs. A decoder includes a
variable length decoder responsive to statistical information
in the code stream for separately variable length decoding
individual segments of the data stream. Region location data
is derived from region descriptive data and applied with
region fill codes to a plurality of region specific decoders
selected by detection of the fill code type (e.g., relative,
absolute, dyad and DPCM) and decoded region pixels are stored
in a bit map for subsequent display.
21~5-423
United States Patent No. 4,922,341 discloses a method
for scene-model-assisted reduction of image data for digital
television signals, whereby a picture signal supplied at time
is to be coded, whereby a predecessor frame from a scene
already coded at time t-1 is present in an image store as a
reference, and whereby the frame-to-frame information is
composed of an amplification factor, a shift factor, and an
adaptively acquired quad-tree division structure. Upon
initialization of the system, a uniform, prescribed gray
scale value or picture half-tone expressed as a defined
luminance value is written into the image store of a coder at
the transmitter and in the image store of a decoder at the
receiver store, in the same way for all picture elements
(pixels). Both the image store in the coder as well as the
image store in the decoder are each operated with feed back
to themselves in a manner such that the content of the image
store in the coder and decoder can be read out in blocks of
variable size, can be amplified with a factor greater than or
less than 1 of the luminance and can be written back into the
image store with shifted addresses, whereby the blocks of
variable size are organized according to a known quad tree
data structure.
United States Patent No. 5,122,875 discloses an
apparatus for encoding/decoding an HDTV signal. The
apparatus includes a compression circuit responsive to high
definition video source signals for providing hierarchically
layered codewords CW representing compressed video data and
associated codewords T, defining the types of data
represented by the codewords CW. A priority selection
circuit, responsive to the codewords CW and T, parses the
codewords CW into high and low priority codeword sequences
wherein the high and low priority codeword sequences
correspond to compressed video data of relatively greater and
lesser importance to image reproduction respectively. A
2145423
transport processor, responsive to the high and low priority
codeword sequences, forms high and low priority transport
blocks of high and low priority codewords, respectively.
Each transport block includes a header, codewords CW and
error detection check bits. The respective transport blocks
are applied to a forward error check circuit for applying
additional error check data. Thereafter, the high and low
priority data are applied to a modem wherein quadrature
amplitude modulates respective carriers for transmission.
United States Patent No. 5,146,325 discloses a video
decompression system for decompressing compressed image data
wherein odd and even fields of the video signal are
independently compressed in sequences of intraframe and
interframe compression modes and then interleaved for
transmission. The odd and even fields are independently
decompressed. During intervals when valid decompressed
odd/even field data is not available, even/odd field data is
substituted for the unavailable odd/even field data.
Independently decompressing the even and odd fields of data
and substituting the opposite field of data for unavailable
data may be used to advantage to reduce image display latency
during system start-up and channel changes.
United States Patent No. 5,168,356 discloses a video
signal encoding system that includes apparatus for segmenting
encoded video data into transport blocks for signal
transmission. The transport block format enhances signal
recovery at the receiver by virtue of providing header data
from which a receiver can determine re-entry points into the
data stream on the occurrence of a loss or corruption of
transmitted data. The re-entry points are maximized by
providing secondary transport headers embedded within encoded
video data in respective transport blocks.
United States Patent No. 5,168,375 discloses a method
for processing a field of image data samples to provide for
- 2145423
one or more of the functions of decimation, interpolation,
and sharpening. This is accomplished by an array transform
processor such as that employed in a JPEG compression system.
Blocks of data samples are transformed by the discrete even
cosine transform (DECT) in both the decimation and
interpolation processes, after which the number of frequency
terms is altered. In the case of decimation, the number of
frequency terms is reduced, this being followed by inverse
transformation to produce a reduced-size matrix of sample
points representing the original block of data. In the case
of interpolation, additional frequency components of zero
value are inserted into the array of frequency components
after which inverse transformation produces an enlarged data
sampling set without an increase in spectral bandwidth. In
the case of sharpening, accomplished by a convolution or
filtering operation involving multiplication of transforms of
data and filter kernel in the frequency domain, there is
provided an inverse transformation resulting in a set of
blocks of processed data samples. The blocks are overlapped
followed by a savings of designated samples, and a discarding
of excess samples from regions of overlap. The spatial
representation of the kernel is modified by reduction of the
number of components, for a linear-phase filter, and zero-
padded to equal the number of samples of a data block, this
being followed by forming the discrete odd cosine transform
(DOCT) of the padded kernel matrix.
United States Patent No. 5,175,617 discloses a system
and method for transmitting logmap video images through
telephone line band-limited analog channels. The pixel
organization in the logmap image is designed to match the
sensor geometry of the human eye with a greater concentration
of pixels at the center. The transmitter divides the
frequency band into channels, and assigns one or two pixels
to each channel, for example a 3KHz voice quality telephone
2145423
line is divided into 768 channels spaced about 3.9Hz apart.
Each channel consists of two carrier waves in quadrature, so
each channel can carry two pixels. Some channels are
reserved for special calibration signals enabling the
receiver to detect both the phase and magnitude of the
received signal. If the sensor and pixels are connected
directly to a bank of oscillators and the receiver can
continuously receive each channel, then the receiver need not
be synchronized with the transmitter. An FFT algorithm
implements a fast discrete approximation to the continuous
case in which the receiver synchronizes to the first frame
and then acquires subsequent frames every frame period. The
frame period is relatively low compared with the sampling
period so the receiver is unlikely to lose frame synchrony
once the first frame is detected. An experimental video
telephone transmitted 4 frames per second, applied quadrature
coding to 1440 pixel logmap images and obtained an effective
data transfer rate in excess of 40,000 bits per second.
United States Patent No. 5,185,819 discloses a video
compression system having odd and even fields of video signal
that are independently compressed in sequences of intraframe
and interframe compression modes. The odd and even fields of
independently compressed data are interleaved for
transmission such that the intraframe even field compressed
data occurs midway between successive fields of intraframe
odd field compressed data. The interleaved sequence provides
receivers with twice the number of entry points into the
signal for decoding without increasing the amount of data
transmitted.
United States Patent No. 5,212,742 discloses an
apparatus and method for processing video data for
compression/decompression in real-time. The apparatus
comprises a plurality of compute modules, in a preferred
embodiment, for a total of four compute modules coupled in
21~S423
parallel. Each of the compute modules has a processor, dual
port memory, scratch-pad memory, and an arbitration
mechanism. A first bus couples the compute modules and host
processor. Lastly, the device comprises a shared memory
which is coupled to the host processor and to the compute
modules with a second bus. The method handles assigning
portions of the image for each of the processors to operate
upon.
United States Patent No. 5,231,484 discloses a system
and method for implementing an encoder suitable for use with
the proposed ISO/IEC MPEG standards. Included are three
cooperating components or subsystems that operate to
variously adaptively pre-process the incoming digital motion
video sequences, allocate bits to the pictures in a sequence,
and adaptively quantize transform coefficients in different
regions of a picture in a video sequence so as to provide
optimal visual quality given the number of bits allocated to
that picture.
United States Patent No. 5,267,334 discloses a method of
removing frame redundancy in a computer system for a sequence
of moving images. The method comprises detecting a first
scene change in the sequence of moving images and generating
a first keyframe containing complete scene information for a
first image. The first keyframe is known, in a preferred
embodiment, as a "forward-facing" keyframe or intraframe, and
it is normally present in CCITT compressed video data. The
process then comprises generating at least one intermediate
compressed frame, the at least one intermediate compressed
frame containing difference information from the first image
for at least one image following the first image in time in
the sequence of moving images. This at least one frame being
known as an interframe. Finally, detecting a second scene
change in the sequence of moving images and generating a
second keyframe containing complete scene information for an
2145~23
._
image displayed at the time just prior to the second scene
change, known as a "backward-facing" keyframe. The first
keyframe and the at least one intermediate compressed frame
are linked for forward play, and the second keyframe and the
intermediate compressed frames are linked in reverse for
reverse play. The intraframe may also be used for generation
of complete scene information when the images are played in
the forward direction. When this sequence is played in
reverse, the backward-facing keyframe is used for the
generation of complete scene information.
United States Patent No. 5,276,513 discloses a first
circuit apparatus, comprising a given number of prior-art
image-pyramid stages, together with a second circuit
apparatus, comprising the same given number of novel motion-
vector stages, perform cost-effective hierarchical motion
analysis (HMA) in real-time, with minimum system processing
delay and/or employing minimum system processing delay and/or
employing minimum hardware structure. Specifically, the
first and second circuit apparatus, in response to relatively
high-resolution image data from an ongoing input series of
successive given pixel-density image-data frames that occur
at a relatively high frame rate (e.g., 30 frames per second),
derives, after a certain processing-system delay, an ongoing
output series of successive given pixel-density vector-data
frames that occur at the same given frame rate. Each vector-
data frame is indicative of image motion occurring between
each pair of successive image frames.
United States Patent No. 5,283,646 discloses a method
and apparatus for enabling a real-time video encoding system
to accurately deliver the desired number of bits per frame,
while coding the image only once, updates the quantization
step size used to quantize coefficients which describe, for
example, an image to be transmitted over a communications
channel. The data is divided into sectors, each sector
21~542~
including a plurality of blocks. The blocks are encoded, for
example, using DCT coding, to generate a sequence of
coefficients for each block. The coefficients can be
quantized, and depending upon the quantization step, the
number of bits required to describe the data will vary
significantly. At the end of the transmission of each sector
of data, the accumulated actual number of bits expended is
compared with the accumulated desired number of bits
expended, for a selected number of sectors associated with
the particular group of data. The system then readjusts the
quantization step size to target a final desired number of
data bits for a plurality of sectors, for example describing
an image. Various methods are described for updating the
quantization step size and determining desired bit
allocations.
The article, Chong, Yong M., A Data-Flow Architecture
for Diqital Image Processing, Wescon Technical Papers: No.
2 Oct./Nov. 1984, discloses a real-time signal processing
system specifically designed for image processing. More
particularly, a token based data-flow architecture is
disclosed wherein the tokens are of a fixed one word width
having a fixed width address field. The system contains a
plurality of identical flow processors connected in a ring
fashion. The tokens contain a data field, a control field
and a tag. The tag field of the token is further broken down
into a processor address field and an identifier field. The
processor address field is used to direct the tokens to the
correct data-flow processor, and the identifier field is used
to label the data such that the data-flow processor knows
what to do with the data. In this way, the identifier field
acts as an instruction for the data-flow processor. The
system directs each token to a specific data-flow processor
using a module number (MN). If the MN matches the MN of the
particular stage, then the appropriate operations are
21~5423
performed upon the data. If unrecognized, the token is
directed to an output data bus.
The article, Kimori, S. et al. An Elastic PiPeline
Mechanism by Self-Timed Circuits, IEEE J. of Solid-State
Circuits, Vol. 23, No. 1, February 1988, discloses an elastic
pipeline having self-timed circuits. The asynchronous
pipeline comprises a plurality of pipeline stages. Each of
the pipeline stages consists of a group of input data latches
followed by a combinatorial logic circuit that carries out
logic operations specific to the pipeline stages. The data
latches are simultaneously supplied with a triggering signal
generated by a data-transfer control circuit associated with
that stage. The data-transfer control circuits are
interconnected to form a chain through which send and
acknowledge signal lines control a hand-shake mode of data
transfer between the successive pipeline stages.
Furthermore, a decoder is generally provided in each stage to
select operations to be done on the operands in the present
stage. It is also possible to locate the decoder in the
preceding stage in order to pre-decode complex decoding
processing and to alleviate critical path problems in the
logic circuit. The elastic nature of the pipeline eliminates
any centralized control since all the interworkings between
the submodules are determined by a completely localized
decision and, in addition, each submodule can autonomously
perform data buffering and self-timed data-transfer control
at the same time. Finally, to increase the elasticity of the
pipeline, empty stages are interleaved between the occupied
stages in order to ensure reliable data transfer between the
stages.
2145~23
11
Accordingly, those concerned with the design,
development and use of video compression/decompression
systems and related subsystems have long recognized a need
for improved methods and apparatus providing enhanced
S flexibility, efficiency and performance. The present
invention clearly fulfills all these needs.
2145423
.
12
8UMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Briefly, and in general terms the present invention
provides, in a system having an input, an output and a
plurality of processing stages between the input and the
S output, an improvement characterized by an interactive
interfacing control token, defining a universal adaptation
unit, for control and/or data functions among said processing
stages, so that the processing stages are afforded enhanced
flexibility in the pe~formance of diverse tasks. The
invention also provides an interactive metamorphic
interfacing DATA token, defining a universal adaptation unit,
for data functions among said processing stages, whereby the
processing stages are afforded enhanced flexibility in the
processing of data. A control token may be position
independent of the processing stages for performance of
functions. A DATA token may be position dependent upon the
processing stages for its performance and may have unlimited
word length. A control token may have a fixed, invariant
word length. A token may be position dependent for some
functions and position independent for other functions.
Tokens may be generated, created or converted by one of the
processing stages. Tokens may be dynamically adaptive and
may be altered by interfacing with the various stages. A
token may interact with all of the stages or interact with
some, but less than all of the stages. Tokens may interact
with adjacent stages or a token may interact with non-
adjacent stages. Control tokens may cause processing stages
to reconfigure. Control/DATA tokens provide a basic
building block for the system and the interaction of a token
with a stage may be conditioned by the previous processing
history of that stage. A token may have an address field
which characterizes that token, the interaction with a
selected processing stage being determined by the address
field. A token may also include an extension bit which
2145423
indicates the presence of additional words in that token and
also identifies the last word in the token. The address
field may be of variable length and also may be Huffman
coded.
A DATA token includes data for transfer to the
processing stages. A control token may be devoid of data.
A control token may only condition the processing stages, the
conditioning including reconfiguring of the processing
stages. A token may also be a hybrid control and DATA token
and provide both data and conditioning to processing stages.
A control token may identify a coding standard to the
processing stages. A token may also operate independent of
any coding standard among the processing stages.
A token may be capable of successive alteration by the
processing stages and the interactive flexibility of
control/DATA tokens in cooperation with the processing stages
facilitates greater functional diversity of the processing
stages for resident structure and facilitates system
expansion and/or alteration.
A control token may be capable of facilitating a
plurality of functions within a processing stage. The tokens
may be hardware based, software based, or both. A token may
also provide data and control simultaneously to`a processing
stage. Certain of the control tokens may carry control bits
containing indices indicating information for use in
corresponding state machines to create a set of picture
standard-independent indexer signals.
The above and other objectives and advantages of the
invention will become apparent from the following more
detailed description when taken in conjunction with the
accompanying drawings.
2145423
14
DE8CRIPTION OF THE DRAWING8
Figure. 1 illustrates six cycles of a six-stage pipeline for
different combinations of two internal control signals;
Figures. 2a and 2b illustrate a pipeline in which each stage
includes auxiliary data storage. They also show the manner
in which pipeline stages can "compress" and "expand" in
response to delays in the pipeline;
Figures. 3a(1), 3a(2), 3b(1) and 3b(2) illustrate the control
of data transfer between stages of a preferred embodiment of
a pipeline using a two-wire interface and a multi-phase
clock;
Figure. 4 is a block diagram that illustrates a basic
embodiment of a pipeline stage that incorporates a two-wire
transfer control and also shows two consecutive pipeline
processing stages with the two-wire transfer control;
Figures. 5a and 5b taken together depict one example of a
timing diagram that shows the relationship between timing
signals, input and output data, and internal control signals
used in the pipeline stage as shown in Figure. 4;
Figure. 6 is a block diagram of one example of a pipeline
stage that holds its state under the control of an extension
bit;
Figure. 7 is a block diagram of a pipeline stage that decodes
stage activation data words;
Figures. 8a and 8b taken together form a block diagram
showing the use of the two-wire transfer control in an
exemplifying "data duplication" pipeline stage;
Figures. 9a and 9b taken together depict one example of a
timing diagram that shows the two-phase clock, the two-wire
transfer control signals and the other internal data and
control signals used in the exemplifying embodiment shown in
Figures. 8a and 8b.
Figure 10 is a block diagram of a reconfigurable processing
stage;
21~5423
Figure 11 is a block diagram of a spatial decoder;
Figure 12 is a block diagram of a temporal decoder;
Figure 13 is a block diagram of a video formatter;
Figures 14a-c show various arrangements of memory blocks used
in the present invention:
Figure 14a is a memory map showing a first
arrangement of macroblocks;
Figure 14b is a memory map showing a second
arrangement of macroblocks;
Figure 14c is a memory map showing a further
arrangement of macroblocks;
Figure 15 shows a Venn diagram of possible table selection
values;
Figure 16 shows the variable length of picture data used in
the present invention;
Figure 17 is a block diagram of the temporal decoder
including the prediction filters;
Figure 18 is a pictorial representation of the prediction
filtering process;
Figure 19 shows a generalized representation of the
macroblock structure;
Figure 20 shows a generalized block diagram of a Start Code
Detector;
Figure 21 illustrates examples of start codes in a data
stream;
Figure 22 is a block diagram depicting the relationship
between the flag generator, decode index, header
generator, extra word generator and output latches;
Figure 23 is a block diagram of the Spatial Decoder DRAM
interface;
Figure 24 is a block diagram of a write swing buffer;
Figure 25 is a pictorial diagram illustrating prediction data
offset from the block being processed;
Figure 26 is a pictorial diagram illustrating prediction data
21~23
16
offset by (1,1);
Figure 27 is a block diagram illustrating the Huffman decoder
and parser state machine of the Spatial Decoder.
Figure 28 is a block diagram illustrating the prediction
filter.
-- 214542~
17
FIGURE8
Figure 29 shows a typical decoder system;
Figure 30 shows a JPEG still picture decoder;
Figure 31 shows a JPEG video decoder;
5 Figure 32 shows a multi-standard video decoder;
Figure 33 shows the start and the end of a token;
Figure 34 shows a token address and data fields;
Figure 35 shows a token on an interface wider than
8 bits;
10 Figure 36 shows a macroblock structure;
Figure 37 shows a two-wire interface protocol;
Figure 38 shows the location of external two-wire
interfaces;
Figure 39 shows clock propagation;
15 Figure 40 shows two-wire interface timing;
Figure 41 shows examples of access structure;
Figure 42 shows a read transfer cycle;
Figure 43 shows an access start timing;
Figure 44 shows an example access with two write
20 transfers;
Figure 45 shows a read transfer cycle;
Figure 46 shows a write transfer cycle;
Figure 47 shows a refresh cycle;
Figure 48 shows a 32 bit data bus and a 256 kbit
deep DRAMs (9 bit row address);
Figure 49 shows timing parameters for any strobe
signal;
Figure 50 shows timing parameters between any two
strobe signals;
30 Figure 51 shows timing parameters between a bus and
a strobe;
Figure 52 shows timing parameters between a bus and
a strobe;
Figure 53 shows an MPI read timing;
35 Figure 54 shows an MPI write timing;
Figure 55 shows organization of large integers in
the memory map;
Figure 56 shows a typical decoder clock regime;
Figure 57 shows input clock requirements;
40 Figure 58 shows the Spatial Decoder;
Figure 59 shows the inputs and outputs of the input
circuit;
Figure 60 shows the coded port protocol;
Figure 61 shows the start code detector;
45 Figure 62 shows start codes detected and converted
to Tokens;
Figure 63 shows the start codes detector passing
Tokens;
Figure 64 shows overlapping MPEG start codes (byte
50 aligned);
2145423
-
18
Figure 65 shows overlapping MPEG start codes (not
byte aligned);
Figure 66 shows jumping between two video
sequences;
5 Figure 67 shows a sequence of extra Token
insertion;
Figure 68 shows decoder start-up control;
Figure 69 shows enabled streams queued before the
output;
10 Figure 70 shows a spatial decoder buffer;
Figure 71 shows a buffer pointer;
Figure 72 shows a video demux;
Figure 73 shows a construction of a picture;
Figure 74 shows a construction of a 4:2:2
15 macroblock;
Figure 75 shows a calculating macroblock dimension
from pel ones;
Figure 76 shows spatial decoding;
Figure 77 shows an overview of H.261 inverse
20 quantization;
Figure 78 shows an overview of JPEG inverse
quantization;
Figure 79 shows an overview of MPEG inverse
quantization;
25 Figure 80 shows a quantization table memory map;
Figure 81 shows an overview of JPEG baseline
sequential structure;
Figure 82 shows a tokenised JPEG picture;
Figure 83 shows a temporal decoder;
30 Figure 84 shows a picture buffer specification;
Figure 85 shows an MPEG picture sequence (m=3);
Figure 86 shows how "I" pictures are stored and
output;
Figure 87 shows how "P" pictures are formed, stored
35 and output;
Figure 88 shows how "B" pictures are formed and
output;
Figure 89 shows P picture formation;
Figure 90 shows H.261 prediction formation;
Figure 91 shows an H.261 "sequence";
Figure 92 shows a hierarchy of H.261 syntax;
Figure 93 shows an H.261 picture layer;
Figure 94 shows an H.261 arrangement of groups of
blocks;
Figure 95 shows an H.261 "slice" layer;
Figure 96 shows an H.261 arrangement of
macroblocks;
Figure 97 shows an H.261 sequence of blocks;
Figure 98 shows an H.261 macroblock layer;
Figure 99 shows an H.261 arrangement of pels in
blocks;
21~5~23
Figure 100 shows a hierarchy of MPEG syntax;
Figure 101 shows an MPEG sequence layer;
Figure 102 shows an MPEG group of pictures layer;
Figure 103 shows an MPEG picture layer;
5 Figure 104 shows an MPEG "slice" layer;
Figure 105 shows an MPEG sequence of blocks;
Figure 106 shows an MPEG macroblock layer;
Figure 107 shows an "open GOP";
Figure 108 shows examples of access structure;
10 Figure 109 shows access start timing;
Figure 110 shows a fast page read cycle;
Figure 111 shows a fast page write cycle;
Figure 112 shows a refresh cycle;
Figure 113 shows extracting row and column address
15 from a chip address;
Figure 114 shows timing parameters for any strobe
signal;
Figure 115 shows timing parameters between any two
strobe signals;
20 Figure 116 shows timing parameters between a bus and
a strobe;
Figure 117 shows timing parameters between a bus and
a strobe;
Figure 118 shows a Huffman decoder and parser;
Figure 119 shows an H.261 and an MPEG AC Coefficient
Decoding Flow Chart;
Figure 120 shows a block diagram for JPEG (AC and
DC) coefficient decoding;
Figure 121 shows a flow diagram for JPEG (AC and DC)
coefficient decoding;
Figure 122 shows an interface to the Huffman Token
Formatter;
Figure 123 shows a token formatter block diagram;
Figure 124 shows an H.261 and an MPEG AC Coefficient
Decoding;
Figure 125 shows the interface to the Huffman ALU;
Figure 126 shows the basic structure of the Huffman
ALU;
Figure 127 shows the buffer manager;
40 Figure 128 shows an imodel and hsppk block diagram;
Figure 129 shows an imex state diagram;
Figure 130 illustrates the buffer start-up;
Figure 131 shows a DRAM interface;
Figure 132 shows a write swing buffer;
45 Figure 133 shows an arithmetic block;
Figure 134 shows an iq block diagram;
Figure 135 shows an iqca state machine;
Figure 136 shows an IDCT 1-D Transform Algorithm;
Figure 137 shows an IDCT 1-D Transform Architecture;
50 Figure 138 shows a token stream block diagram;
Figure 139 shows a standard block structure;
- 2145423
, 20
Figure 140 is a block diagram showing;
microprocessor test access;
Figure 141 shows 1-D Transform Micro-Architecture;
Figure 142 shows a temporal decoder block diagram;
5 Figure 143 shows the structure of a Two-wire
interface stage;
Figure 144 shows the address generator block
diagram;
Figure 145 shows the block and pixel offsets;
10 Figure 146 shows multiple prediction filters;
Figure 147 shows a single prediction filter;
Figure 148 shows the 1-D prediction filter;
Figure 149 shows a block of pixels;
Figure 150 shows the structure of the read rudder;
15 Figure 151 shows the block and pixel offsets;
Figure 152 shows a prediction example;
Figure 153 shows the read cycle;
Figure 154 shows the write cycle;
Figure 155 shows the top-level registers block
diagram with timing references;
Figure 156 shows the control for incrementing
presentation numbers;
Figure 157 shows the buffer manager state machine
(complete);
Figure 158 shows the state machine main loop;
Figure 159 shows the buffer 0 containing an SIF (22
by 18 macroblocks) picture;
Figure 160 shows the SIF component 0 with a display
window;
Figure 161 shows an example picture format showing
storage block address;
Figure 162 shows a buffer 0 containing a SIF (22 by
18 macroblocks) picture;
Figure 163 shows an example address calculation;
35 Figure 164 shows a write address generation state
machine;
Figure 165 shows a slice of the datapath;
Figure 166 shows a two cycle operation of the
datapath;
40 Figure 167 shows mode 1 filtering;
Figure 168 shows a horizontal up-sampler datapath;
and
Figure 169 shows the structure of the color-space
converter.
21 ` 2145g23
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK.
2145~2~
22
In the ensuing description of the practice of the
invention, the following terms are frequently used and are
generally defined by the following glossary:
GLO88ARY
BLOCR: An 8-row by 8-column matrix of pels, or 64 DCT
coefficients (source, quantized or dequantized).
~U~o~T~NcB (COMPONENT): A matrix, block or single pel
representing one of the two color difference signals related
to the primary colors in the manner defined in the bit
stream. The symbols used for the color difference signals
are Cr and Cb.
CODED REPRESENTATION: A data element as represented in its
encoded form.
CODED VIDEO BIT 8TREAM: A coded representation of a series of
one or more pictures as defined in this specification.
CODED ORDER: The order in which the pictures are transmitted
and decoded. This order is not necessarily the same as the
display order.
COMPONENT: A matrix, block or single pel from one of the
three matrices (luminance and two chrominance) that make up
a picture.
COMPRES8ION: Reduction in the number of bits used to
represent an item of data.
DECODER: An embodiment of a decoding process.
DECODING (PROCES8): The process defined in this specification
that reads an input coded bitstream and produces decoded
pictures or audio samples.
DI8PLAY ORDER: The order in which the decoded pictures are
displayed. Typically, this is the same order in which they
were presented at the input of the encoder.
ENCODING (PROCES8): A process, not specified in this
specification, that reads a stream of input pictures or audio
samples and produces a valid coded bitstream as defined in
this specification.
23 21~5423
INTRA CODING: Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses
information only from that macroblock or picture.
LUMINANCE (COMPONENT): A matrix, block or single pel
representing a monochrome representation of the signal and
related to the primary colors in the manner defined in the
bit stream. The symbol used for luminance is Y.
MACROBLOCR: The four 8 by 8 blocks of luminance data and the
two (for 4:2:0 chroma format) four (for 4:2:2 chroma format)
or eight (for 4:4:4 chroma format) corresponding 8 by 8
blocks of chrominance data coming from a 16 by 16 section of
the luminance component of the picture. Macroblock is
sometimes used to refer to the pel data and sometimes to the
coded representation of the pel values and other data
elements defined in the macroblock header of the syntax
defined in this part of this specification. To one of
ordinary skill in the art, the usage is clear from the
context.
MOTION COMPENSATION: The use of motion vectors to improve the
efficiency of the prediction of pel values. The prediction
uses motion vectors to provide offsets into the past and/or
future reference pictures containing previously decoded pel
values that are used to form the prediction error signal.
MOTION VECTOR: A two-dimensional vector used for motion
compensation that provides an offset from the coordinate
position in the current picture to the coordinates in a
reference picture.
NON-INTRA CODING: Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses
information both from itself and from macroblocks and
pictures occurring at other times.
PEL: Picture element.
PICTURE: Source, coded or reconstructed image data. A source
or reconstructed picture consists of three rectangular
matrices of 8-bit numbers representing the luminance and two
chrominance signals. For progressive video, a picture is
2145~23
-
24
identical to a frame, while for interlaced video, a picture
can refer to a frame, or the top field or the bottom field of
the frame depending on the context.
PREDICTION: The use of a predictor to provide an estimate of
the pel value or data element currently being decoded.
RECONFIGURA_LE PROCESS 8TAGE (RP8): A stage, which in
response to a recognized token, reconfigures itself to
perform various operations.
8LICE: A series of macroblocks.
TOREN: A universal adaptation unit in the form of an
interactive interfacing messenger package for control and/or
data functions.
8TART CODE8 t8YSTE~ AND VIDEo]: 32-bit codes embedded in a
coded bitstream that are unique. They are used for several
purposes including identifying some of the structures in the
coding syntax.
V~T~RTT~ LENGT~ CODING; VLC: A reversible procedure for
coding that assigns shorter code-words to frequent events and
longer code-words to less frequent events.
VIDEO 8EQ~ENCE: A series of one or more pictures.
Detailed Descriptions
21~5423
-
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT(8)
As an introduction to the most general features used in a
pipeline system which is utilized in the preferred
embodiments of the invention, Fig. 1 is a greatly simplified
illustration of six cycles of a six-stage pipeline. (As is
explained in greater detail below, the preferred embodiment
of the pipeline includes several advantageous features not
shown in Fig 1.).
Referring now to the drawings, wherein like reference
numerals denote like or corresponding elements throughout the
various figures of the drawings, and more particularly to
Fig. 1, there is shown a block diagram of six cycles in
practice of the present invention. Each row of boxes
illustrates a cycle and each of the different stages are
labelled A-F, respectively. Each shaded box indicates that
the corresponding stage holds valid data, i.e., data that is
to be processed in one of the pipeline stages. After
processing (which may involve nothing more than a simple
transfer without manipulation of the data) valid data is
transferred out of the pipeline as valid output data.
Note that an actual pipeline application may include more
or fewer than six pipeline stages. As will be appreciated,
the present invention may be used with any number of pipeline
stages. Furthermore, data may be processed in more than one
stage and the processing time for different stages can
differ.
In addition to clock and data signals (described below),
the pipeline includes two transfer control signals -- a
"VALID" signal and an "ACCEPT" signal. These signals are
used to control the transfer of data within the pipeline.
The VALID signal, which is illustrated as the upper of the
two lines connecting neighboring stages, is passed in a
forward or downstream direction from each pipeline stage to
the nearest neighboring device. This device may be another
21~59~3
--
pipeline stage or some other system. For example, the last
pipeline stage may pass its data on to subsequent processing
circuitry. The ACCEPT signal, which is illustrated as the
lower of the two lines connecting neighboring stages, passes
in the other direction upstream to a preceding device.
A data pipeline system of the type used in the practice of
the present invention has, in preferred embodiments, one or
more of the following characteristics:
1. The pipeline is "elastic" such that a delay at a
lo particular pipeline stage causes the minimum disturbance
possible to other pipeline stages. Succeeding pipeline
stages are allowed to continue processing and, therefore,
this means that gaps open up in the stream of data
following the delayed stage. Similarly, preceding
pipeline stages may also continue where possible. In this
case, any gaps in the data stream may, wherever possible,
be removed from the stream of data.
2. Control signals that arbitrate the pipeline are
organized so that they only propagate to the nearest
neighboring pipeline stages. In the case of signals
flowing in the same direction as the data flow, this is
the immediately succeeding stage. In the case of signals
flowing in the opposite direction to the data flow, this
is the immediately preceding stage.
3. The data in the pipeline is encoded such that many
different types of data are processed in the pipeline.
This encoding accommodates data packets of variable size
and the size of the packet need not be known in advance.
4. The overhead associated with describing the type of
data is as small as possible.
5. It is possible for each pipeline stage to recognize
only the minimum number of data types that are needed for
its required function. It should, however, still be able
to pass all data types onto the succeeding stage even
2~454~3
though it does not recognize them. This enables
communication between non-adjacent pipeline stages.
Although not shown in Fig. 1, there are data lines,
either single lines or several parallel lines, which form a
S data bus that also lead into and out of each pipeline stage.
As is explained and illustrated in greater detail below, data
is transferred into, out of, and between the stages of the
pipeline over the data lines.
Note that the first pipeline stage may receive data and
control signals from any form of preceding device. For
example, reception circuitry of a digital image transmission
system, another pipeline, or the like. On the other hand, it
may generate itself, all or part of the data to be processed
in the pipeline. Indeed, as is explained below, a "stage"
may contain arbitrary processing circuitry, including none at
all (for simple passing of data) or entire systems (for
example, another pipeline or even multiple systems or
pipelines), and it may generate, change, and delete data as
desired.
When a pipeline stage contains valid data that is to be
transferred down the pipeline, the VALID signal, which
indicates data validity, need not be transferred further than
to the immediately subsequent pipeline stage. A two-wire
interface is, therefore, included between every pair of
pipeline stages in the system. This includes a two-wire
interface between a preceding device and the first stage, and
between a subsequent device and the last stage, if such other
devices are included and data is to be transferred between
them and the pipeline.
Each of the signals, ACCEPT and VALID, has a HIGH and a
LOw value. These values are abbreviated as "H" and "L",
respectively. The most common applications of the pipeline,
in practicing the invention, will typically be digital. In
such digital implementations, the HIGH value may, for
- 2145423
28
example, be a logical "1" and the LOW value may be a logical
"O". The system is not restricted to digital
implementations, however, and in analog implementations, the
HIGH value may be a voltage or other similar quantity above
(or below) a set threshold, with the LOW value being
indicated by the corresponding signal being below (or above)
the same or some other threshold. For digital applications,
the present invention may be implemented using any known
technology, such as CMOS, bipolar etc.
It is not necessary to use a distinct storage device and
wires to provide for storage of VALID signals. This is true
even in a digital embodiment. All that is required is that
the indication of "validity" of the data be stored along with
the data. By way of example only, in digital television
pictures that are represented by digital values, as specified
in the international standard CCIR 601, certain specific
values are not allowed. In this system, eight-bit binary
numbers are used to represent samples of the picture and the
values zero and 255 may not be used.
If such a picture were to be processed in a pipeline built
in the practice of the present invention, then one of these
values (zero, for example) could be used to indicate that the
data in a specific stage in the pipeline is not valid.
Accordingly, any non-zero data would be deemed to be valid.
In this example, there is no specific latch that can be
identified and said to be storing the "validness" of the
associated data. Nonetheless, the validity of the data is
stored along with the data.
As shown in Fig. 1, the state of the VALID signal into
each stage is indicated as an ~H~ or an "L" on an upper,
right-pointed arrow. Therefore, the VALID signal from Stage
A into Stage B is LOW, and the VALID signal from Stage D into
Stage E is HIGH. The state of the ACCEPT signal into eacn
stage is indicated as an ~H~ or an ~L~ on a lower, left-
2145~23
29
pointing arrow. Hence, the ACCEPT signal from Stage E intoStage D is HIGH, whereas the ACCEPT signal from the device
connected downstream of the pipeline into Stage F is LOW.
Data is transferred from one stage to another during a
cycle (explained below) whenever the ACCEPT signal of the
downstream stage into its upstream neighbor is HIGH. If the
ACCEPT signal is LOW between two stages, then data is not
transferred between these stages.
Referring again to Fig. l, if a box is shaded, the
corresponding pipeline stage is assumed, by way of example,
to contain valid output data. Likewise, the VALID signal
which is passed from that stage to the following stage is
HIGH. Fig. 1 illustrates the pipeline when stages B, D, and
E contain valid data. Stages A, C, and F do not contain
valid data. At the beginning, the VALID signal into pipeline
stage A is HIGH, meaning that the data on the transmission
line into the pipeline is valid.
Also at this time, the ACCEPT signal into pipeline stage
F is LOW, so that no data, whether valid or not, is
transferred out of Stage F. Note that both valid and invalid
data is transferred between pipeline stages. Invalid data,
which is data not worth saving, may be written over, thereby,
eliminating it from the pipeline. However, valid data must
. not be written over since it is data that must be saved for
processing or use in a downstream device e.g., a pipeline
stage, a device or a system connected to the pipeline that
receives data from the pipeline.
In the pipeline illustrated in Fig. 1, Stage E contains
valid data D1, Stage D contains valid data D2, Stage B
contains valid data D3, and a device (not shown) connected to
the pipeline upstream contains data D4 that is to be
transferred into and processed in the pipeline. Stages B, D
and E, in addition to the upstream device, contain valid data
and, therefore, the VALID signal from these stages or devices
21454~3
into their respective following devices is HIGH. The VALID
signal from the Stages A, C and F is, however, LOW since
these stages do not contain valid data.
Assume now that the device connected downstream from the
pipeline is not ready to accept data from the pipeline. The
device signals this by setting the corresponding ACCEPT
signal LOW into Stage F. Stage F itself, however, does not
contain valid data and is, therefore, able to accept data
from the preceding Stage E. Hence, the ACCEPT signal from
Stage F into Stage E is set HIGH.
Similarly, Stage E contains valid data and Stage F is
ready to accept this data. Hence, Stage E can accept new
data as long as the valid data D1 is first transferred to
Stage F. In other words, although Stage F cannot transfer
data downstream, all the other stages can do so without any
valid data being overwritten or lost. At the end of Cycle 1,
data can, therefore, be "shifted" one step to the right.
This condition is shown in Cycle 2.
In the illustrated example, the downstream device is still
not ready to accept new data in Cycle 2 and, therefore, the
ACCEPT signal into Stage F is still LOW. Stage F cannot,
therefore, accept new data since doing so would cause valid
data Dl to be overwritten and lost. The ACCEPT signal from
Stage F into Stage E, therefore, goes LOW, as does the ACCEPT
signal from Stage E into Stage D since Stage E also contains
valid data D2. All of the Stages A-D, however, are able to
accept new data (either because they do not contain valid
data or because they are able to shift their valid data
downstream and accept new data) and they signal this
condition to their immediately preceding neighbors by setting
their corresponding ACCEPT signals HIGH.
The state of the pipelines after Cycle 2 is illustrated in
Fig. 1 for the row labelled Cycle 3. By way of example, it
is assumed that the downstream device is still not ready to
2145423
accept new data from Stage F (the ACCEPT signal into Stage F
is LOW). Stages E and F, therefore, are still "blocked", but
in Cycle 3, Stage D has received the valid data D3, which has
overwritten the invalid data that was previously in this
stage. Since Stage D cannot pass on data D3 in Cycle 3, it
cannot accept new data and, therefore, sets the ACCEPT signal
into Stage C LOW. However, stages A-C are ready to accept
new data and signal this by setting their corresponding
ACCEPT signals HIGH. Note that data D4 has been shifted from
Stage A to Stage B.
Assume now that the downstream device becomes ready to
accept new data in Cycle 4. It signals this to the pipeline
by setting the ACCEPT signal into Stage F HIGH. Although
Stages C-F contain valid data, they can now shift the data
downstream and are, thus, able to accept new data. Since
each stage is therefore able to shift data one step
downstream, they set their respective ACCEPT signals out
HIGH.
As long as the ACCEPT signal into the final pipeline stage
(in this example, Stage F) is HIGH, the pipeline shown in
Fig. 1 acts as a rigid pipeline and simply shifts data one
step downstream on each cycle. Accordingly, in Cycle 5, data
D1, which was contained in Stage F in Cycle 4, is shifted out
of the pipeline to the subsequent device, and all other data
is shifted one step downstream.
Assume now, that the ACCEPT signal into Stage F goes LOW
in Cycle 5. Once again, this means that Stages D-F are not
able to accept new data, and the ACCEPT signals out of these
stages into their immediately preceding neighbors go LOW.
Hence, the data D2, D3 and D4 cannot shift downstream,
however, the data D5 can. The corresponding state of the
pipeline after Cycle 5 is, thus, shown in Fig. 1 as Cycle 6.
The ability of the pipeline, in accordance with the
preferred embodiments of the present invention, to ~'fill up"
21~5423
empty processing stages is highly advantageous since the
processing stages in the pipeline thereby become decouple
from one another. In other words, even though a pipeline
stage may not be ready to accept data, the entire pipeline
5 does not have to stop and wait for the delayed stage.
Rather, when one stage is unable to accept valid data it
simply forms a temporary "wall" in the pipeline.
Nonetheless, stages downstream of the "wall" can continue to
advance valid data even to circuitry connected to the
pipeline, and stages to the left of the "wall" can still
accept and transfer valid data downstream. Even when several
pipeline stages temporarily cannot accept new data, other
stages can continue to operate normally. In particular, the
pipeline can continue to accept data into its initial stage
A as long as stage A does not already contain valid data that
cannot be advanced due to the next stage not being ready to
accept new data. As this example illustrates, data can be
transferred into the pipeline and between stages even when
one or more processing stages is blocked.
In the embodiment shown in Fig. 1, it is assumed that the
various pipeline stages do not store the ACCEPT signals they
receive from their immediately following neighbors. Instead,
whenever the ACCEPT signal into a downstream stage goes LOW,
this LOW signal is propagated upstream as far as the nearest
pipeline stage that does not contain valid data. For
example, referring to Fig. l, it was assumed that the ACCEPT
signal into Stage F goes LOW in Cycle 1. In Cycle 2, the LOW
signal propagates from Stage F back to Stage D.
In Cycle 3, when the data D3 is latched into Stage D, the
ACCEPT signal propagates upstream four stages to Stage C.
When the ACCEPT signal into Stage F goes HIGH in Cycle 4, it
must propagate upstream all the way to Stage C. In other
words, the chanqe in the ACCEPT signal must propagate back
four stages. It is not necessary, however, in the embodiment
- 2l~5423
illustrated in Fig. 1, for the ACCEPT signal to propagate all
the way back to the beginning of the pipeline if there is
some intermediate stage that is able to accept new data.
In the embodiment illustrated in Fig. 1, each pipeline
stage will still need separate input and output data latches
to allow data to be transferred between stages without
unintended overwriting. Also, although the pipeline
illustrated in Fig. 1 is able to "compress" when downstream
pipeline stages are blocked, i.e., they cannot pass on the
data they contain, the pipeline does not "expand" to provide
stages that contain no valid data between stages that do
contain valid data. Rather, the ability to compress depends
on there being cycles during which no valid data is presented
to the first pipeline stage.
In Cycle 4, for example, if the ACCEPT signal into Stage
F remained LOW and valid data filled pipeline stages A and B,
as long as valid data continued to be presented to Stage A
the pipeline would not be able to compress any further and
valid input data could be lost. Nonetheless, the pipeline
illustrated in Fig. 1 reduces the risk of data loss since it
is able to compress as long as there is a pipeline stage that
does not contain valid data.
Fig. 2 illustrates another embodiment of the pipeline that
can both compress and expand in a logical manner and which
includes circuitry that limits propagation of the ACCEPT
signal to the nearest preceding stage. Although the
circuitry for implementing this embodiment is explained and
illustrated in greater detail below, Fig. 2 serves to
illustrate the principle by which it operates.
For ease of comparison only, the input data and ACCEPT
slgnals into the pipeline embodiment shown in Fig. 2 are the
same as in the pipeline embodiment shown in Fig. .
Accordingly, stages E, D and B contain valid data Dl, D2 a.-,~
D3, respectively. The ACCEPT signal into Stage F is LOW; ar~
21454~3
34
data D4 is presented to the beqinning pipeline Stage A. In
Fig. 2, three lines are shown connecting each neighboring
pair of pipeline stages. The uppermost line, which may be a
bus, is a data line. The middle line is the line over which
the VALID signal is transferred, while the bottom line is the
line over which the ACCEPT signal is transferred. Also, as
before, the ACCEPT signal into Stage F remains LOW except in
Cycle 4. Furthermore, additional data D5 is presented to the
pipeline in Cycle 4.
In Fig. 2, each pipeline stage is represented as a block
divided into two halves to illustrate that each stage in this
embodiment of the pipeline includes primary and secondary
data storage elements. In Fig. 2, the primary data storage
is shown as the right half of each stage. However, it will
be appreciated that this delineation is for the purpose of
illustration only and is not intended as a limitation.
As Fig. 2 illustrates, as long as the ACCEPT signal into
a stage is HIGH, data is transferred from the primary storage
elements of the stage to the secondary storage elements of
the following stage during any given cycle. Accordingly,
although the ACCEPT signal into Stage F is LOW, the ACCEPT
signal into all other stages is HIGH so that the data Dl, D2
and D3 is shifted forward one stage in Cycle 2 and the data
D~ is shifted into the first Stage A.
Up to this point, the pipeline embodiment shown in Fig. 2
acts in a manner similar to the pipeline embodiment shown in
Fig. 1. The ACCEPT signal from Stage F into Stage E,
however, is HIGH even though the ACCEPT signal into Stage F
is LOW. As is explained below, because of the secondary
storage elements, it is not necessary for the LOW ACCEPT
signal to propagate upstream beyond Stage F. Moreover, by
leaving the ACCEPT signal into Stage E HIGH, Stage F signals
that it is ready to accept new data. Since Stage F is not
able to transfer the data Dl in its primary storage elements
2145423
downstream (the ACCEPT signal into Stage F is LOW) in Cycle
3, Stage E must, therefore, transfer the data D2 into the
secondary storage elements of Stage F. Since both the
primary and the secondary storage elements of Stage F now
contain valid data that cannot be passed on, the ACCEPT
signal from Stage F into Stage E is set LOW. Accordingly,
this represents a propagation of the LOW ACCEPT signal back
only one stage relative to Cycle 2, whereas this ACCEPT
signal had to be propagated back all the way to Stage C in
the embodiment shown in Fig. l.
Since Stages A-E are able to pass on their data, the
ACCEPT signals from the stages into their immediately
preceding neighbors are set HIGH. Consequently, the data D3
and D4 are shifted one stage to the right so that, in Cycle
4, they are loaded into the primary data storage elements of
Stage E and Stage C, respectively. Although Stage E now
contains valid data D3 in its primary storage elements, its
secondary storage elements can still be used to store other
data without risk of overwriting any valid data.
Assume now, as before, that the ACCEPT signal into Stage
F becomes HIGH in Cycle 4. This indicates that the
downstream device to which the pipeline passes data is ready
to accept data from the pipeline. Stage F, however, has set
its ACCEPT signal LOW and, thus, indicates to Stage E that
Stage F is not prepared to accept new data. Observe that the
ACCEPT signals for each cycle indicate what will "happen" in
the next cycle, that is, whether data will be passed on
(ACCEPT HIGH) or whether data must remain in place (ACCEPT
LOW). Therefore, from Cycle 4 to Cycle 5, the data D1 is
passed from Stage F to the following device, the data D2 is
shifted from secondary to primary storage in Stage F, but the
data D3 in Stage E is not transferred to Stage F. The data
D4 and D5 can be transferred into the following pipeline
stages as normal since the following stages have their ACCEPT
`~ 2145~2~
signals HIGH.
Comparing the state of the pipeline in Cycle 4 and Cycle
5, it can be seen that the provision of secondary storage
elements, enables the pipeline embodiment shown in Fig. 2 to
expand, that is, to free up data storage elements into which
valid data can be advanced. For example, in Cycle 4, the
data blocks D1, D2 and D3 form a "solid wall" since their
data cannot be transferred until the ACCEPT signal into Stage
F goes HIGH. Once this signal does become HIGH, however,
data D1 is shifted out of the pipeline, data D2 is shifted
into the primary storage elements of Stage F, and the
secondary storage elements of Stage F become free to accept
new data if the following device is not able to receive the
data D2 and the pipeline must once again "compress." This is
shown in Cycle 6, for which the data D3 has been shifted into
- the secondary storage elements of Stage F and the data D4 has
been passed on from Stage D to Stage E as normal.
Figs. 3a(1), 3a(2), 3b(1) and 3b(2) (which are referred to
collectively as Fig. 3) illustrate generally a preferred
embodiment of the pipeline. This preferred embodiment
implements the structure shown in Fig. 2 using a two-phase,
non-overlapping clock with phases 00 and 01. Although a two-
phase clock is preferred, it will be appreciated that it is
also possible to drive the various embodiments of the
invention using a clock with more than two phases.
As shown in Fig. 3, each pipeline stage is represented as
having two separate boxes which illustrate the primary and
secondary storage elements. Also, although the VALID signal
and the data lines connect the various pipeline stages as
before, for ease of illustration, only the ACCEPT signal is
shown in Fig. 3. A change of state during a clock phase of
certain of the ACCEPT signals is indicated in Fig. 3 using an
upward-pointing arrow for changes from LOW to HIGH.
Similarly, a downward-pointing arrow for changes from HIGH to
214~423
-
37
LOW. Transfer of data from one storage element to another is
indicated by a large open arrow. It is assumed that the
VALID signal out of the primary or secondary storage elements
of any given stage is HIGH whenever the storage elements
contain valid data.
In Fig. 3, each cycle is shown as consisting of a full
period of the non-overlapping clock phases ao and ol. As is
explained in greater detail below, data is transferred from
the secondary storage elements (shown as the left box in each
stage) to the primary storage elements (shown as the right
box in each stage) during clock cycle 01, whereas data is
transferred from the primary storage elements of one stage to
the secondary storage elements of the following stage during
the clock cycle oO. Fig. 3 also illustrates that the primary
and secondary storage elements in each stage are further
connected via an internal acceptance line to pass an ACCEPT
signal in the same manner that the ACCEPT signal is passed
from stage to stage. In this way, the secondary storage
element will know when it can pass its date to the primary
storage element.
Fig. 3 shows the 01 phase of Cycle 1, in which data D1, D2
and D3, which were previously shifted into the secondary
storage elements of Stages E, D and B, respectively, are
shifted into the primary storage elements of the respective
2~ stage. During the ol phase of Cycle 1, the pipeline,
therefore, assumes the same configuration as is shown as
Cycle 1 of Fig. 2. As before, the ACCEPT signal into Stage
F is assumed to be LOW. As Fig. 3 illustrates, however, this
means that the ACCEPT signal into the primary storage element
~o of Stage F is LOW, but since this storage element does not
contain valid data, it sets the ACCEPT signal into its
secondary storage element HIGH.
The ACCEPT signal from the secondary storage elements of
Stage F into the primary storage elements of Stage E is also
21~S423
-
38
set HIGH since the secondary storage elements of Stage F do
not contain valid data. As before, since the primary storage
elements of Stage F are able to accept data, data in all the
upstream primary and secondary storage elements can be
shifted downstream without any valid data being overwritten.
The shift of data from one stage to the next takes place
during the next ~0 phase in Cycle 2. For example, the valid
data D1 contained in the primary storage element of Stage E
is shifted into the secondary storage element of Stage F, the
data D4 is shifted into the pipeline, that is, into the
secondary storage element of Stage A, and so forth.
The primary storage element of Stage F still does not
contain valid data during the 00 phase in Cycle 2 and,
therefore, the ACCEPT signal from the primary storage
elements into the secondary storage elements of Stage F
remains HIGH. During the 01 phase in Cycle 2, data can
therefore be shifted yet another step to the right, i.e.,
from the secondary to the primary storage elements within
each stage.
However, once valid data is loaded into the primary
storage elements of Stage F, if the ACCEPT into Stage F from
the downstream device is still LOW, it is not possible to
shift data out of the secondary storage element of Stage F
without overwriting and destroying the valid data Dl. The
ACCEPT signal from the primary storage elements into the
secondary storage elements of Stage F therefore goes LOW.
Data D2, however, can still be shifted into the secondary
storage of Stage F since it did not contain valid data and
its ACCEPT signal out was HIGH.
During the ~1 phase of Cycle 3, it is not possible to
shift data D2 into the primary storage elements of Stage F,
- although data can be shifted within all the previous stages.
Once valid data is loaded into the secondary storage elemen-s
of Stage F, however, Stage F is not able to pass on this
`-` 21~5423
39
data. It signals this event setting its ACCEPT signal out
LOW.
Assuming that the ACCEPT signal into Stage F remains LOW,
data upstream of Stage F can continue to be shifted between
stages and within stages on the respective clock phases until
the next valid data block D3 reaches the primary storage
elements of Stage E. As illustrated, this condition is
reached during the ~1 phase of Cycle 4.
During the ao phase of Cycle 5, data D3 has been loaded
into the primary storage element of Stage E. Since this data
cannot be shifted further, the ACCEPT signal out of the
primary storage elements of Stage E is set LOW. Upstream
data can be shifted as normal.
Assume now, as in Cycle 5 of Fig. 2, that the device
lS connected downstream of the pipeline is able to accept
pipeline data. It signals this event by setting the ACCEPT
signal into pipeline Stage F HIGH during the 01 phase of
Cycle 4. The primary storage elements of Stage F can now
shift data to the right and they are also able to accept new
data. Hence, the data Dl was shifted out during the al phase
of Cycle 5 so that the primary storage elements of Stage F no
longer contain data that must be saved. During the al phase
of Cycle 5, the data D2 is, therefore, shifted within Stage
F from the secondary storage elements to the primary storage
elements. The secondary storage elements of Stage F are also
able to accept new data and signal this by setting the ACCEPT
signal into the primary storage elements of Stage E HIGH.
During transfer of data within a stage, that is, from its
secondary to its primary storage elements, both sets of
storage elements will contain the same data, but the data in
the secondary storage elements can be overwritten with no
data loss since this data will also be held in the primary
storage elements. The same holds true for data transfer from
the primary storage elements of one stage into the secondary
214542~
storage elements of a subsequent stage.
Assume now, that the ACCEPT signal into the primary
storage elements of Stage F goes LOW during the al phase in
Cycle 5. This means that Stage F is not able to transfer the
data D2 out of the pipeline. Stage F, consequently, sets the
ACCEPT signal from its primary to its secondary storage
elements LOW to prevent overwriting of the valid data D2.
The data D2 stored in the secondary storage elements of Stage
F, however, can be overwritten without loss, and the data D3,
is therefore, transferred into the secondary storage elements
of Stage F during the aO phase of Cycle 6. Data D4 and D5
can be shifted downstream as normal. Once valid data D3 is
stored in Stage F along with data D2, as long as the ACCEPT
signal into the primary storage elements of Stage F is LOW,
neither of the secondary storage elements can accept new
data, and it signals this by setting the ACCEPT signal into
Stage E LOW.
When the ACCEPT signal into the pipeline from the
downstream device changes from LOW to HIGH or vice versa,
this change does not have to propagate upstream within the
pipeline further than to the immediately preceding storage
elements (within the same stage or within the preceding
pipeline stage). Rather, this change propagates upstream
within the pipeline one storage element block per clock
phase.
As this example illustrates, the concept of a "stage" in
the pipeline structure illustrated in Fig. 3 is to some
extent a matter of perception. Since data is transferred
within a stage (from the secondary to the primary storage
elements) as it is between stages (from the primary storage
elements of the upstream stage into the secondary storage
elements of the neighboring downstream stage), one could just
as well consider a stage to consist of "primary" storage
elements followed by ~secondary storage elements~ instead of
~` 21~542~
41
as illustrated in Fig. 3. The concept of "primary" and
"secondary" storage elements is, therefore, mostly a question
of labeling. In Fig. 3, the "primary" storage elements can
also be referred to as "output" storage elements, since they
are the elements from which data is transferred out of a
stage into a following stage or device, and the "secondary"
storage elements could be "input" storage elements for the
same stage.
In explaining the aforementioned embodiments, as shown in
Figs. 1-3, only the transfer of data under the control of the
ACCEPT and VALID signals has been mentioned. It is to be
further understood that each pipeline stage may also process
the data it has received arbitrarily before passing it
between its internal storage elements or before passing it to
the following pipeline stage. Therefore, referring once
again to Fig. 3, a pipeline stage can, therefore, be defined
as the portion of the pipeline that contains input and output
storage elements and that arbitrarily processes data stored
in its storage elements.
Furthermore, the "device" downstream from the pipeline
Stage F, need not be some other type of hardware structure,
but rather it can be another section of the same or part of
another pipeline. As illustrated below, a pipeline stage can
set its ACCEPT signal LOW not only when all of the downstream
2~ storage elements are filled with valid data, but also when a
stage requires more than one clock phase to finish processing
its data. This also can occur when it creates valid data in
one or both of its storage elements. In other words, it is
not necessary for a stage simply to pass on the ACCEPT signal
based on whether or not the immediately downstream storage
elements contains valid data that cannot be passed on.
Rather, the ACCEPT signal itself may also be altered within
the stage or, by circuitry external to the stage, in order to
control the passage of data between adjacent storage
~' 21gS~-~3
42
elements. The VALID signal may also be processed in an
analogous manner.
A great advantage of the two-wire interface (one wire for
each of the VALID and ACCEPT signals) is its ability to
control the pipeline without the control signals needing to
propagate back up the pipeline all the way to its beginning
stage. Referring once again to Fig. 1, Cycle 3, for example,
although stage F "tells" stage E that it cannot accept data,
and stage E tells stage D, and stage D tells stage C.
Indeed, if there had been more stages containing valid data,
then this signal would have propagated back even further
along the pipeline. In the embodiment shown in Fig. 3, Cycle
3, the LOW ACCEPT signal is not propagated any further
upstream than to Stage E and, then, only to its primary
storage elements.
As described below, this embodiment is able to achieve
this flexibility without adding significantly to the silicon
area that is required to implement the design. Typically,
each latch in the pipeline used for data storage requires
only a single extra transistor (which lays out very
efficiently in silicon). In addition, two extra latches and
a small number of gates are preferably added to process the
ACCEPT and VALID signals that are associated with the data
. latches in each half-stage.
25Fig. 4 illustrates a hardware structure that implements a
stage as shown in Fig. 3.
By way of example only, it is assumed that eight-bit data
is to be transferred (with or without further manipulation in
optional combinatorial logic circuits) in parallel through
'0 the pipeline. However, it will be appreciated that either
more or less than eight-bit data can be used in practicing
the invention. Furthermore, the two-wire interface in
accordance with this embodiment is, however, suitable for use
with any data bus width, and the data bus width may even
-` 214~423
43
change from one stage to the next if a particular application
so requires. The in~erface in accordance with this
embodiment can also be used to process analog signals.
As discussed previously, while other conventional timing
arrangements may be used, the interface is preferably
controlled by a two-phase, non-overlapping clock. In Figs.
4-9, these clock phase signals are referred to as PH0 and
PHl. In Fig. 4, a line is shown for each clock phase signal.
Input data enters a pipeline stage over a multi-bit data
bus IN_DATA and is transferred to a following pipeline stage
or to subsequent receiving circuitry over an output data bus
OUT_DATA. The input data is first loaded in a manner
described below into a series of input latches (one for each
input data signal) collectively referred to as LDIN, which
constitute the secondary storage elements described above.
In the illustrated example of this embodiment, it is
assumed that the Q outputs of all latches follow their D
inputs, that is, they are "loaded", when the clock input is
HIGH, i.e., at a logic "1" level. Additionally, the Q
outputs hold their last values. In other words, the Q
outputs are "latched" on the falling edge of their respective
clock signals. Each latch has for its clock either one of
two non-overlapping clock signals PH0 or PHl (as shown in
Fig. 5), or the logical AND combination of one of these clock
signals PH0, PHl and one logic signal. The invention works
equally well, however, by providing latches that latch on the
rising edges of the clock signals, or any other known
latching arrangement, as long as conventional methods are
applied to ensure proper timing of the latching operations.
30The output data from the input data latch LDIN passes via
an arbitrary and optional combinatorial logic circuit B1,
which may be provided to convert output data from input latch
LDI~ into intermediate data, which is then later loaded in an
output data latch LDOUT, which comprises the primary storaae
2145423
44
elements described above. The output from the output data
latch LDOUT may similarly pass through an arbitrary and
optional combinatorial logic circuit B2 before being passed
onward as OUT_DATA to the next device downstream. This may
be another pipeline stage or any other device connected to
the pipeline.
In the practice of the present invention, each stage of
the pipeline also includes a validation input latch LVIN, a
validation output latch LVOUT, an acceptance input latch
LAIN, and an acceptance output latch LAOUT. Each of these
four latches is, preferably, a simple, single-stage latch.
The outputs from latches LVIN, LVOUT, LAIN and LAOUT are,
respectively, QVIN, QVOUT, QAIN, QAOUT. The output signal
QVIN from the validation input latch is connected either
directly as an input to the validation output latch LVOUT, or
via intermediate logic devices or circuits that may alter the
signal.
Similarly, the output validation signal QVOUT of a given
stage may be connected either directly to the input of the
validation input latch QVIN of the following stage, or via
intermediate devices or logic circuits, which may alter the
validation signal. This output QVIN is also connected to a
logic gate (to be described below), whose output is connected
to the input of the acceptance input latch LAIN. The output
QAOUT from the acceptance output latch LAOUT is connected to
a similar logic gate (described below), optionally via
another logic gate.
As shown in Fig. 4, the output validation signal QVOUT
forms an OUT_VALID signa that can be received by subsequent
stages as an IN VALID signal, or simply to indicate valid
data to subsequent circuity connected to the pipeline. The
readiness of the following circuit or stage to accept data is
indicated to each stage as the signal OUT_ACCEPT, which is
connected as the input to the acceptance output latch LAOUT,
- 21~5~23
\
preferably via logic circuitry, which is described below.
Similarly, the output QAOUT of the acceptance output latch
LAOUT is connected as the input to the acceptance input latch
LAIN, preferably vla logic circuitry, which is described
below.
In practicing the present invention, the output signals
QVIN, QVOUT from the validation latches LVIN, LVOUT are
combined with the acceptance signals QAOUT, OUT_ACCEPT,
respectively, to form the inputs to the acceptance latches
LAIN, LAOUT, respectively. In the embodiment illustrated in
Fig. 4, these input signals are formed as the logical NAND
combination of the respective validation signals QVIN, QVOUT,
with the logical inverse of the respective acceptance output
signals QAOUT, OUT_ACCEPT. Conventional logic gates, NAND1
and NAND2, perform the NAND operation, and the inverters
INV1, INV2 form the logical inverses of the respective
acceptance signals.
As is well known in the art of digital design, the output
from a NAND gate is a logical "1" when any or all of its
input signals are in the logical "0" state. The output from
a NAND gate is, therefore, a logical "0" only when all of its
inputs are in the logical "1" state. Also well known in the
art, is that the output of a digital inverter such as INVl is
a logical "1" when its input signal is a "0" and is a "o"
when its input signal is a "1"
The inputs to the NAND gate NAND1 are, therefore, QVIN and
NOT (QAOUT), where "NOT" indicates binary inversion. Using
known techniques, the input to the acceptance latch LAIN can
be resolved as follows:
NAND(QVIN,NOT(QAOUT)) = NOT(QVIN) OR QAOUT
In other words, the combination of the inverter INV1 and
the NAND gate NAND1 is a logical "1" either when the signal
QVIN is a "0" or the signal QAOUT is a "1", or both. The
gate NAND1 and the inverter INV1 can, therefore, be
-- 214542~
46
implemented by a single OR gate that has one of its inputs
tied directly to the QAOUT output of the acceptance latch
LAOUT and its other input tied to the inverse of the output
signal QVIN of the validation input latch LVIN.
S As is well known in the art of digital design, many
latches suitable for use as the validation and acceptance
latches may have two outputs, Q and NOT(Q), that is, Q and
its logical inverse. If such latches are chosen, the one
input to the OR gate can, therefore, be tied directly to the
NOT(Q) output of the validation latch LVIN. The gate NANDl
and the inverter INV1 can be implemented using well known
conventional techniques. Depending on the latch architecture
used, however, it may be more efficient to use a latch
without an inverting output, and to provide instead the gate
NAND1 and the inverter INVl, both of which also can be
implemented efficiently in a silicon device. Accordingly,
any known arrangement may be used to generate the Q signal
and/or its logical inverse.
The data and validation latches LDIN, LDOUT, LVIN and
LVOUT, load their respective data inputs when both clock
signals (PH0 at the input side and PH1 at the output side)
and the output from the acceptance latch of the same side are
logical "1". Thus, the clock signal (PHO for the input
latches LDIN and LVIN) and the output of the respective
acceptance latch (in this case, LAIN) are used in a logical
AND manner and data is loaded only when they are both logical
" 1 " .
In particular applications, such as CMOS implementations
of the latches, the logical AND operation that controls the
loading (via the illustrated CK or enabling "input") of the
latches can be implemented easily in a conventional manner by
connecting the respective enabling input signals (for
example, PH0 and QAIN for the latches LVIN and LDIN), to the
gates of MOS transistors connected in series in the input
2145423
lines of the latches. Consequently, is necessary to provide
an actual logic AND gate, which might cause problems of
timing due to propagation delay in high-speed applications.
The AND gate shown in the figures, therefore, only indicates
the logical function to be performed in generating the enable
signals of the various latches.
Thus, the data latch LDIN loads input data only when PH0
and QAIN are both "1". It will latch this data when either
of these two signals goes to a "0".
Although only one of the clock phase signals PH0 or PHl,
is used to clock the data and validation latches at the input
(and output) side of the pipeline stage, the other clock
phase signal is used, directly, to clock the acceptance latch
at the same side. In other words, the acceptance latch on
either side (input or output) of a pipeline stage is
preferably clocked "out of phase" with the data and
validation latches on the same side. For example, PHl is
used to clock the acceptance input latch, although PH0 is
used in generating the clock signal CK for the data latch
LDIN and the validation latch LVIN.
As an example of the operation of a pipeline augmented by
the two-wire validation and acceptance circuitry assume that
no valid data is initially presented at the input to the
circuit, either from a preceding pipeline stage, or from a
transmission device. In other words, assume that the
validation input signal IN_VALID to the illustrated stage has
not gone to a "1" since the system was most recently reset.
Assume further that several clock cycles have taken place
since the system was last reset and, accordingly, the
circuitry has reached a steady-state condition. The
validation input signal QVIN from the validation latch LVIN
is, therefore, loaded as a "0" during the next positive
period of the clock PH0. The input to the acceptance input
latch LAIN (via the gate NANDl or another equivalent gate),
21A5~23
48
is, therefore, loaded as a "1" during the next positive
period of the clock signal PH1. In other words, since the
data in the data input latch LDIN is not valid, the stage
signals that it is ready to accept input data (since it does
not hold any data worth saving).
In this example, note that the signal IN_ACCEPT is used to
enable the data and validation latches LDIN and LVIN. Since
the signal IN_ACCEPT at this time is a "1", these latches
effectively work as conventional transparent latches so that
whatever data is on the IN_DATA bus simply is loaded into the
data latch LDIN as soon as the clock signal PH0 goes to a
"1". Of course, this invalid data will also be loaded into
the next data latch LDOUT of the following pipeline stage as
long as the output QAOUT from its acceptance latch is a "1".
Hence, as long as a data latch does not contain valid
data, it accepts or "loads" any data presented to it during
the next positive period of its respective clock signal. On
the other hand, such invalid data is not loaded in any stage
for which the acceptance signal from its corresponding
acceptance latch is low (that is, a "0"). Furthermore, the
output signal from a validation latch (which forms the
validation input signal to the subsequent validation latch)
remains a "O" as long as the corresponding IN_VALID (or QVIN)
signal to the validation latch is low.
When the input data to a data latch is valid, the
validation signal IN_VALID indicates this by rising to a "1".
The output of the corresponding validation latch then rises
to a "1" on the next rising edge of its respective clock
phase signal. For example, the validation input signal QVIN
of latch LVIN rises to a "1" when its corresponding IN_VAL~
signal goes high (that is, rises to a "1") on the next rislng
edge of the clock phase signal PH0.
Assume now, instead, that the data input latch LDI~
contains valid data. If the data output latch LDOUT is read.
` 211S423
to accept new data, its acceptance signal QAOUT will be a
"1". In this case, during the next positive period of the
clock signal PH1, the data latch LDOUT and validation latch
LVOUT will be enabled, and the data latch LDOUT will load the
data present at its input. This will occur before the next
rising edge of the other clock signal PH0, since the clock
signals are non-overlapping. At the next rising edge of PH0,
the preceding data latch (LDIN) will, therefore, not latch in
new input data from the preceding stage until the data output
latch LDOUT has safely latched the data transferred from the
latch LDIN.
Accordingly, the same sequence is followed by every
adjacent pair of data latches (within a stage or between
adjacent stages) that are able to accept data, since they
will be operating based on alternate phases of the clock.
Any data latch that is not ready to accept new data because
it contains valid data that cannot yet be passed, will have
an output acceptance signal (the QA output from its
acceptance latch LA) that is LOW, and its data latch LDIN or
LDOUT will not be loaded. Hence, as long as the acceptance
signal (the output from the acceptance latch) of a given
stage or side (input or output) of a stage is LOW, its
corresponding data latch will not be loaded.
Fig. 4 also shows a reset feature included in a preferred
embodiment. In the illustrated example, a reset signal
NOTRESET0 is connected to an inverting reset input R
(inversion is hereby indicated by a small circle, as is
conventional) of the validation output latch LVOUT. As is
well known, this means that the validation latch LVOUT will
be forced to output a "0" whenever the reset signal NOTRESET0
becomes a "0". One advantage of resetting the latch when the
reset signal goes low (becomes a "0") is that a break in
transmission will reset the latches. They will then be in
their ~null~ or reset state whenever a valid transmission
2145423
begins and the reset signal goes HIGH. The reset signal
NOTRESET0, therefore, operates as a digital "ON/OFF" switch,
such that it must be at a HIGH value in order to activate the
pipeline.
Note that it is not necessary to reset all of the latches
that hold valid data in the pipeline. As depicted in Fig. 4,
the validation input latch LVIN is not directly reset by the
reset signal NOTRESET0, but rather is reset indirectly.
Assume that the reset signal NOTRESET0 drops to a "0". The
validation output signal QVOUT also drops to a "0",
regardless of its previous state, whereupon the input to the
acceptance output latch LAOUT (via the gate NAND1) goes HIGH.
The acceptance output signal QAOUT also rises to a "1". This
QAOUT value of "1" is then transferred as a "1" to the input
of the acceptance input latch LAIN regardless of the state of
the validation input signal QVIN. The acceptance input
signal QAIN then rises to a "1" at the next rising edge of
the clock signal PH1. Assuming that the validation signal
IN_~ALID has been correctly reset to a "0", then upon the
subsequent rising edge of the clock signal PH0, the output
from the validation latch LVIN will become a "0", as it would
have done if it had been reset directly.
As this example illustrates, it is only necessary to reset
the validation latch in only one side of each stage
(including the final stage) in order to reset all validation
latches. In fact, in many applications, it will not be
necessary to reset every other validation latch: If the
reset signal NOTRESET0 can be guaranteed to be low during
more than one complete cycle of both phases PH0, PH1 of the
clock, then the "automatic reset" (a backwards propagation of
the reset signal) will occur for validation latches in
preceding pipeline stages. Indeed, if the reset signal is
held low for at least as many full cycles of both phases of
the clock as there are pipeline stages, it will only be
- 21~5~23
-
51
necessary to directly reset the validation output latch in
the final pipeline stage.
Figs. 5a and 5b (referred to collectively as Fig. 5)
illustrate a timing diagram showing the relationship between
the non-overlapping clock signals PH0, PH1, the effect of the
reset signal, and the holding and transfer of data for the
different permutations of validation and acceptance signals
into and between the two illustrated sides of a pipeline
stage configured in the embodiment shown in Fig. 4. In the
example illustrated in the timing diagram of Fig. 5, it has
been assumed that the outputs from the data latches LDIN,
LDOUT are passed without further manipulation by intervening
logic blocks Bl, BZ. This is by way of example and not
necessarily by way of limitation. It is to be understood
that any combinatorial logic structures may be included
between the data latches of consecutive pipeline stages, or
between the input and output sides of a single pipeline
stage. The actual illustrated values for the input data (for
example the HEX data words "aa" or "04") are also merely
illustrative. As is mentioned above, the input data bus may
have any width (and may even be analog), as long as the data
latches or other storage devices are able to accommodate and
latch or store each bit or value of the input word.
Preferred Data ~tructure - "token~"
In the sample application shown in Fig. 4, each stage
processes all input data, since there is no control circuitry
that excludes any stage from allowing input data to pass
through its combinatorial logic block B1, B2, and so forth.
To provide greater flexibility, the present invention
includes a data structure in which ~tokens~ are used to
distribute data and control information throughout the
system. Each token consists of a series of binary bits
separated into one or more blocks of token words.
214~423
-
52
Furthermore, the bits fall into one of three types: address
bits (A), data bits (D), or an extension bit (E). Assume by
way of example and, not necessarily by way of limitation,
that data i5 transferred as words over an 8-bit bus with a 1-
bit extension bit line. An example of a four-word token is,
in order of transmission:
First word: E A A A D D D D D
Second word: E D D D D D D D D
Third word: E D D D D D D D D
lo Fourth word: E D D D D D D D D
Note that the extension bit E is used as an addition
(preferably) to each data word. In addition, the address
field can be of variable length and is preferably transmitted
just after the extension bit of the first word.
Tokens, therefore, consist of one or more words of
(binary) digital data in the present invention. Each of
these words is transferred in sequence and preferably in
parallel, although this method of transfer is not necessary:
serial data transfer is also possible using known techniques.
For example, in a video parser, control information is
transmitted in parallel, whereas data is transmitted
serially.
As the example illustrates, each token has, preferably at
the start, an address field (the string of A-bits) that
identifies the type of data that is contained in the token.
In most applications, a single word or portion of a word is
sufficient to transfer the entire address field, but this is
not necessary in accordance with the invention, so long as
logic circuitry is included in the corresponding pipeline
'O stages that is able to store some representation of partial
address fields long enough for the stages to receive and
decode the entire address field.
--` 21~5423
53
Note that no dedicated wires or registers are required to
transmit the address field. It is transmitted using the data
bits. As is explained below, a pipeline stage will not be
slowed down if it is not intended to be activated by the
particular address field, i.e., the stage will be able to
pass along the token without delay.
The remainder of the data in the token following the
address field is not constrained by the use of tokens. These
D-data bits may take on any values and the meaning attached
1~ to these bits is of no importance here. That is, the meaning
of the data can vary, for example, depending upon where the
data is positioned within the system at a particular point in
time. The number of data bits D appended after the address
field can be as long or as short as required, and the number
1~ of data words in different tokens may vary greatly. The
address field and extension bit are used to convey control
signals to the pipeline stages. Because the number of words
in the data field (the string of D bits) can be arbitrary, as
can be the information conveyed in the data field can also
vary accordin~ly. The explanation below is, therefore,
directed to the use of the address and extension bits.
In the present invention, tokens are a particularly useful
data structure when a number of blocks of circuitry are
connected together in a relatively simple configuration. The
2~ simplest configuration is a pipeline of processing steps.
For example, in the one shown in Fig. 1. The use of tokens,
however, is not restricted to use on a pipeline structure.
Assume once again that each box represents a complete
pipeline stage. In the pipeline of Fig. 1, data flows from
left to rlght in the dlagram. Data enters the machine and
passes into processing Stage A. This may or may not modif~
the data and it then passes the data to Stage B. T~.e
modification, if any, may be arbitrarily complicated and, .~
general, there will not be the same number of data ite s
--` 21~5423
54
flowing into any stage as flow out. Stage B modifies the
data again and passes it onto Stage C, and so forth. In a
scheme such as this, it is impossible for data to flow in the
opposite direction, so that, for example, Stage C cannot pass
data to Stage A. This restriction is often perfectly
acceptable.
On the other hand, it is very desirable for Stage A to be
able to communicate information to Stage C even though there
is no direct connection between the two blocks. Stage A and
C communication is only via Stage B. One advantage of the
tokens is their ability to achieve this kind of
communication. Since any processing stage that does not
recognize a token simply passes it on unaltered to the next
block.
According to this example, an extension bit is transmitted
along with the address and data fields in each token so that
a processing stage can pass on a token (which can be of
arbitrary length) without having to decode its address at
all. According to this example, any token in which the
extension bit is HIGH (a "1") is followed by a subsequent
word which is part of the same token. This word also has an
extension bit, which indicates whether there is a further
token word in the token. When a stage encounters a token
word whose extension bit is LOW (a "0"), it is known to be
the last word of the token. The next word is then assumed to
be the first word of a new token.
Note that although the simple pipeline of processing
stages is particularly useful, it will be appreciated that
tokens may be applied to more complicated configurations of
processing elements. An example of a more complicated
processing element is described below.
It is not necessary, in accordance with the present
lnvention, to use the state of the extension bit to signal
the last word of a given token by giving it an extension bit
~` 214542~
set to "0". One alternative to the preferred scheme is to
move the extension bit so that it indicates the first word of
a token instead of the last. This can be accomplished with
appropriate changes in the decoding hardware.
The advantage of using the extension bit of the present
invention to signal the last word in a token rather than the
first, is that it is often useful to modify the behavior of
a block of circuitry depending upon whether or not a token
has extension bits. An example of this is a token that
activates a stage that processes video quantization values
stored in a quantization table (typically a memory device).
For example, a table containing 64 eight-bit arbitrary binary
integers.
In order to load a new quantization table into the
quantizer stage of the pipeline, a "QUANT_TABLE" token is
sent to the quantizer. In such a case the token, for
example, consists of 65 token words. The first word contains
the code "QUANT_TABLE", i.e., build a quantization table.
This is followed by 64 words, which are the integers of the
quantization table.
When encoding video data, it is occasionally necessary to
transmit such a quantization table. In order to accomplish
this function, a QUANT_TABLE token with no extension words
can be sent to the quantizer stage. On seeing this token,
and noting that the extension bit of its first word is LOW,
the quantizer stage can read out its quantization table and
construct a QUANT_TABLE token which includes the 64
quantization table values. The extension bit of the first
word (which was LOW) is changed so that it is HIGH and the
token continues, with HIGH extension bits, until the new end
of the token, indicated by a LOW extension bit on the sixty
fourth quantization table value. This proceeds in the
typical way through the system and is encoded into the bit
stream.
214~423
56
Continuing with the example, the quantizer may either load
a new quantization table into its own memory device or read
out its table depending on whether the first word of the
QUANT_TABLE token has its extension bit set or not.
The choice of whether to use the extension bit to signal
the first or last token word in a token will, therefore,
depend on the system in which the pipeline will be used.
Both alternatives are possible in accordance with the
invention.
Another alternative to the preferred extension bit scheme
is to include a length count at the start of the token. Such
an arrangement may, for example, be efficient if a token is
very long. For example, assume that a typical token in a
given application is 1000 words long. Using the illustrated
extension bit scheme (with the bit attached to each token
word), the token would require 1000 additional bits to
contain all the extension bits. However, only ten bits would
be required to encode the token length in binary form.
Although there are, therefore, uses for long tokens,
experience has shown that there are many uses for short
tokens. Here the preferred extension bit scheme is
advantageous. If a token is only one word long, then only
one bit is required to signal this. However, a counting
scheme would typically require the same ten bits as before.
Disadvantages of a length count scheme include the
following: 1) it is inefficient for short tokens; 2) it
places a maximum length restriction on a token (with only ten
bits, no more than 1023 words can be counted); 3) the length
of a token must be known in advance of generating the count
(which is presumably at the start of the token); 4) every
block of circuitry that deals with tokens would need to be
provided with hardware to count words; and 5) if the count
should get corrupted (due to a data transmission error) it lS
not clear whether recovery can be achieved.
21~5423
57
The advantages of the extension bit scheme in accordance
with the present invention include: 1) pipeline stages need
not include a block of circuitry that decodes every token
since unrecognized tokens can be passed on correctly by
considering only the extension bit; 2) the coding of the
extension bit is identical for all tokens; 3) there is no
limit placed on the length of a token; 4) the scheme is
efficient (in terms of overhead to represent the length of
the token) for short tokens; and 5) error recovery is
naturally achieved. If an extension bit is corrupted then
one random token will be generated (for an extension bit
corrupted from "1" to "0") or a token will be lost (extension
bit corrupted "0" to "1"). Furthermore, the problem is
localized to the tokens concerned. After that token, correct
operation is resumed automatically.
In addition, the length of the address field may be
varied. This is highly advantageous since it allows the most
common tokens to be squeezed into the minimum number of
words. This, in turn, is of great importance in video data
pipeline systems since it ensures that all processing stages
can be continuously running at full bandwidth.
In accordance to the present invention, in order to allow
variable length address fields, the addresses are chosen so
. that a short address followed by random data can never be
2~ confused with a longer address. The preferred technique for
encoding the address field (which also serves as the "code"
for activating an intended pipeline stage) is the well-known
technique first described by Huffman, hence the common name
"Huffman Code". Nevertheless, it will be appreciated by one
of ordinary skill in the art, that other coding schemes may
also be successfully employed.
Although Huffman encoding is well understood in the field
of digital design, the following example provides a general
background:
~` 21~5423
.
58
Huffman codes consist of words made up of a string of
symbols (in the context of digital systems, such as the
present invention, the symbols are usually binary digits).
The code words may have variable length and the special
property of Huffman code words is that a code word is chosen
so that none of the longer code words start with the symbols
that form a shorter code word. In accordance with the
invention, token address fields are preferably (although not
necessarily) chosen using known Huffman encoding techniques.
lo Also in the present invention, the address field
preferably starts in the most significant bit (MSB) of the
first word token. (Note that the designation of the MSB is
arbitrary and that this scheme can be modified to accommodate
various designations of the MSB.) The address field
continues through contiguous bits of lesser significance.
If, in a given application, a token address requires more
than one token word, the least significant bit in any given
word the address field will continue in the most significant
bit of the next word. The minimum length of the address
field is one bit.
Any of several known hardware structures can be used to
generate the tokens used in the present invention. one such
structure is a microprogrammed state machine. However, known
microprocessors or other devices may also be used.
The principle advantage of the token scheme in accordance
with the present invention, is its adaptability to
unanticipated needs. For example, if a new token is
introduced, it is most likely that this will affect only a
small number of pipeline stages. The most likely case is
~o that only two stages or blocks of circuitry are affected,
i.e., the one block that generates the tokens in the firs~
place and the block or stage that has been newly designed c~
modified to deal with this new token. Note that it is nc.
necessary to modify any other pipeline stages. Rather, these
2145423
`
59
will be able to deal with the new token without modification
to their designs because they will not recognize it and will,
accordingly, pass that token on unmodified.
This ability of the present invention to leave
substantially existing designed devices unaffected has clear
advantages. It may be possible to leave some semiconductor
chips in a chip set completely unaffected by a design
improvement in some other chips in the set. This is
advantageous both from the perspective of a customer and from
that of a chip manufacturer. Even if modifications mean that
all chips are affected by the design change (a situation that
becomes increasingly likely as levels of integration progress
so that the number of chips in a system drops) there will
still be the considerable advantage of better time-to-market
than can be achieved, since the same design can be reused.
In particular, note the situation that occurs when it
becomes necessary to extend the token set to include two word
addresses. Even in this case, it is still not necessary to
modify an existing design. Token decoders in the pipeline
stages will attempt to decode the first word of such a token
and will conclude that it does not recognize the token. It
will then pass on the token unmodified using the extension
bit to perform this operation correctly. It will not attempt
to decode the second word of the token (even though this
contains address bits) because it will "assume" that the
second word is part of the data field of a token that it does
not recognize.
In many cases, a pipeline stage or a connected block of
circuitry will modify a token. This usually, but not
necessarily, takes the form of modifying the data field of a
token. In addition, it is common for the number of data
words in the token to be modified, either by removing certain
data words or by adding new ones. In some cases, tokens are
removed entirely from the token stream.
214S423
-
In most applications, pipeline stages will typically only
decode (be activated by) a few tokens; the stage does not
recognize other tokens and passes them on unaltered. In a
large number of cases, only one token is decoded, the DATA
Token word itself.
In many applications, the operation of a particular stage
will depend upon the results of its own past operations. The
"state" of the stage, thus, depends on its previous states.
In other words, the stage depends upon stored state
information, which is another way of saying it must retain
some information about its own history one or more clock
cycles ago. The present invention is well-suited for use in
pipelines that include such "state machine" stages, as well
as for use in applications in which the latches in the data
path are simple pipeline latches.
The suitability of the two-wire interface, in accordance
with the present invention, for such "state machine" circuits
is a significant advantage of the invention. This is
especially true where a data path is being controlled by a
state machine. In this case, the two-wire interface
technique above-described may be used to ensure that the
"current state" of the machine stays in step with the data
which it is controlling in the pipeline.
Fig. 6 shows a simplified block diagram of one example of
circuitry included in a pipeline stage for decoding a token
address field. This illustrates a pipeline stage that has
the characteristics of a "state machine". Each word of a
token includes an "extension bit" which is HIGH if there are
~ore words in the token or LOW if this is the last word of
the token. If this is the last word of a token, the next
valid data word is the start of a new token and, therefore,
its address must be decoded. The decision as to whether or
not to decode the token address in any given word, thus,
depends upon knowing the value of the previous extension bit.
214~423
61
For the sake of simplicity only, the two-wire interface
(with the acceptance and validation signals and latches) is
not illustrated and all details dealing with resetting the
circuit are omitted. As before, an 8-bit data word is
assumed by way of example only and not by way of limitation.
This exemplifying pipeline stage delays the data bits and
the extension bit by one pipeline stage. It also decodes the
DATA Token. At the point when the first word of the DATA
Token is presented at the output of the circuit, the signal
"DATA_ADDR" is created and set HIGH. The data bits are
delayed by the latches LDIN and LDOUT, each of which is
repeated eight times for the eight data bits used in this
example (corresponding to an 8-input, 8-output latch).
Similarly, the extension bit is delayed by extension bit
latches LEIN and LEOUT.
In this example, the latch LEPREV is provided to store the
most recent state of the extension bit. The value of the
extension bit is loaded into LEIN and is then loaded into
LEOUT on the next rising edge of the non-overlapping clock
phase signal PH1. Latch LEOUT, thus, contains the value of
the current extension bit, but only during the second half of
the non-overlapping, two-phase clock. Latch LEPREV, however,
loads this extension bit value on the next rising edge of the
clock signal PHO, that is, the same signal that enables the
extension bit input latch LEIN. The output QEPREV of the
latch LEPREV, thus, will hold the value of the extension bit
during the previous PHO clock phase.
The five bits of the data word output from the inverting
Q output, plus the non-inverted MD[2], of the latch LDIN are
combined with the previous extension bit value QEPREV in a
series of logic gates NANDl, NAND2, and NORl, whose
operations are well known in the art of digital design. The
designation "N_MD[m] indicates the logical inverse of bit .m
of the mid-data word MD[7:0]. Using known techniques of
- 21~5423
62
Boolean algebra, it can be shown that the output signal SA
from this logic block (the output from NORl) is HIGH (a "1")
only when the previous extension bit is a "O" (QPREV="O") and
the data word at the output of the non-inverting Q latch (the
5original input word) LDIN has the structure "000001xx", that
is, the five high-order bits MD[7]-MD[3~ bits are all "0" and
the bit MD[2] is a "1" and the bits in the Zero-one positions
have any arbitrary value.
There are, thus, four possible data words (there are four
permutations of "xx") that will cause SA and, therefore, the
output of the address signal latch LADDR to whose input SA is
connected, to become HIGH. In other words, this stage
provides an activation signal (DATA_ADDR = "l") only when one
of the four possible proper tokens is presented and only when
the previous extension bit was a zero, that is, the previous
data word was the last word in the previous series of token
words, which means that the current token word is the first
one in the current token.
When the signal QPREV from latch LEPREV is LOW, the value
at the output of the latch LDIN is therefore the first word
of a new token. The gates NAND1, NAND2 and NORl decode the
DATA token (000001xx). This address decoding signal SA is,
however, delayed in latch LADDR so that the signal DATA ADDR
. has the same timing as the output data OUT_DATA and OUT_EXTN.
25Fig. 7 is another simple example of a state-dependent
pipeline stage in accordance with the present invention,
which generates the signal LAST_OUT_EXTN to indicate the
value of the previous output extension bit OUT_EXTN. One of
the two enabling signals (at the CK inputs) to the present
and last extension bit latches, LEOUT and LEPREV,
respectively, is derived from the gate ANDl such that these
latches only load a new value for them when the data is valid
and is being accepted (the Q outputs are HIGH from the
output validation and acceptance latches LVOUT and LAO-~,
21~23
-
respectively). In this way, they only hold valid extension
bits and are not loaded with spurious values associated with
data that is not valid. In the embodiment shown in Fig. 7,
the two-wire valid/accept logic includes the OR1 and OR2
gates with input signals consisting of the downstream
acceptance signals and the invertin~ output of the validation
latches LVIN and LVOUT, respectively. This illustrates one
way in which the gates NAND1/2 and INVl/2 in Fig. 4 can be
replaced if the latches have inverting outputs.
Although this is an extremely simple example of a "state-
dependent" pipeline stage, i.e., since it depends on the
state of only a single bit, it is generally true that all
latches holding state information will be updated only when
data is actually transferred between pipeline stages. In
other words, only when the data is both valid and being
accepted by the next stage. Accordingly, care must be taken
to ensure that such latches are properly reset.
The generation and use of tokens in accordance with the
present invention, thus, provides several advantages over
known encoding techniques for data transfer through a
plpel ine .
First, the tokens, as described above, allow for variable
length address fields (and can utilize Huffman coding for
example) to provide efficient representation of common
tokens.
Second, consistent encoding of the length of a token
allows the end of a token (and hence the start of the next
token) to be processed correctly (including simple non-
manipulative transfer), even if the token is not recognized
by the token decoder circuitry in a given pipeline stage.
Third, rules and hardware structures for the handling of
unrecognized tokens (that is, for passing them on unmodlfied)
allow communication between one stage and a downstream stage
that is not its nearest neighbor in the pipeline. This also
214S423
-
64
increases the expandability and efficient adaptability of the
pipeline since it allows for future changes in the token set
without requiring large scale redesigning of existing
pipeline stages. The tokens of the present invention are
particularly useful when used in conjunction with the two-
wire interface that is described above and below.
As an example of the above, Figs. 8a and 8b, taken
together (and referred to collectively below as Fig. 8),
depict a block diagram of a pipeline stage whose function is
as follows. If the stage is processing a predetermined token
(known in this example as the DATA token), then it will
duplicate every word in this token with the exception of the
first one, which includes the address field of the DATA
token. If, on the other hand, the stage is processing any
other kind of token, it will delete every word. The overall
effect is that, at the output, only DATA Tokens appear and
each word within these tokens is repeated twice.
Many of the components of this illustrated system may be
the same as those described in the much simpler structures
shown in Figs. 4, 6, and 7. This illustrates a significant
advantage. More complicated pipeline stages will still enjoy
the same benefits of flexibility and elasticity, since the
sar.e two-wire interface may be used with little or no
adaptation.
2~ The data duplication stage shown in Fig. 8 is merely one
example of the endless number of different types of
operations that a pipeline stage could perform in any given
application. This "duplication stage" illustrates, however,
a stage that can form a "bottleneck", so that the pipeline
according to this embodiment will "pack together".
A "bottleneck" can be any stage that either takes a
relatively long time to perform its operations, or that
creates more data in the pipeline than it receives. This
example also illustrates that the two-wire accept/valid
214S~23
interface according to this embodiment can be adapted very
easily to different applications.
The duplication stage shown in Fig. 8 also has two latches
LEIN and LEOUT that, as in the example shown in Fig. 6, latch
the state of the extension bit at the input and at the output
of the stage, respectively. As Fig. 8a shows, the input
extension latch LEIN is clocked synchronously with the input
data latch LDIN and the validation signal IN VALID.
For ease of reference, the various latches included in the
duplication stage are paired below with their respective
output signals:
In the duplication stage, the output from the data latch
LDIN forms intermediate data referred to as MID_DATA. This
intermediate data word is loaded into the data output latch
LDOUT only when an intermediate acceptance signal (labeled
"MID_ACCEPT" in Fig. 8a) is set HIGH.
The portion of the circuitry shown in Fig. 8 below the
acceptance latches LAIN, LAOUT, shows the circuits that are
added to the basic pipeline structure to generate the various
`-` 214S423
66
internal control signals used to duplicate data. These
include a "DATA_TOKEN" signal that indicates that the
circuitry is currently processing a valid DATA Token, and a
NOT_DUPLICATE signal which is used to control duplication of
data. When the circuitry is processing a DATA Token, the
NOT_DUPLICATE signal toggles between a HIGH and a LOW state
and this causes each word in the token to be duplicated once
(but no more times). When the circuitry is not processing a
valid DATA Token then the NOT DUPLICATE signal is held in a
HIGH state. Accordingly, this means that the token words
that are being processed are not duplicated.
As Fig. 8a illustrates, the upper six bits of 8-bit
intermediate data word and the output signal QI1 from the
latch LI1 form inputs to a group of logic gates NOR1, NOR2,
NAND18. The output signal from the gate NAND18 is labeled
S1. Using well-known 8001ean algebra, it can be shown that
the signal Sl is a "O" only when the output signal QI1 is a
"1" and the MID_DATA word has the following structure:
"OOOOOlxx", that is, the upper five bits are all "O", the bit
MID_DATA[2] is a "1" and the bits in the MID_DATA[l] and
MID_DATA[O] positions have any arbitrary value. Signal Sl,
therefore, acts as a "token identification signal" which is
low only when the MID_DATA signal has a predetermined
structure and the output from the latch LIl is a "1". The
nature of the latch LI1 and its output QI1 is explained
further below.
Latch LOl performs the function of latching the last value
of the intermediate extension bit (labeled "MID_EXTN" and as
signal S4), and it loads this value on the next rising edge
of the clock phase PHO into the latch LI1, whose output is
the bit QIl and is one of the inputs to the token decoding
logic group that forms signal S1. Signal Sl, as is explained
above, may only drop to a "O" if the signal QI1 is a "1" (and
the MID DATA signal has the predetermined structure). Signal
214~423
`~,
67
Sl may, therefore, only drop to a "O" whenever the last
extension bit was "0", indicating that the previous token has
ended. Therefore, the MID_DATA word is the first data word
in a new token.
The latches LO2 and LI2 together with the NAND gates
NAND20 and NAND22 form storage for the signal, DATA_TOKEN.
In the normal situation, the signal QI1 at the input to
NAND20 and the signal Sl at the input to NAND22 will both be
at logic "1". It can be shown, again by the techniques of
Boolean algebra, that in this situation these NAND gates
operate in the same manner as inverters, that is, the signal
QI2 from the output of latch LI2 is inverted in NAND20 and
then this signal is inverted again by NAND22 to form the
signal S2. In this case, since there are two logical
inversions in this path, the signal S2 will have the same
value as QI2.
It can also be seen that the signal DATA_TOKEN at the
output of latch LO2 forms the input to latch LI2. As a
result, as long as the situation remains in which both QI1
and S1 are HIGH, the signal DATA_TOKEN will retain its state
(whether "0" or "1"). This is true even though the clock
signals PHO and PH1 are clocking the latches (LI2 and LO2
respectively). The value of DATA_TOKEN can only change when
. one or both of the signals QIl and S1 are "0".
2~ As explained earlier, the signal QI1 will be "0" when the
previous extension bit was "0". Thus, it will be "0"
whenever the MID_DATA value is the first word of a token
(and, thus, includes the address field for the token). In
this situation, the signal Sl may be either "0" or "1". As
explained earlier, signal S1 will be "0" if the MID_DATA word
has the predetermined structure that in this example
indicates a "DATA" Token. If the MID_DATA word has any other
structure, (indicating that the token is some other token,
not a DATA Token), S1 will be "1".
-- 21~5423
68
If QI1 is "0" and S1 is "1", this indicates there is some
token other than a DATA Token. As is well known in the field
of digital electronics, the output of NAND20 will be "1".
The NAND gate NAND22 will invert this (as previously
explained) and the signal S2 will thus be a "0". As a
result, this "0" value will be loaded into latch L02 at the
start of the next PH1 clock phase and the DATA_TOKEN signal
will become "0", indicating that the circuitry is not
processing a DATA token.
If QI1 is "0" and SO is "0", thereby indicating a DATA
token, then the signal S2 will be "1" (regardless of the
other input to NAND22 from the output of NAND20). As a
result, this "1" value will be loaded into latch L02 at the
start of the next PH1 clock phase and the DATA_TOKEN signal
will become "1", indicating that the circuitry is processing
a DATA token.
The NOT_DUPLICATE signal (the output signal Q03) is
similarly loaded into the latch LI3 on the next rising edge
of the clock PHO. The output signal QI3 from the latch LI3
is combined with the output signal QI2 in a gate NAND24 to
form the signal S3. As before, Boolean algebra can be used
to show that the signal S3 is a "0" only when both of the
signals QI2 and QI3 have the value "1". If the signal QI2
becomes a "0", that is, the DATA TOKEN signal is a "0", then
the signal 53 becomes a "1". In other words, if there is not
a valid DATA TOKEN (QI2 = 0) or the data word is not a
duplicate (QI3 = 0), then the signal S3 goes high.
Assume now, that the DATA TOKEN signal remains HIGH for
more than one clock signal. Since the NOT_DUPLICATE signal
(Q03) is "fed back" to the latch LI3 and will be inverted by
the gate NAND 24 (since its other input QI2 is held HIGH),
the output signal Q03 will toggle between "0" and "1". If
there is no valid DATA Token, however, the signal QI2 will be
a "0", and the signal S3 and the output Q03, will be forced
-- 21~S~23
HIGH until the DATE_TOKEN signal once again goes to a "1".
The output QO3 (the NOT_DUPLICATE signal) is also fed back
and is combined with the output QA1 from the acceptance latch
LAIN in a series of logic gates (NAND16 and INV16, which
S together form an AND gate) that have as their output a "1",
only when the signals QA1 and QO3 both have the value "1".
As Fig. 8a shows, the output from the AND gate (the gate
NAND16 followed by the gate INV16) also forms the acceptance
signal, IN_ACCEPT, which is used as described above in the
two-wire interface structure.
The acceptance signal IN_ACCEPT is also used as an
enabling signal to the latches LDIN, LEIN, and LVIN. As a
result, if the NOT_DUPLICATE signal is low, the acceptance
signal IN_ACCEPT will also be low, and all three of these
latches will be disabled and will hold the values stored at
their outputs. The stage will not accept new data until the
NOT_DUPLICATE signal becomes HIGH. This is in addition to
the requirements described above for forcing the output from
the acceptance latch LAIN high.
As long as there is a valid DATA_TOKEN (the DATA_TOKEN
signal QO2 is a "1"), the signal QO3 will toggle between the
HIGH and LOW states, so that the input latches will be
enabled and will be able to accept data, at most, during
every other complete cycle of both clock phases PH0, PH1.
The additional condition that the following stage be prepared
to accept data, as indicated by a "HIGH" OUT_ACCEPT signal,
must, of course, still be satisfied. The output latch LDOUT
will, therefore, place the same data word onto the output bus
OUT_DATA for at least two full clock cycles. The OUT_VALID
signal will be a "1" only when there is both a valid
DATA_TOKEN (QO2 HIGH) and the validation signal QVOUT is
HIGH.
The signal QEIN, which is the extension bit corresponding
to MID_DATA, is combined with the signal S3 in a series of
`- 2145423
logic gates (INV10 and NAND10) to form a signal S4. During
presentation of a DATA Token, each data word MID_DATA will be
repeated by loading it into the output latch LDOUT twice.
During the first of these, S4 will be forced to a "1" by the
action of NAND10. The signal S4 is loaded in the latch LEOUT
to form OUTEXTN at the same time a-- MID_DATA is loaded into
LDOUT to form OUT_DATA[7:0].
Thus, the first time a given MID_DATA is loaded into
LEOUT, the associated OUTEXTN will be forced high, whereas,
on the second occasion, OUTEXTN will be the same as the
signal QEIN. Now consider the situation during the very last
word of a token in which QEIN is known to be low. During the
first time MID_DATA is loaded into LDOUT, OUTEXTN will be
"1", and during the second time, OUTEXTN will be "0",
indicating the true end of the token.
The output signal QVIN from the validation latch LVIN is
combined with the signal QI3 in a similar gate combination
(INV12 and NAND12) to form a signal S5. Using known Boolean
techniques, it can be shown that the signal S5 is HIGH either
when the validation signal QVIN is HIGH, or when the signal
QI3 is low (indicating that the data is a duplicate). The
signal S5 is loaded into the validation output latch LVOUT at
the same time that MID_DATA is loaded into LDOUT and the
intermediate extension bit (signal S4) is loaded into LEOUT.
Signal S5 is also combined with the signal QO2 (the data
token signal) in the logic gates NAND30 and INV30 to form the
output validation signal OUT_VALID. As was mentioned
earlier, OUT_VALID is HIGH only when there is a valid token
and the validation signal QVOUT is high.
In the present invention, the MID ACCEPT signal is
combined with the signal S5 in a series of logic gates
(NAND26 and INV26) that perform the well-known AND function
to form a signal S6 that is used as one of the two enabling
signals to the latches LO1, LO2 and LO3. The signal S6 rises
214S423
-
71
to a "1" when the MID_ACCEPT signal is HIGH and when either
the validation signal QVIN is high, or when the token is a
duplicate (QI3 is a "O"). If the signal MID_ACCEPT is HIGH,
the latches LO1-LO3 will, therefore, be enabled when the
clock signal PH1 is high whenever valid input data is loaded
at the input of the stage, or when the latched data is a
duplicate.
From the discussion above, one can see that the stage
shown in Figs. 8a and 8b will receive and transfer data
between stages under the control of the validation and
acceptance signals, as in previous embodiments, with the
exception that the output signal from the acceptance latch
LAIN at the input side is combined with the toggling
duplication signal so that a data word will be output twice
before a new word will be accepted.
The various logic gates such as NAND16 and INV16 may, of
course, be replaced by equivalent logic circuitry (in this
case, a single AND gate). Similarly, if the latches LEIN and
LVIN, for example, have inverting outputs, the inverters
INV10 and INV12 will not be necessary. Rather, the
corresponding input to the gates NAND10 and NAND12 can be
tied directly to the inverting outputs of these latches. As
long as the proper logical operation is performed, the stage
will operate in the same manner. Data words and extension
bits will still be duplicated.
One should note that the duplication function that the
illustrated stage performs will not be performed unless the
first data word of the token has a "1" in the third position
of the word and "O's" in the five high-order bits. (Of
course, the required pattern can easily be changed and set by
selecting other logic gates and interconnections other than
the NOR1, NOR2, NND18 gates shown.)
In addition, as Fig. 8 shows, the OUT_VALID signal will be
forced low during the entire token unless the first data word
2145423
ha~ the structure described above. This has the effect that
all tokens except the one that causes the duplication process
will be deleted from the token stream, since a device
connected to the output terminals (OUTDATA, OUTEXTN and
S OUTVALID) will not recognize these token words as valid data.
As before, both validation latches LVIN, LVOUT in the
stage can be reset by a single conductor NOT_RESETO, and a
single resetting input R on the downstream latch LVOUT, with
the reset signal being propagated backwards to cause the
upstream validation latch to be forced low on the next clock
cycle.
It should be noted that in the example shown in Fig. 8,
the duplication of data contained in DATA tokens serves only
as an example of the way in which circuitry may manipulate
the ACCEPT and VALID signals so that more data is leaving the
pipeline stage than that which is arriving at the input.
Similarly, the example in Fig. 8 removes all non-DATA tokens
purely as an illustration of the way in which circuitry may
manipulate the VALID signal to remove data from the stream.
In most typical applications, however, a pipeline stage will
simply pass on any tokens that it does not recognize,
unmodified, so that other stages further down the pipeline
may act upon them if required.
Figs. 9a and 9b taken together illustrate an example of a
timing diagram for the data duplication circuit shown in
Figs. 8a and 8b. As before, the timing diagram shows the
relationship between the two-phase clock signals, the various
internal and external control signals, and the manner in
which data is clocked between the input and output sides of
the stage and is duplicated.
Referring now more particularly to Figure 10, there is
shown a reconfigurable process stage in accordance with one
- 21~S42~
aspect of the present invention.
Input latches 34 receive an input over a first bus
31. A first output from the input latches 34 is passed over
line 32 to a token decode subsystem 33. A second output from
the input latches 34 iB passed as a first input over line 35
to a processing unit 36. A first output from the token decode
subsystem 33 is passed over line 37 as a second input to the
processing unit 36. A second output from the token decode 33
is passed over line 40 to an action identification unit 39.
The action identification unit 39 also receives input from
registers 43 and 44 over line 46. The registers 43 and 44
hold the state of the machine as a whole. This state is
determined by the history of tokens previously received. The
output from the action identification unit 39 is passed over
line 38 as a third input to the processing unit 36. The
output from the processing unit 36 is passed to output
latches 41. The output from the output latches 41 is passed
over a second bus 42.
Referring now to Figure 11, a Start Code Detector
tSCD) 51 receives input over a two-wire interface 52. This
input can be either in the form of DATA tokens or as data
bits in a data stream. A first output from the Start Code
Detector 51 is passed over line 53 to a first logical first-
in first-out buffer (FIF0) 54. The output from the first
FIF0 54 is logically passed over line 55 as a first input to
a Huffman decoder 56. A second output from the Start Code
Detector 51 is passed over line 57 as a first input to a DRAM
interface 58. The DRAM interface 58 also receives input from
a buffer manager 59 over line 60. Signals are transmitted to
and received from external DRAM (not shown) by the DRAM
interface 58 over line 61. A first output from the DRAM
interface 58 is passed over line 62 as a first physical input
to the Huffman decoder 56.
- 2 1~5~ 23
74
The output from the Huffman decoder 56 is passed
over line 63 as an input to ~n Index to Data Unit (ITOD) 64.
The Huffman decoder 56 and the ITOD 64 work together as a
single logical unit. The output from the ITOD 64 is passed
over line 65 to an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) 66. A first
output from the ALU 66 is passed over line 67 to a read-only
memory (ROM) state machine 68. The output from the ROM state
machine 68 is passed over line 69 as a second physical input
to the Huffman decoder 56. A second~output from the ALU 66
is passed over line 70 to a Token Formatter (T/F) 71.
A first output 72 from the TIF 71 of the present
invention is passed over line 72 to a second FIFO 73. The
output from the second FIFO 73 is passed over line 74 as a
first input to an inverse modeller 75. A second output from
the T/F 71 is passed over line 76 as a third input to the
DRAM interface 58. A third output from the DRAM interface 58
is passed over line 77 as a second input to the inverse
modeller 75. The output from the inverse modeller 75 is
passed over line 78 as an input to an inverse quantizer 79
The output from the inverse quantizer 79 is passed over line
80 as an input to an inverse zig-zag (IZZ) 81. The output
from the IZZ 81 is passed over line 82 as an input to an
inverse discrete cosine transform (IDCT) 83. The output from
the IDCT 83 is passed over line 84 to a temporal decoder (not
shown).
Referring now more particularly to Figure 12, a
temporal decoder in accordance with the present invention is
shown. A fork 91 receives as input over line 92 the output
from the IDCT 83 (shown in Fig. 11). As a first output from
the fork 91, the control tokens, e.g., motion vectors and the
like, are passed over line 93 to an address generator 94.
Data tokens are also passed to the address generator 94 for
counting purposes. As a second output from the fork 91, the
21~5~23
data is passed over line 95 to a FIFO 96. The output from the
FIFO 96 is then passed over line 97 as a first input to a
summer 98. The output from the address generator 94 is
passed over line 99 as a first input to a DRAM interface 100.
S Signals are transmitted to and received from external DRAM
(not shown) by the DRAM interface 100 over line 101. A first
output from the DRAM interface 100 is passed over line 102 to
a prediction filter 103. The output from the prediction
filter 103 is passed over line 104 as a second input to the
summer 98. A first output from the summer 98 is passed over
line 105 to output selector 106. A second output from the
summer 98 is passed over line 107 as a second input to the
DRAM interface 100. A second output from the DRAM interface
100 is passed over line 108 as a second input to the output
selector 106. The output from the output selector 106 is
passed over line 109 to a Video Formatter (not shown in
Figure 12).
Referring now to Figure 13, a fork 111 receives
input from the output selector 106 (shown in Figure 12) over
line 112. As a first output from the fork 111, the control
tokens are passed over line 113 to an address generator 114.
The output from the address generator 114 is passed over line
115 as a first input to a DRAM interface 116. As a second
output from the fork 111 the data is passed over line 117 as
a second input to the DRAM interface 116. Signals are
transmitted to and received from external DRAM (not shown) by
the DRAM interface 116 over line 118. The output from the
DRAM interface 116 is passed over line 119 to a display pipe
120.
It will be apparent from the above descriptions
that each line may comprise a plurality of lines, as
necessary.
214542~
76
Referring now to Figure 14a, in the MPEG standard
a picture 131 is encoded as one or more slices 132. Each
slice 132 is, in turn, comprised of a plurality of blocks
133, and is encoded row-by-row, left-to-right in each row.
As is shown, each slice 132 may span exactly one full line of
blocks 133, less than one line B or D of blocks 133 or
multiple lines C of blocks 133.
Referring to Figure 14b, in the JPEG and H.261
standards, the Common Intermediate Format (CIF) is used,
wherein a picture 141 is encoded as 6 rows each containing 2
groups of blocks (GOBs) 142. Each GOB 142 is, in turn,
composed of either 3 rows or 6 rows of an indeterminate
number of blocks 143. Each GOB 142 is encoded in a zigzag
direction indicated by the arrow 144. The GOBs 142 are, in
turn, processed row-by-row, left-to-right in each row.
Referring now to Figure 14c, it can be seen that,
for both MPEG and CIF, the output of the encoder is in the
form of a data stream 151. The decoder receives this data
stream 151. The decoder can then reconstruct the image
according to the format used to encode it. In order to allow
the decoder to recognize start and end points for each
standard, the data stream 151 is segmented into lengths of 33
blocks 152.
Referring to Figure 15, a Venn diagram is shown,
representing the range of values possible for the table
selection from the Huffman decoder 56 (shown in Fig. 11) of
the present invention. The values possible for an MPEG
decoder and an H.261 decoder overlap, indicating that a
single table selection will decode both certain MPEG and
certain H.261 formats. Likewise, the values possible for an
MPEG decoder and a JPEG decoder overlap, indicating that a
single table selection will decode both certain MPEG and
2115423
certain JPEG formats. Additionally, it is shown that the
H.261 values and the JPEG values do not overlap, indicating
that no single table selection exists that will decode both
formats.
Referring now more particularly to Figure 16, there
is shown a schematic representation of variable length
picture data in accordance with the practice of the present
invention. A first picture 161 to be processed contains a
first PICTURE_START token 162, first-picture information of
indeterminate length 163, and a first PICTURE END token 164.
A second picture 165 to be processed contains a second
PICTURE_START token 166, second picture information of
indeterminate length 167, and a second PICTURE_END token 168.
The PICTURE_START tokens 162 and 166 indicate the start of
lS the pictures 161 and 165 to the processor. Likewise, the
PICTURE_END tokens 164 and 168 signify the end of the
pictures 161 and 165 to the processor. This allows the
processor to process picture information 163 and 167 of
variable lengths.
Referring to Figure 17, a split 171 receives input
over line 172. A first output from the split 171 is passed
over line 173 to an address generator 174. The address
generated by the address generator 174 is passed over line
175 to a DRAM interface 176. Signals are transmitted to and
received from external DRAM (not shown) by the DRAM interface
176 over line 177. A first output from the DRAM interface
176 is passed over line 178 to a prediction filter 179. The
output from the prediction filter 179 is passed over line 180
as a first input to a summer 181. A second output from the
split 171 is passed over line 182 as an input to a first-in
first-out buffer (FIF0) 183. The output from the FIF0 183 is
passed over line 184 as a second input to the summer 181.
The output from the summer 181 is passed over line 185 to a
`- 214S423
78
write signal generator 186. A first output from the write
signal generator 186 is passed over line 187 to the DRAM
interface 176. A second output from the write signal
generator 186 is passed over line 188 as a first input to a
read signal generator 189. A second output from the DRAM
interface 176 is pAsFe~ over line 190 as a second input to
the read signal generator 189. The output from the read
signal generator 189 is passed over line 191 to a Video
Formatter (not shown in Figure 17).
Referring now to Figure 18, the prediction
filtering process is illustrated. A forward picture 201 is
passed over line 202 as a first input to a summer 203. A
backward picture 204 is passed over line 205 as a second
input to the summer 203. The output from the summer 203 is
passed over line 206.
Referring to Figure 19, a slice 211 comprises one
or more macroblocks 212. In turn, each macroblock 212
comprises four luminance blocks 213 and two chrominance
blocks 214, and contains the information for an original 16
x 16 block of pixels. Each of the four luminance blocks 213
and two chrominance blocks 214 is 8 x 8 pixels in size. The
four luminance blocks 213 contain a 1 pixel to 1 pixel
mapping of the luminance (Y) information from the original 16
x 16 block of pixels. One chrominance block 214 contains a
representation of the chrominance level of the blue color
signal (Cu/b), and the other chrominance block 214 contains
a representation of the chrominance level of the red color
signal (Cv/r). Each chrominance level is subsampled such
that each 8 x 8 chrominance block 214 contains the
chrominance level of its color signal for the entire original
16 x 16 block of pixels.
Referring now to Figure 20, the structure and
function of the Start Code Detector will become apparent. A
- 79 21~54~3
value register 221 receives image data over a line 222. The
line 222 is eight bits wide, allowing for parallel
transmission of eight bits at time. The output from the
value register 221 iB pa~6~ serially over line 223 to a
decode register 224. A first output from the decode register
224 is passed to a detector 225 over a line 226. The line
226 is twenty-four bits wide, allowing for parallel
transmission of twenty-four bits at a time. The detector 225
detects the presence or absence of an-image which corresponds
to a standard-independent start code of 23 "zero" values
followed by a single "one" value. An 8-bit data value image
follows a valid start code image. On detecting the presence
of a start code image, the detector 225 transmits a start
image over a line 227 to a value decoder 228.
A second output from the decode register 224 is
passed serially over line 229 to a value decode shift
register 230. The value decode shift register 230 can hold
a data value image fifteen bits long. The 8-bit data value
following the start code image is shifted to the right of the
value decode shift register 230, as indicated by area 231.
This process eliminates overlapping start code images, as
discussed below. A first output from the value decode shift
register 230 is passed to the value decoder 228 over a line
232. The line 232 is fifteen bits wide, allowing for
parallel transmission of fifteen bits at a time. The value
decoder 228 decodes the value image using a first look-up
table (not shown). A second output from the value decode
shift register 230 is passed to the value decoder 228 which
passes a flag to an index-to-tokens converter 234 over a line
235. The value decoder 228 also passes information to the
index-to-tokens converter 234 over a line 236. The
information is either the data value image or start code
index image obtained from the first look-up table. The flag
214 ~ 23
indicates which form of information is passed. The line 236
i6 fifteen bits wide, allowing for parallel transmission of
fifteen bits at a time. While lS bits has been chosen here
as the width in the present invention it will be appreciated
that bits of other lengths may also be used. The index-to-
tokens converter 234 converts the information to token images
using a second look-up table (not shown) similar to that
given in Table 12-3 of the Users Manual. The token images
generated by the index-to-tokens converter 234 are then
output over a line 237. The line 237 is fifteen bits wide,
allowing for parallel transmission of fifteen bits at a time.
Referring to Figure 21, a data stream 241
consisting of individual bits 242 is input to a Start Code
Detector (not shown in Figure 21). A first start code image
lS 243 is detected by the Start Code Detector. The Start Code
Detector then receives a first data value image 244. Before
processing the first data value image 244, the Start Code
Detector may detect a second start code image 245, which
overlaps the first data value image 244 at a length 246. If
this occurs, the Start Code Detector does not process the
first data value image 244, and instead receives and
processes a second data value image 247.
Referring now to Figure 22, a flag generator 251
receives data as a first input over a line 252. The line 252
is fifteen bits wide, allowing for parallel transmission of
fifteen bits at a time. The flag generator 251 also receives
a flag as a second input over a line 253, and receives an
input valid image over a first two-wire interface 254. A
first output from the flag generator 251 is passed over a
line 255 to an input valid register (not shown). A second
output from the flag generator 251 is passed over a line 256
to a decode index 257. The decode index 257 generates four
outputs; a picture start image is passed over a line 258, a
81 214~2~
picture number image is passed over a line 259, an insert
image is passed over a line 260, and a replace image is
passed over a line 261. The data from the flag generator 251
is passed over a line 262a. A header generator 263 uses a
look-up table to generate a replace image, which is passed
over a line 262b. An extra word generator 264 uses the MPU
to generate an insert image, which is passed over a line
262c. Line 262a, and line 262b combine to form a line 262,
which is first input to output la~ches 265. The output
latches 265 pass data over a line 266. The line 266 is
fifteen bits wide, allowing for parallel transmission of
fifteen bits at a time.
The input valid register (not shown) passes an
image as a first input to a first OR gate 267 over a line
268. An insert image is passed over a line 269 as a second
input to the first OR gate 267. The output from the first OR
gate 267 is passed as a first input to a first AND gate 270
over a line 271. The logical negation of a remove image is
passed over a line 272 as a second input to the first AND
gate 270 is passed as a second input to the output latches
265 over a line 273. The output latches 265 pass an output
valid image over a second two-wire interface 274. An output
accept image is received over the second two-wire interface
274 by an output accept latch 275. The output from the
output accept latch 275 is passed to an output accept
register (not shown) over a line 276.
The output accept register (not shown~ passes an
image as a first input to a second OR gate 277 over a line
278. The logical negation of the output from the input valid
register is passed as a second input to the second OR gate
277 over a line 279. The remove image is passed over a line
280 as a third input to the second OR gate 277. The output
from the second OR gate 277 is passed as a first input to a
second AND gate 281 over a line 282. The logical negation of
- ` 214~423
an in~ert image is pA~e~ as a second input to the second AND
gate 281 over a line 283. The output from the second AND
gate 281 is passed over a line 284 to an input accept latch
285. The output from the input accept latch 285 is passed
over the first two-wire interface 254.
2145g~
-
83
TABLE ~00
Format Ima~e Received Tokens Generated
1. H.261 SEQUENCE START SEQUENCE START
MPEG PICTURE START GROUP START
JPEG (None) PICTURE START
PICTURE DATA
2. H.261 (None) PICTURE END
MPEG (None) PADDING
JPEG (None) - FLUSH
STOP AFTER PICTURE
As set forth in Table 600 which shows a relationship
between the absence or presence of standard signals in the
certain machine independent control tokens, the detection of
an image by the Start Code Detector 51 generates a sequence
of machine independent Control Tokens. Each image listed in
the "Image Received" column starts the generation of all
machine independent control tokens listed in the group in the
"Tokens Generated" column. Therefore, as shown in line 1 of
Table 600, whenever a "sequence start" image is received
during H.261 processing or a "picture start" image is
received during MPEG processing, the entire group of four
control tokens is generated, each followed by its
corresponding data value or values. In addition, as set
forth at line 2 of Table 600, the second group of four
control tokens is generated at the proper time irrespective
of images received by the Start Code Detector 51.
TABLE 601
DISPLAY ORDER: I1 B2 B3 P4 B5 B6 P7 B8 B9 I10
TRANSMIT ORDER: I1 P4 B2 B3 P7 B5 B6 I10 B8 B9
As shown in line 1 of Table 601 which shows the timing
relationship between transmitted pictures and displayed
pictures, the picture frames are displayed in numerical
order. However, in order to reduce the number of frames that
2145423
-
84
must be stored in memory, the frames are transmitted in a
different order. It is useful to begin the analysis from an
intraframe (I frame). The I1 frame is transmitted in the
order it is to be displayed. The next predicted frame (P
frame), P4, is then transmitted. Then, any bi-directionally
interpolated frames (B frames) to be displayed between the I1
frame and P4 frame are transmitted, represented by frames B2
and B3. This allows the transmitted B frames to reference a
previous frame (forward prediction) or a future frame
(backward prediction). After transmitting all the B frames
to be displayed between the I1 frame and the P4 frame, the
next P frame, P7, is transmitted. Next, all the B frames to
be displayed between the P4 and P7 frames are transmitted,
corresponding to B5 and B6. Then, the next I frame, I10, is
transmitted. Finally, all the B frames to be displayed
between the P7 and IlO frames are transmitted, corresponding
to frames B8 and B9. This ordering of transmitted frames
requires only two frames to be kept in memory at any one
time, and does not require the decoder to wait for the
transmission of the next P frame or I frame to display an
interjacent B frame.
Further information regarding the structure and operation,
as well as the features, objects and advantages, of the
invention will become more readily apparent to one of
ordinary skill in the art from the ensuing additional
detailed description of illustrative embodiment of the
invention which, for purposes of clarity and convenience of
explanation are grouped and set forth in the following
sections:
~0 1. Multi-Standard Configurations
2. JPEG Still Picture Decoding
3. Motion Picture Decompression
A~ R~M Memory Map
5. Bitstream Characteristics
2145~23
-
6. Reconfigurable Processing Stage
7. Multi-Standard Coding
8. Multi-Standard Processing Clrcuit-2nd Mode of Operation
9. Start Code Detector
10. Tokens
11. DRAM Interface
12. Prediction Filter
13. Accessing Registers
14. Microprocessor Interface (MPI)
15. MPI Read Timing
16. MPI Write Timing
17. Key Hole Address Locations
18. Picture End
19. Flushing operation
20. Flush Function
21. Stop-After-Picture
22. Multi-Standard Search Mode
23. Inverse Modeler
24. Inverse Quantizer
25. Huffman Decoder and Parser
26. Diverse Discrete Cosine Transformer
27. Buffer Manager
21~23
86
. ~LTI-STANDARD CON~IG~RATIONS
Since the various compression standards, i.e., JPEG,
MPEG and H.261, are well known, as for example as described
in the aforementioned United States Patent No. 5,212,742, the
detailed specifications of those standards are not repeated
here.
As previously mentioned, the present invention is
capable of decompressing a variety of differently encoded,
picture data bitstreams. In each of *he different standards
of encoding, some form of output formatter is required to
take the data presented at the output of the spatial decoder
operating alone, or the serial output of a spatial decoder
and temporal decoder operating in combination, ~as
subsequently described herein in greater detail) and
reformatting this output for use, including display in a
computer or other display systems, including a video display
system. Implementation of this formatting varies
significantly between encoding standards and/or the type of
display selected.
In a first embodiment, in accordance with the present
invention, as previously described with reference to Figures
10-12 an address generator is employed to store a block of
formatted data, output from either the first decoder (Spatial
Decoder) or the combination of the first decoder tSpatial
Decoder) and the second decoder (the Temporal Decoder), and
to write the decoded information into and/or from a memory in
a raster order. The video formatter described hereinafter
provides a wide range of output signal combinations.
In the preferred multi-standard video decoder embodiment
of the present invention, the Spatial Decoder and the
Temporal Decoder are required to implement both an MPEG
encoded signal and an H.261 video decoding system. The DRAM
interfaces on both devices are configurable to allow the
quantity of DRAM required to be reduced when working with
- 214~23
87
small picture formats and at low coded data rates. The
reconfiguration of these DRAMs will be further described
hereinafter with reference to the DRAM interface. Typically,
a single 4 megabyte DRAM is required by each of the Temporal
Decoder and the Spatial Decoder circuits.
The Spatial Decoder of the present invention performs
all the required processing within a single picture. This
reduces the redundancy within one picture.
The Temporal Decoder reduces the redundancy between the
subject picture with relationship to a picture which arrives
prior to the arrival of the subject picture, as well as a
picture which arrives after the arrival of the subject
picture. One aspect of the Temporal Decoder is to provide an
address decode network which handles the complex addressing
needs to read out the data associated with all of these
pictures with the least number of circuits and with high
speed and improved accuracy.
As previously described with reference to Figure 11, the
data arrives through the Start Code Detector, a FIFO register
which precedes a Huffman decoder and parser, through a second
FIFO register, an inverse modeller, an inverse quantizer,
inverse zigzag and inverse DCT. The two FIFOs need not be on
the chip. In one embodiment, the data does not flow through
a FIFO that is on the chip. The data is applied to the DRAM
interface, and the FIFO-IN storage register and the FIFO-OUT
register is off the chip in both cases. These registers,
whose operation is entirely independent of the standards,
will subsequently be described herein in further detail.
The majority of the subsystems and stages shown in
Figure 11 are actually independent of the particular standard
used and include the DRAM interface 58, the buffer manager 59
which is generating addresses for the DRAM interface, the
inverse modeller 75, the inverse zig-zag 81 and the inverse
- 2145~23
88
DCT 83. The standard independent units within the Huffman
decoder and parser include the ALU 66 and the token formatter
71.
Referring now to Figure 12, the standard-
independent units include the DRAM interface 100, the fork91, the FIFO register 96, the summer 98 and the output
selector 106. The standard dependent units are the address
generator 94, which is different in H.261 and in MPEG, and
the prediction filter 103, which is reconfigurable to have
the ability to do both H.261 and MPEG. The JPEG data will
flow through the entire machine completely unaltered.
Figure 13 depicts a high level block diagram of the
video formatter chip. The vast majority of this chip is
independent of the standard. The only items that are
affected by the standard is the way the data is written into
the DRAM in the case of H.261, which differs from MPEG or
JPEG; and that in H.261, it is not necessary to code every
single picture. There is some timing information referred to
as a temporal reference which provides some information
regarding when the pictures are intended to be displayed, and
that is also handled by the address generation type of logic
in the video formatter.
The remainder of the circuitry embodied in the video
formatter, including all of the color space conversion, the
up-sampling filters and all of the gamma correction RAMs, is
entirely independent of the particular compression standard
utilized.
The Start Code Detector of the present invention is
dependent on the compression standard in that it has to
recognize different start code patterns in the bitstream for
each of the standards. For example, H.261 has a 16 bit start
code, MPEG has a 24 bit start code and JPEG uses marker codes
which are fairly different from the other start codes. Once
the Start Code Detector has recognized those different start
2145q23
89
codec, its operation is essentially independent of the
compression standard. For instance, during searching, apart
from the circuitry that recognizes the different category of
markers, much of the operation is very similar between the
three different compression standards.
The next unit is the state machine 68 (Figure 11)
located within the Huffman decoder and parser. Here, the
actual circuitry is almost identical for each of the three
compression standards. In fact, the only element that is
affected by the standard in operation is the reset address of
the machine. If just the parser is reset, then it jumps to
a different address for each standard. There are, in fact,
four standards that are recognized. These standards are
H.261, JPEG, MPEG and one other, where the parser enters a
piece of code that is used for testing. This illustrates
that the circuitry is identical in almost every aspect, but
the difference is the program in the microcode for each of
the standards. Thus, when operating in H.261, one program is
running, and when a different program is running, there is no
overlap between them. The same holds true for JPEG, which is
a third, completely independent program.
The next unit is the Huffman decoder 56 which
functions with the index to data unit 64. Those two units
cooperate together to perform the Huffman decoding. Here,
the algorithm that is used for Huffman decoding is the same,
irrespective of the compression standard. The changes are in
which tables are used and whether or not the data coming into
the Huffman decoder is inverted. Also, the Huffman decoder
itself includes a state machine that understands some aspects
of the coding standards. These different operations are
selected in response to an instruction coming from the parser
state machine. The parser state machine operates with a
different program for each of the three compression standards
214~g23
9o
and issues the correct command to the Huffman decoder at
different times consi~tent with the standard in operation.
The last unit on the chip that is dependent on the
compression standard is the inverse quantizer 79, where the
mathematics that the inverse quantizer performs are different
for each of the different standards. In this regard, a
CODING_STANDARD token is decoded and the inverse quantizer 79
remembers which standard it is operating in. Then, any
subsequent DATA tokens that happen-after that event, but
before another CODING STANDARD may come along, are dealt with
in the way indicated by the CODING STANDARD that has been
remembered inside the inverse quantizer. In the detailed
description, there is a table illustrating different
parameters in the different standards and what circuitry is
responding to those different parameters or mathematics.
The address generation, with reference to H.261, differs
for each of the subsystems shown in Figure 12 and Figure 13.
The address generation in Figure 11, which generates
addresses for the two FIFOs before and after the Huffman
decoder, does not change depending on the coding standards.
Even in H.261, the address generation that happens on that
chip is unaltered. Essentially, the difference between these
standards is that in MPEG and JPEG, there is an organization
of macroblocks that are in linear lines going horizontally
across pictures. As best observed in Figure 14a, a first
macroblock A covers one full line. A macroblock B covers
less than a line. A macroblock C covers multiple lines. The
division in MPEG is into slices 132, and a slice may be one
horizontal line, A, or it may be part of a horizontal line B,
or it may extend from one line into the next line, C. Each
of these slices 132 is made up of a row of macroblocks.
In H.261, the organization is rather different
because the picture is divided into groups of blocks (GOB).
21~5423
91
A group of blocks is three rows of macroblocks high by eleven
macroblocks wide. In the case of a CIF picture, there are
twelve such groups of blocks. However, they are not
organized one above the other. Rather, there are two groups
of blocks next to each other and then six high, i.e., there
are 6 GOB's vertically, and 2 GOB's horizontally.
In all other standards, when performing the
addressing, the macroblocks are addressed in order as
described above. More specifically, addressing proceeds
along the lines and at the end of the line, the next line is
started. In H.261, the order of the blocks is the same as
described within a group of blocks, but in moving onto the
next group of blocks, it is almost a zig-zag.
The present invention provides circuitry to deal
with the latter affect. That is the way in which the address
generation in the spatial decoder and the video formatter
varies for H.261. This is accomplished whenever information
is written into the DRAM. It is written with the knowledge
of the aforementioned address generation sequence so the
place where it is physically located in the RAM is exactly
the same as if this had been an MPEG picture of the same
size. Hence, all of the address generation circuitry for
reading from the DRAM, for instance, when forming
predictions, does not have to comprehend that it is H.261
standard because the physical placement of the information in
the memory is the same as it would have been if it had been
in MPEG sequence. Thus, in all cases, only writing of data
is affected.
In the Temporal Decoder, there is an abstraction for
H.261 where the circuitry pretends something is different
from what is actually occurring. That is, each group of
blocks is conceptually stretched out so that instead of
having a rectangle which is 11 x 3 macroblocks, the
macroblocks are stretched out into a length of 33 blocks (see
- 2145~23
92
Figure 14c) group of blocks which is one macroblock high. By
doing that, exactly the same counting mechanisms used on the
Temporal Decoder for counting through the groups of blocks
are also used for MPEG.
There is a correspondence in the way that the
circuitry is designed between an H.261 group of blocks and an
MPEG slice. When H.261 data is processed after the Start
Code Detector, each group of blocks is preceded by a
slice start_code. The next group of blocks is preceded by
the next slice start code. The counting that goes on inside
the Temporal Decoder for counting through this structure
pretends that it is a 33 macroblock-long group that is one
macroblock high. This is sufficient, although the circuitry
also counts every 11th interval. When it counts to the 11th
lS macroblock or the 22nd macroblock, it resets some counters.
This is accomplished by simple circuitry with another counter
that counts up each macroblock, and when it gets to 11, it
resets to zero. The microcode interrogates that and does
that work. All the circuitry in the temporal decoder of the
present invention is essentially independent of the
compression standard with respect to the physical placement
of the macroblocks.
In terms of multi-standard adaptability, there are
a number of different tables and the circuitry selects the
appropriate table for the appropriate standard at the
appropriate time. Each standard has multiple tables; the
circuitry selects from the set at any given time. Within any
one standard, the circuitry selects one table at one time and
another table another time. In a different standard, the
circuitry selects a different set of tables. There is some
intersection between those tables as indicated previously in
the discussion of Figure 15. For example, one of the tables
used in MPEG is also used in JPEG. The tables are not a
completely isolated set. Figure 15 illustrates an H.261
2145423
-
93
set, an MPEG set and a JPEG set. Note that there is a much
greater overlap between the H.261 set and the MPEG set. They
are quite common in the tables they utilize. There is a
small overlap between MPEG and JPEG, and there is no overlap
at all between H.261 and JPEG so that these standards have
totally different sets of tables.
As previously indicated, most of the system units are
compression standard independent. If a unit is standard
independent, and such units need not remember what
CODING_STANDARD is being processed. All of the units that
are standard dependent remember the compression standard as
the CODING_STANDARD token flows by them. When information
encoded/decoded in a first coding standard is distributed
through the machine, and a machine is changing standards,
prior machines under microprocessor control would normally
choose to perform in accordance with the H.261 compression
standard. The MPU in such prior machines generates signals
stating in multiple different places within the machine that
the compression standard is changing. The MPU makes changes
at different times and, in addition, may flush the pipeline
through.
In accordance with the invention, by issuing a change of
CODING_STANDARD tokens at the Start Code Detector that is
positioned as the first unit in the pipeline, this change of
compression standard is readily handled. The token says a
certain coding standard is beginning and that control
information flows down the machine and configures all the
other registers at the appropriate time. The MPU need not
program each register.
The prediction token signals how to form predictions
using the bits in the bitstream. Depending on which
compression standard is operating, the circuitry translateS
the information that is found in the standard, i.e. from the
bitstream into a prediction mode token. This processing is
- 2145423
performed by the Huffman decoder and parser state machine,
where it is easy to manipulate bits based on certain
conditions. The Start Code Detector generates this
prediction mode token. The token then flows down the machine
to the circuitry of the Temporal Decoder, which is the device
responsible for forming predictions. The circuitry of the
spatial decoder interprets the token without having to know
what standard it is operating in because the bits in it are
invariant in the three different standards. The Spatial
Decoder just does what it is told in response to that token.
By having these tokens and using them appropriately, the
design of other units in the machine is simplified. Although
there may be some complications in the program, benefits are
received in that some of the hard wired logic which would be
difficult to design for multi-standards can be used here.
2. JPEG STILL PICTURE DECODING
As previously indicated, the present invention relates
to signal decompression and, more particularly, to the
decompression of an encoded video signal, irrespective of the
compression standard employed.
One aspect of the present invention is to provide a first
decoder circuit (the Spatial Decoder) to decode a first
encoded signal (the JPEG encoded video signal) in combination
~ith a second decoder circuit (the Temporal Decoder) to
decode a first encoded signal (the MPEG or H.261 encoded
video signal) in a pipeline processing system. The Temporal
Decoder is not needed for JPEG decoding.
In this regard, the invention facilitates the
decompression of a plurality of differently encoded signals
through the use of a single pipeline decoder and
decompression system. The decoding and decompression
pipeline processor is organized on a unique and special
configuration which allows the handling of the multi-standard
~ 21~5~2~
.
encode~ video signals through the use of techniques all
compatible with the single pipeline decoder and processing
system. The Spatial Decoder is combined with the Temporal
Decoder, and the Video Formatter is used in driving a video
display.
Another aspect of the invention is the use of the
combination of the Spatial Decoder and the Video Formatter
for use with only still pictures. The compression standard
independent Spatial Decoder performs all of the data
lo processing within the boundaries of a single picture. Such
a decoder handles the spatial decompression of the internal
picture data which is passing through the pipeline and is
distributed within associated random access memories,
standard independent address generation circuits for handling
the storage and retrieval of information into the memories.
Still picture data is decoded at the output of the Spatial
Decoder, and this output is employed as input to the multi-
standard, configurable Video Formatter, which then provides
an output to the display terminal. In a first sequence of
similar pictures, each decompressed picture at the output of
the Spatial Decoder is of the same length in bits by the time
the picture reaches the output of the Spatial Decoder. A
second sequence of pictures may have a totally different
picture size and, hence, have a different length when
compared to the first length. Again, all such second
sequence of similar pictures are of the same length in bits
by the time such pictures reach the output of the Spatial
Decoder.
Another aspect of the invention is to internally organize
the incoming standard dependent bitstream into a sequence of
control tokens and DATA tokens, in combination with a
plurality of sequentially-positioned reconfigurable
processing stages selected and organized to act as a
standard-independent, reconfigurable-pipeline-processor-
214S423
-
96
With regard to JPEG decoding, a single Spatial Decoder
with no off chip DRAM can rapidly decode baseline JPEG
images. The Spatial Decoder supports all features of
baseline JPEG encoding standards. However, the image size
that can be decoded may be limited by the size of the output
buffer provided. The Spatial Decoder circuit also includes
a random access memory circuit, having machine-dependent,
standard independent address generation circuits for handling
the storage of information into the memories.
As previously, indicated the Temporal Decoder is not
required to decode JPEG-encoded video. Accordingly, signals
carried by DATA tokens pass directly through the Temporal
Decoder without further processing when the Temporal Decoder
is configured for a JPEG operation.
Another aspect of the present invention is to provide in
the Spatial Decoder a pair of memory circuits, such as buffer
memory circuits, for operating in combination with the
Huffman decoder/video demultiplexor circuit (HD & VDM). A
first buffer memory is positioned before the HD & VDM, and a
second buffer memory is positioned after the HD & VDM. The
HD & VDM decodes the bitstream from the binary ones and zeros
that are in the standard encoded bitstream and turns such
stream into numbers that are used downstream. The advantage
of the two buffer system is for implementing a multi-standard
decompression system. These two buffers, in combination with
the identified implementation of the Huffman decoder, are
described hereinafter in greater detail.
A still further aspect of the present multi-standard,
decompression circuit is the combination of a Start Code
Detector circuit positioned upstream of the first forward
buffer operating in combination with the Huffman decoder.
One advantage of this combination is increased flexibility in
dealing with the input bitstream, particularly padding, which
has to be added to the bitstream. The placement of these
` 21~5423
97
identifi~d components, Start Code Detector, memory buffers,
and Huffman decoder enhances the handling of certain
sequences in the input bitstream.
In addition, off chip DRAMs are used for decoding JPEG-
encoded video pictures in real time. The size and speed ofthe buffers used with the DRAMs will depend on the video
encoded data rates.
The coding standards identify all of the standard
dependent types of information that is necessary for storage
in the DRAMs associated with the Spatial Decoder using
standard independent circuitry.
3. MOTION PICTURE DECOMPRE88ION
In the present invention, if motion pictures are being
decompressed through the steps of decoding, a further
Temporal Decoder is necessary. The Temporal Decoder combines
the data decoded in the Spatial Decoder with pictures,
previously decoded, that are intended for display either
before or after the picture being currently decoded. The
Temporal Decoder receives, in the picture coded datastream,
information to identify this temporally-displaced
information. The Temporal Decoder is organized to address
temporally and spatially displaced information, retrieve it,
and combine it in such a way as to decode the information
located in one picture with the picture currently being
decoded and ending with a resultant picture that is complete
and is suitable for transmission to the video formatter for
driving the display screen. Alternatively, the resultant
picture can be stored for subsequent use in temporal decoding
of subsequent pictures.
Generally, the Temporal Decoder performs the processing
between pictures either earlier and/or later in time with
reference to the picture currently being decoded. The
Temporal Decoder reintroduces information that is not encoded
within the coded representation of the picture, because it is
2145423
,
98
redunda~t and is already available at the decoder. More
specifically, it is probable that any given picture will
contain similar information as pictures temporally
surrounding it, both before and after. This similarity can
be made greater if motion compensation is applied. The
Temporal Decoder and decompression circuit also reduces the
redundancy between related pictures.
In another aspect of the present invention, the Temporal
Decoder is employed for handling the standard-dependent
lo output information from the Spatial Decoder. This standard
dependent information for a single picture is distributed
among several areas of DRAM in the sense that the
decompressed output information, processed by the Spatial
Decoder, is stored in other DRAM registers by other random
access memories having still other machine-dependent,
standard-independent address generation circuits for
combining one picture of spatially decoded information packet
of spatially decoded picture information, temporally
displaced relative to the temporal position of the first
picture.
In multi-standard circuits capable of decoding MPEG-
encoded signals, larger logic DRAM buffers may be required to
support the larger picture formats possible with MPEG.
. The picture information is moving through the serial
pipeline in 8 pel by 8 pel blocks. In one form of the
invention, the address decoding circuitry handles these pel
blocks (storing and retrieving) along such block boundaries.
The address decoding circuitry also handles the storing and
retrieving of such 8 by 8 pel blocks across such boundaries.
This versatility is more completely described hereinafter.
A second Temporal Decoder may also be provided which
passes the output of the first decoder circuit (the Spatial
Decoder) directly to the Video Formatter for handling without
signal processing delay.
~ ` 2145423
99
The Temporal Decoder also reorders the blocks of picture
data for display by a display circuit. The address decode
circuitry, described hereinafter, provides handling of this
reordering.
As previously mentioned, one important feature of the
Temporal Decoder is to add picture information together from
a selection of pictures which have arrived earlier or later
than the picture under processing. When a picture is
described in this context, it may mean any one of the
following:
1. The coded data representation of the picture;
2. The result, i.e., the final decoded picture
resulting from the addition of a process step
performed by the decoder;
3. Previously decoded pictures read from the DRAM; and
4. The result of the spatial decodinq, i.e., the extent
of data between a PICTURE_START token and a
subsequent PICTURE_END token.
After the picture data information is processed by the
Temporal Decoder, it is either displayed or written back into
a picture memory location. This information is then kept for
further reference to be used in processing another different
coded data picture.
Re-ordering of the MPEG encoded pictures for visual
display involves the possibility that a desired scrambled
picture can be achieved by varying the re-ordering feature of
the Temporal Decoder.
4. RAM MEMORY MAP
The Spatial Decoder, Temporal Decoder and Video
Formatter all use external DRAM. Preferably, the same DRAM
is used for all three devices. While all three devices use
DRAM, and all three devices use a DRAM interface ln
conjunction with an address generator, what each implements
2145~
100
in DRAM is different. That is, each chip, e.g. Spatial
Decoder and Temporal Decoder, have a different DRAM interface
and address generation circuitry even through they use a
similar physical, external DRAM.
In brief, the Spatial Decoder implements two FIFOs in
the common DRAM. Referring again to Figure 11, one FIFO 54
is positioned before the Huffman decoder 56 and parser, and
the other is positioned after the Huffman decoder and parser.
The FIFOs are implemented in a relatively straightforward
manner. For each FIFO, a particular portion of DRAM is set
aside as the physical memory in which the FIFO will be
implemented.
The address generator associated with the Spatial
Decoder DRAM interface 58 keeps track of FIFO addresses using
two pointers. One pointer points to the first word stored in
the FIFO, the other pointer points to the last word stored in
the FIFO, thus allowing read/write operation on the
appropriate word. When, in the course of a read or write
operation, the end of the physical memory is reached, the
address generator "wraps around" to the start of the physical
memory.
In brief, the Temporal Decoder of the present invention
must be able to store two full pictures or frames of whatever
encoding standard (MPEG or H.261) is specified. For
simplicity, the physical memory in the DRAM into which the
two frames are stored is split into two halves, with each
half being dedicated (using appropriate pointers) to a
particular one of the two pictures.
~ MPEG uses three different picture types: Intra (I),
Predicted (P) and Bidirectionally interpolated (B). As
previously mentioned, B pictures are based on predictions
from two pictures. One picture is from the future and one
from the past. I pictures require no further decoding by the
Temporal Decoder, but must be stored in one of the two
- 2145g23
101
picture buffers for later use in decoding P and B pictures.
Decoding P pictures requires forming predictions from a
previously decoded P or I picture. The decoded P picture is
stored in a picture buffer for use decoding P and B pictures.
B pictures can require predictions form both of the picture
buffers. However, B pictures are not stored in the external
DRAM.
Note that I and P pictures are not output from the
Temporal Decoder as they are decoded. Instead, I and P
pictures are written into one of the picture buffers, and are
read out only when a subsequent I or P picture arrives for
decoding. In other words, the Temporal Decoder relies on
subsequent P or I pictures to flush previous pictures out of
the two picture buffers, as further discussed hereinafter in
the section on flushing. In brief, the Spatial Decoder can
provide a fake I or P picture at the end of a video sequence
to flush out the last P or I picture. In turn, this fake
picture is flushed when a subsequent video sequence starts.
The peak memory band width load occurs when decoding B
pictures. The worst case is the B frame may be formed from
predictions from both the picture buffers, with all
predictions being made to half-pixel accuracy.
As previously described, the Temporal Decoder can be
configured to provide MPEG picture reordering. With this
picture reordering, the output of P and I pictures is delayed
until the next P or I picture in the data stream starts to be
decoded by the Temporal Decoder.
As the P or I pictures are reordered, certain tokens are
stored temporarily on chip as the picture is written into the
picture buffers. When the picture is read out for display,
these stored tokens are retrieved. At the output of the
Temporal Decoder, the DATA Tokens of the newly decoded P or
I picture are replaced with DATA Tokens for the older P or I
picture.
`` 21~5423
~ 102
In contrast, H.261 makes predictions only from the
picture just decoded. As each picture is decoded, it is
written into one of the two picture buffers so it can be used
in decoding the next picture. The only DRAM memory
operations required are writing 8 x 8 blocks, and forming
predictions with integer accuracy motion vectors.
In brief, the Video Formatter stores three frames or
pictures. Three pictures need to be stored to accommodate
such features as repeating or skipping pictures.
5. BITSTREAM CHARACTERISTICS
Referring now particularly to the Spatial Decoder of the
present invention, it is helpful to review the bitstream
characteristics of the encoded datastream as these
characteristics must be handled by the circuitry of the
Spatial Decoder and the Temporal Decoder. For example, under
one or more compression standards, the compression ratio of
the standard is achieved by varying the number of bits that
it uses to code the pictures of a picture. The number of
bits can vary by a wide margin. Specifically, this means
that the length of a bitstream used to encode a referenced
picture of a picture might be identified as being one unit
long, another picture might be a number of units long, while
still a third picture could be a fraction of that unit.
None of the existing standards (MPEG 1.2, JPEG, H.261)
define a way of ending a picture, the implication being that
when the next picture starts, the current one has finished.
Additionally, the standards (H.261 specifically) allow
incomplete pictures to be generated by the encoder.
In accordance with the present invention, there is
provided a way of indicating the end of a picture by using
one of its tokens: PICTURE_END. The still encoded picture
data leaving the Start Code Detector consists of pictures
starting with a PICTURE_START token and ending with a
- 2145423
103
PICTURE_END token, but still of widely varying length. There
may be other information transmitted here (between the first
and second picture), but it is known that the first picture
has finished.
The data stream at the output of the Spatial Decoder
consists of pictures, still with picture-starts and picture-
ends, of the same length (number of bits) for a given
sequence. The length of time between a picture-start and a
picture-end may vary.
The Video Formatter takes these pictures of non-uniform
time and displays them on a screen at a fixed picture rate
determined by the type of display being driven. Different
display rates are used throughout the world, e.g. PAL-NTSC
television standards. This is accomplished by selectively
dropping or repeating pictures in a manner which is unique.
Ordinary "frame rate converters," e.g. 2-3 pulldown, operate
with a fixed input picture rate, whereas the Video Formatter
can handle a variable input picture rate.
6. RFCONFIGURABLE PROCE88ING 8TAGF
Referring again to Figure 10, the reconfigurable
processing stage (RPS) comprises a token decode circuit 33
which is employed to receive the tokens coming from a two
wire interface 37 and input latches 34. The output of the
token decode circuit 33 is applied to a processing unit 36
over the two-wire interface 37 and an action identification
circuit 39. The processing unit 36 is suitable for
processing data under the control of the action
identification circuit 39. After the processing is
completed, the processing unit 36 connects such completed
signals to the output, two-wire interface bus 40 through
output latches 41.
The action identification decode circuit 39 has an
input from the token decode circuit 33 over the two-wire
542~
104
interface bus 40 and/or from memory circuits 43 and 44 over
two-wire interface bUC 46. The tokens from the token decode
circuit 33 are applied simultaneously to the action
identification circuit 39 and the processing unit 36. The
action identification function as well as the RPS is
described in further detail by tables and figures in a
subsequent portion of this specification.
The functional block diagram in Figure 10
illustrates those stages shown in Figures 11, 12 and 13 which
are not standard independent circuits. The data flows
through the token decode circuit 33, through the processing
unit 36 and onto the two-wire interface circuit 42 through
the output latches 41. If the Control Token is recognized by
the RPS, it is decoded in the token decode circuit 33 and
appropriate action will be taken. If it is not recognized,
it will be passed unchanged to the output two-wire interface
42 through the output circuit 41. The present invention
operates as a pipeline processor having a two-wire interface
for controlling the movement of control tokens through the
pipeline. This feature of the invention is described in
greater detail in the previously filed EPO patent application
number 92306038.8.
In the present invention, the token decode circuit 33 is
employed for identifying whether the token presently entering
through the two-wire interface 42 is a DATA token or control
token. ~n the event that the token being examined by the
token decode circuit 33 is recognized, it is exited to the
action identification circuit 39 with a proper index signal
or flag signal indicating that action is to be taken. At the
same time, the token decode circuit 33 provides a proper flag
or index signal to the processing unit 36 to alert it to the
presence of the token being handled by the action
identification circuit 39.
lo5 214S42~
Control tokens may also be process~.
A more detailed description of the various types of
tokens u~able in the present invention will be subsequently
described hereinafter. For the purpose of this portion of
the specification, it is sufficient to note that the address
carried by the control token is decoded in the decoder 33 and
is used to access registers contained within the action
identification circuit 39. When the token being examined is
a recognized control token, the action identification circuit
39 uses its reconfiguration state circuit for distributing
the control signals throughout the state machine. As
previously mentioned, this activates the state machine of the
action identification decoder 39, which then reconfigures
itself. For example, it may change coding standards. In
this way, the action identification circuit 39 decodes the
required action for handling the particular standard now
passing through the state machine shown with reference to
Figure 10.
Similarly, the processing unit 36 which is under
the control of the action identification circuit 39 is now
ready to process the information contained in the data fields
of the DATA token when it is appropriate for this to occur.
On many occasions, a control token arrives first,
reconfigures the action identification circuit 39 and is
immediately followed by a DATA token which is then processed
by the processing unit 36. The control token exits the
output latches circuit 41 over-the output two-wire interface
42 immediately preceding the DATA token which has been
processed within the processing unit 36.
In the present invention, the action identification
circuit, 39, is a state machine holding history state. The
registers, 43 and 44 hold information that has been decoded
from the token decoder 33 and stored in these registers.
` 106 2145423
Such registers can be either on-chip or-off chip as needed.
The~e plurality of state regi~ters contain action information
connected to the action identification currently being
identified in the action identification circuit 39. This
action information has been stored from previously decoded
tokens and can affect the action that is selected. The
connection 40 is going straight from the token decode 33 to
the action identification block 39. This is intended to show
that the action can also be affecte~ by the token that is
currently being processed by the token decode circuit 33.
In general, there is shown token decoding and data
processing in accordance with the present invention. The
data processing is performed as configured by the action
identification circuit 39. The action is affected by a
number of conditions and is affected by information generally
derived from a previously decoded token or, more
specifically, information stored from previously decoded
tokens in registers 43 and 44, the current token under
processing, and the state and history information that the
action identification unit 39 has itself acquired. A
distinction is thereby shown between Control tokens and DATA
tokens.
In any RPS, some tokens are viewed by that RPS unit as
being Control tokens in that they affect the operation of the
RPS presumably at some subsequent time. Another set of
tokens are viewed by the RPS as DATA tokens. Such DATA
tokens contain information which is processed by the RPS in
a way that is determined by the design of the particular
circuitry, the tokens that have been previously decoded and
the state of the action identification circuit 39. Although
a particular RPS identifies a certain set of tokens for that
particular RPS control and another set of tokens as data,
that is the view of that particular RPS. Another RPS can
have a different view of the same token. some of the tokens
2145423
107
might be viewed by one RPS unit as DATA Tokens while another
RPS unit might decide that it is actually a Control Token.
For example, the quantization table information, as far as
the Huffman decoder and state machine is concerned, is data,
because it arrives on its input as coded data, it gets
formatted up into a series of 8 bit words, and they get
formed into a token called a quantization table token
(QUANT_TABLE) which goes down the processing pipeline. As
far as that machine is concerned, all of that was data; it
was handling data, transforming one sort of data into another
sort of data, which is clearly a function of the processing
performed by that portion of the machine. However, when that
information gets to the inverse quantizer, it stores the
information in that token a plurality of registers. In fact,
because there are 64 8-bit numbers and there are many
registers, in general, many registers may be present. This
information is viewed as control information, and then that
control information affects the processing that is done on
subsequent DATA tokens because it affects the number that you
multiply each data word. There is an example where one stage
viewed that token as being data and another stage viewed it
as being control.
Token data, in accordance with the invention is almost
universally viewed as being data through the machine. One of
the important aspects is that, in general, each stage of
circuitry that has a token decoder will be looking for a
certain set of tokens, and any tokens that it does not
recognize will be passed unaltered through the stage and down
the pipeline, so that subsequent stages downstream of the
current stage have the benefit of seeing those tokens and may
respond to them. This is an important feature, namely there
can be communication between blocks that are not adjacent to
one another using the token mechanism.
Another important feature of the invention is that each of
108 2145~23
the stages of circuitry has the proce~sing capability within
it to be able to perform the neceF~-ry operations for each of
the standards, and the control, as to which operations are to
be performed at a given time, come as tokens. There is one
processing element that differs between the different stages
to provide this capability. In the state machine ROM of the
parser, there are three separate entirely different programs,
one for each of the st~n~Ards that are dealt with. Which
program is executed depends upon a CODING STANDARD token. In
otherwords, each of these three programs has within it the
ability to handle both decoding and the CODING STANDARD
standard token. When each of these programs sees which
coding standard, is to be decoded next, they literally jump
to the start address in the microcode ROM for that particular
program. This is how stages deal with multi-standardness.
Two things are affected by the different standards.
First, it affects what pattern of bits in the bitstream are
recognized as a start-code or a marker code in order to
reconfigure the shift register to detect the length of the
start marker code. Second, there is a piece of information
in the microcode that denotes what that start or marker code
means. Recall that the coding of bits differs between the
three standards. Accordingly, the microcode looks up in a
table, specific to that compressor standard, something that
is independent of the standard, i.e., a type of token that
represents the incoming codes. This token is typically
independent of the standard since in most cases, each of the
various standards provide a certain code that will produce
it.
The inverse quantizer 79 has a mathematical
capability. The quantizer multiplies and adds, and has the
ability to do all three compression standards which are
configured by parameters. For example, a flag bit in the ROM
in control tells the inverse quantizer whether or not to add
2145423
109
a constant, K. Another flag tells the inverse quantizer
whether to add another constant. The inverse quantizer
remembers in a register the CODING_STANDARD token as it flows
by the quantizer. When DATA tokens pass thereafter, the
inverse quantizer remembers what the standard is and it looks
up the parameters that it needs to apply to the processing
elements in order to perform a proper operation. For
example, the inverse quantizer will look up whether K is set
to 0, or whether it is set to 1 for a particular compression
standard, and will apply that to its processing circuitry.
In a similar sense the Huffman decoder 56 has a number
of tables within it, some for JPEG, some for MPEG and some
for H.261. The majority of those tables, in fact, will
service more than one of those compression standards. Which
tables are used depends on the syntax of the standard. The
Huffman decoder works by receiving a command from the state
machine which tells it which of the tables to use.
Accordingly, the Huffman decoder does not itself directly
have a piece of state going into it, which is remembered and
which says what coding it is performing. Rather, it is the
combination of the parser state machine and Huffman decoder
together that contain information within them.
Regarding the Spatial Decoder of the present
invention, the address generation is modified and is similar
to that shown in Figure 10, in that a number of pieces of
information are decoded from tokens, such as the coding
standard. The coding standard and additional information as
well, is recorded in the registers and that affects the
progress of the address generator state machine as it steps
through and counts the macroblocks in the system, one after
the other. The last stage would be the prediction filter 179
(Figure 17) which operates in one of two modes, either H.261
or MPEG and are easily identified.
llo 214542~
7. MUL~-8TANDARD CODING
The system of the present invention also provides a
combination of the standard-independent indices generation
circuits, which are strategically placed throughout the
system in combination with the token decode circuits. For
example, the system is employed for specifically decoding
either the H.261 video standard, or the MPEG video standard
or the JPEG video standard. These three compression coding
standards specify similar processes to be done on the
arriving data, but the structure of the datastreams is
different. As previously discussed, it is one of the
functions of the Start Code Detector to detect MPEG start-
codes, H.261 start-codes, and JPEG marker codes, and convert
them all into a form, i.e., a control token which includes a
token stream embodying the current coding standard. The
control tokens are passed through the pipeline processor, and
are used, i.e., decoded, in the state machines to which they
are relevant, and are passed through other state machines to
which the tokens are not relevant. In this regard, the DATA
Tokens are treated in the same fashion, insofar as they are
processed only in the state machines that are configurable by
the control tokens into processing such DATA Tokens. In the
remaining state machines, they pass through unchanged.
More specifically, a control token in accordance with
the present invention, can consist of more than one word in
the token. In that case, a bit known as the extension bit is
set specifying the use of additional words in the token for
carrying additional information. Certain of these additional
control bits contain indices indicating information for use
in corresponding state machines to create a set of standard-
independent indices signals. The remaining portions of the
token are used to indicate and identify the internal
processing control function which is standard for all of the
datastreams passing through the pipeline processor. In one
-- 2145q23
lll `
form of the invention, the token extension is used to carry
the current coding stA~rd which i8 decoded by the relative
token decode circuits distributed throughout the machine, and
is used to reconfigure the action identification circuit 39
of stages throughout the machine wherever it is appropriate
to operate under a new coding standard. Additionally, the
token decode circuit can indicate whether a control token is
related to one of the selected standards which the circuit
was designed to handle.
More specifically, an MPEG start code and a JPEG marker
are followed by an 8 bit value. The H.261 start code is
followed by a 4 bit value. In this context, the Start Code
Detector 51, by detecting either an MPEG start-code or a JPEG
marker, indicates that the following 8 bits contain the value
associated with the start-code. Independently, it can then
create a signal which indicates that it is either an MPEG
start code or a JPEG marker and not an H.261 start code. In
this first instance, the 8 bit value is entered into a decode
circuit, part of which creates a signal indicating the index
and flag which is used within the current circuit for
handling the tokens passing through the circuit. This is
also used to insert portions of the control token which will
be looked at thereafter to determine which standard is being
handled. In this sense, the control token contains a portion
indicating that it is related to an MPEG standard, as well as
a portion which indicates what type of operation should be
performed on the accompanying data. As previously discussed,
this information is utilized in the system to reconfigure the
processing stage used to perform the function required by the
various standards created for that purpose.
For example, with reference to the H.261 start code, it
is associated with a 4 bit value which follows immediately
after the start code. The Start Code Detector passes this
value into the token generator state machine. The value is
- 112 2145423
applied to an 8 bit decoder which produces a 3 bit start
number. The start number is employed to identify the
picture-start of a picture number as indicated by the value.
The syætem also includes a multi-stage parallel
S processing pipeline operating under the principles of the
two-wire interface previously described. Each of the stages
comprises a machine generally taking the form illustrated in
Figure 10. The token decode circuit 33 is employed to direct
the token presently entering the state machine into the
action identification circuit 39 or the processing unit 36,
as appropriate. The processing unit has been previously
reconfigured by the next previous control token into the form
needed for handling the current coding standard, which i5 now
entering the processing stage and carried by the next DATA
token. Further, in accordance with this aspect of the
invention, the succeeding state machines in the processing
pipeline can be functioning under one coding standard, i.e.,
H.261, while a previous stage can be operating under a
separate standard, such as MPEG. The same two-wire interface
is used for carrying both the control tokens and the DATA
Tokens.
The system of the present invention also utilizes
control tokens required to decode a number of coding
standards with a fixed number of reconfigurable processing
stages. More specifically, the PICTURE_END control token is
employed because it is important to have an indication of
when a picture actually ends. Accordingly, in designing a
multi-standard machine, it is necessary to create additional
control tokens within the multi-standard pipeline processing
machine which will then indicate which one of the standard
decoding techniques to use. Such a control token is the
PICTURE_END token. This PICTURE END token is used to
indicate that the current picture has finished, to force the
buffers to be flushed, and to push the current picture
2145423
113
through the d~o~r to the display.
8. M~LT~-8TANDARD FnCCP~INa CIRCUIT - ~ECOND
~ODE O~ OPERATION
A compression standard-dependent circuit, in the form of
the previously described Start Code Detector, is suitably
interconnected to a compression standard-independent circuit
over an appropriate bus. The standard-dependent circuit is
connected to a combination dependent-independent circuit over
the same bus and an additional bus. The standard-independent
circuit applies additional input to the standard dependent-
independent circuit, while the latter provides information
back to the standard-independent circuit. Information from
the standard-independent circuit is applied to the output
over another suitable bus. Table 600 illustrates that the
multiple standards applied as the input to the standard-
dependent Start Code Detector 51 include certain bit streams
which have standard-dependent meanings within each encoded
bit stream.
9. 8TART-CODE D~ O~
As previously indicated the Start Code Detector, in
accordance with the present invention, is capable of taking
MPEG, JPEG and H.261 bit streams and generating from them a
sequence of proprietary tokens which are meaningful to the
rest of the decoder. As an example of how multi-standard
decoding is achieved, the MPEG (1 and 2) picture_start_code,
the H.261 picture start_code and the JPEG start_of_scan (SoS)
marker are treated as equivalent by the Start Code Detector,
and all will generate an internal PICTURE START token. In a
similar way, the MPEG sequence_start_code and the JPEG SOI
(start_of_image) marker both generate a machine
sequence_start_token. The H.261 standard, however, has no
equivalent start code. Accordingly, the Start Code Detector,
~ 114 - 2145~23
in r~sponse to the first H.261 picture_start_code, will
generate a sequence_start token.
None of the above described images are directly used
other than in the SCD. Rather, a machine PICTURE_START
token, for example, has been deemed to be equivalent to the
PICTURE_START images contained in the bit stream.
Furthermore, it must be borne in mind that the machine
PICTURE_START by itself, is not a direct image of the
PICTURE_START in the standard. Rather, it is a control token
lo which is used in combination with other control tokens to
provide standard-independent decoding which emulates the
operation of the images in each of the compression coding
standards. The combination of control tokens in combination
with the reconfiguration of circuits, in accordance with the
information carried by control tokens, is unique in and of
itself, as well as in further combination with indices and/or
flags generated by the token decode circuit portion of a
respective state machine. A typical reconfigurable state
- machine will be described subsequently.
Referring again to Table 600, there are shown the names
of a group of standard images in the left column. In the
right column there are shown the machine dependent control
tokens used in the emulation of the standard encoded signal
which is present or not used in the standard image.
With reference to Table 600, it can be seen that a
machine sequence_start signal is generated by the Start Code
Detector, as previously described, when it decodes any one of
the standard signals indicated in Table 600. The Start Code
Detector creates sequence_start, group_start, sequence_end,
slice_start, user-data, extra-data and PICTURE_START tokens
for application to the two-wire interface which is used
throughout the system. Each of the stages which operate in
conjunction with these control tokens are configured by the
contents of the tokens, or are configured by indices created
214~23
115
by cont~nts of the tokens, and are prepared to handle data
which is expected to be received when the picture DATA Token
arrives at that station.
As previously described, one of the compression
standards, such as H.261, does not have a sequence start
image in its data stream, nor does it have a PICTURE END
image in its data stream. The Start Code Detector indicates
the PICTURE END point in the incoming bit stream and creates
a PICTURE END token. In this regard, the system of the
present invention is intended to carry data words that are
fully packed to contain a bit of information in each of the
register positions selected for use in the practice of the
present invention. To this end, 15 bits have been selected
as the number of bits which are passed between two start
codes. Of course, it will be appreciated by one of ordinary
skill in the art, that a selection can be made to include
either greater or fewer than 15 bits. In other words, all 15
bits of a data word being passed from the Start Code Detector
into the DRAM interface are required for proper operation.
Accordingly, the Start Code Detector creates extra bits,
called padding, which it inserts into the last word of a DATA
Token. For purposes of illustration 15 data bits has been
selected.
To perform the Padding operation, in accordance with the
present invention, binary 0 followed by a number of binary
l's are automatically inserted to complete the 15 bit data
word. This data is then passed through the coded data buffer
and presented to the Huffman decoder, which removes the
padding. Thus, an arbitrary number of bits can be passed
through a buffer of fixed size and width.
In one embodiment, a slice_start control token is used
to identify a slice of the picture. A slice_start control
token is employed to segment the picture into smaller
regions. The size of the region is chosen by the encoder,
21454~3
116
and t~e Start Code Detector identifies this unique pattern of
the slice_start code in order for the machine-dependent state
stages, located downstream from the Start Code Detector, to
segment the picture being received into smaller regions. The
size of the region is chosen by the encoder, recognized by
the Start Code Detector and used by the recombination
circuitry and control tokens to decompress the encoded
picture. The slice_start codes are principally used for
error recovery.
The start codes provide a unique method of starting up
the decoder, and this will subsequently be described in
further detail. There are a number of advantages in placing
the start Code Detector before the coded data buffer, as
opposed to placing the Start Code Detector after the coded
data buffer and before the Huffman decoder and video
demultiplexor. Locating the Start Code Detector before the
first buffer allows it to l) assemble the tokens, 2) decode
the standard control signals, such as start codes, 3) pad the
bitstream before the data goes into the buffer, and 4) create
the proper sequence of control tokens to empty the buffers,
pushing the available data from the buffers into the Huffman
Decoder.
Most of the control token output by the Start Code
Detector directly reflect syntactic elements of the various
picture and video coding standards. The Start Code Detector
converts the syntactic elements into control tokens. In
~ ~ 5.`~
addition to these natural tokens, some unique and/or machine-
dependent tokens are generated. The unique tokens include
those tokens which have been specifically designed for use
with the system of the present invention which are unique in
and of themselves, and are employed for aiding in the multi-
standard nature of the present invention. Examples of such
unique tokens include PICTURE_END and CODING STANDARD.
Tokens are also introduced to remove some of the
- 21~5423
117
synta~tic differences between the coding standards and to
function in co-operation with the error conditions. The
automatic token generation is done after the serial analysis
of the standard-dependent data. Therefore, the Spatial
Decoder responds equally to tokens that have been supplied
directly to the input of the Spatial Decoder, i.e. the SCD,
as well as to tokens that have been qenerated following the
detection of the start-codes in the coded data. A sequence
of extra tokens is inserted into the two- wire interface in
order to control the multi-standard nature of the present
invention.
The MPEG and H.261 coded video streams contain standard
dependent, non-data, identifiable bit patterns, one of which
is hereinafter called a start image and/or standard-dependent
code. A similar function is served in JPEG, by marker codes.
These start/marker codes identify significant parts of the
syntax of the coded datastream. The analysis of start/marker
codes performed by the Start Code Detector is the first stage
in parsing the coded data.
The start/marker code patterns are designed so that they
can be identified without decoding the entire bit stream.
Thus, they can be used, in accordance with the present
invention, to assist with error recovery and decoder start-
up. The Start Code Detector provides facilities to detect
errors in the coded data construction and to assist the
start-up of the decoder. The error detection capability of
the Start Code Detector will subsequently be discussed in
further detail, as will the process of starting up of the
decoder.
The aforementioned description has been concerned
primarilty with the characteristics of the machine-dependent
bit stream and its relationship with the addressing
characteristics of the present invention. The following
description is of the bit stream characteristics of the
214~23
118
stand~rd-dependent coded data with reference to the Start
Code Detector.
Each of the standard compression encoding systems
employs a unique start code configuration or image which has
been selected to identify that particular compression
specification. Each of the start codes also carries with it
a start code value. The start code value is employed to
identify within the language of the standard the type of
operation that the start code is associated with. In the
multi-standard decoder of the present invention, the
compatibility is based upon the control token and DATA token
configuration as previously described. Index signals,
including flag signals, are circuit-generated within each
state machine, and are described hereinafter as appropriate.
The start and/or marker codes contained in the
standards, as well as other standard words as opposed to data
words, are sometimes identified as images to avoid confusion
with the use of code and/or machine-dependent codes to refer
to the contents of control and/or DATA tokens used in the
machine. Also, the term start code is often used as a
generic term to refer to JPEG marker codes as well as MPEG
and H.261 start codes. Marker codes and start codes serve
the same purpose. Also, the term "flush" is used both to
refer to the FLUSH token, and as a verb, for example when
referring to flushing the Start Code Detector shift registers
(including the signal "flushed"). To avoid confusion, the
FLUSH token is always written in upper case. All other uses
of the term (verb or noun) are in lower case.
The standard-dependent coded input picture input stream
comprises data and start images of varying lengths. The
start images carry with them a value telling the user what
operation is to be performed on the data which immediately
follows according to the standard. However, in the multi-
standard pipeline processing system of the present invention,
- 2145~23
119
where compatibility is required for multiple standards, the
system has been optimized for handling all functions in all
standards. Accordingly, in many situation~, unique start
control token~ must be created which are compatible not only
with the values contained in the values of the encoded signal
standard image, but which are also capable of controlling the
various stages to emulate the operation of the standard as
represented by specified parameters for each standard which
are well known in the art. All such standards are
incorporated by reference into this specification.
It is important to understand the relationship between
tokens which, alone or ln combination with other control
tokens, emulate the nondata information contained in the
standard bit stream. A separate set of index signals,
including flag signals, are generated by each state machine
to handle some of the processing within that state machine.
Values carried in the standards can be used to access machine
dependent control signals to emulate the handling of the
standard data and non-data signals. For example, the
slice_start token is a two word token, and it is then entered
onto the two wire interface as previously described.
The data input to the system of the present invention
may be a data source from any suitable data source such as
disk, tape, etc., the data source providing 8 bit data to the
first functional stage in the Spatial Decoder, the Start Code
Detector 51 (Figure 11). The Start Code Detector includes
three shift registers; the first shift register is 8 bits
wide, the next is 24 bits wide, and the next is 15 bits wide.
Each of the registers is part of the two-wire interface. The
data from the data source is loaded into the first register
as a single 8 bit byte during one timing cycle. Thereafter,
the contents of the first shift register is shifted one bit
at a time into the decode (second) shift register. After 24
cycles, the 24 bit register is full.
- 214~23
120
Every 8 cycles, the 8 bit byte~ are loaded into the
first shift register. Each byte i8 loaded into the value
shift register 221 (Figure 20), and 8 additional cycles are
used to empty it and load the shift regi~ter 231. Eight
cycles are used to empty it, so after three of those
operations or 24 cycles, there are still three bytes in the
24 bit register. The value decode shift register 230 is
still empty.
Assuming that there is now a PIeTURE START word in the
24 bit shift register, the detect cycle recognizes the
PICTURE_START code pattern and provides a start signal as its
output. Once the detector has detected a start, the byte
following it is the value associated with that start code,
and this is currently sitting in the value register 221.
Since the contents of the detect shift register has been
identified as a start code, its contents must be removed from
the two wire interface to ensure that no further processing
takes place using these 3 bytes. The decode register is
emptied, and the value decode shift register 230 waits for
the value to be shifted all the way over to such register.
The contents now of the low order bit positions of the
value decode shift register contains a value associated with
the PICTURE_START. The Spatial Decoder equivalent to the
standard PICTURE_START signal is referred to as the SD
PICTURE_START signal. The SD PICTURE_START signal itself is
going to now be contained in the token header, and the value
is going to be contained in the extension word to the token
header.
lo. TO~EN8
In the practice of the present invention, a token is a
universal adaptation unit in the form of an interactive
interfacing messenger package for control and/or data
functions and is adapted for use with a reconfigurable
~_ 2145~23
121
processing stage (RPS) which is a stage, which in response to
a recognized token, reconfigures itself to perform various
operations.
Tokens may be either position dependent or position
independent upon the processing stages for performance of
various functions. Tokens may also be metamorphic in that
they can be altered by a processing stage and then passed
down the pipeline for performance of further functions.
Tokens may interact with all or less than all of the stages
and in this regard may interact with adjacent and/or non-
adjacent stages. Tokens may be position dependent for some
functions and position independent for other functions, and
the specific interaction with a stage may be conditioned by
the previous processing history of a stage.
A PICTURE_END token is a way of signalling the end of a
picture in a multi-standard decoder.
A multi-standard token is a way of mapping MPEG, JPEG
and H.261 data streams onto a single decoder using a mixture
of standard dependent and standard independent hardware and
control tokens.
A SEARCH MODE token is a technique for searching MPEG,
JPEG and H.261 data streams which allows random access and
enhanced error recovery.
. A STOP_AFTER PICTURE token is a method of achieving a
2~ clear end to decoding which signals the end of a picture and
clears the decoder pipeline, i.e., channel change.
- Furthermore, padding a token is a way of passing an
arbitrary number of bits through a fixed size, fixed width
buffer.
The present invention is directed to a pipeline
processing system which has a variable configuration which
uses tokens and a two-wire system. The use of control tokens
and DATA Tokens in combination with a two-wire system
facilitates a multi-standard system capable of having
` 21~5~23
122
extende~- operating capabilities as compared with those
systems which do not use control tokens.
The control tokens are generated by circuitry within the
decoder processor and emulate the operation of a number of
different type standard-dependent signals passing into the
serial pipeline processor for handling. The technique used
is to study all the parameters of the multi-standards that
are selected for processing by the serial processor and
noting 1) their similarities, 2) their dissimilarities, 3)
their needs and requirements and 4) selecting the correct
token function to effectively process all of the standard
signals sent into the serial processor. The functions of the
tokens are to emulate the standards. A control token
function is used partially as an emulation/translation
between the standard dependent signals and as an element to
transmit control information through the pipeline processor.
In prior art system, a dedicated machine is designed
according to well-known techniques to identify the standard
and then set up dedicated circuitry by way of microprocessor
interfaces. Signals from the microprocessor are used to
control the flow of data through the dedicated downstream
components. The selection, timing and organization of this
decompression function is under the control of fixed logic
circuitry as assisted by signals coming from the
microprocessor.
In contrast, the system of the present invention
configures the downstream functional stages under the control
of the control tokens. An option is provided for obtaining
needed and/or alternative control from the MPU.
The tokens provide and make a sensible format for
communicating information through the decompression circuit
pipeline processor. In the design selected hereinafter and
used in the preferred embodiment, each word of a token is a
minimum of 8 bits wide, and a single token can extend o-~er
~ 21~42~
123
one or more words. The width of the token is changeable and
can be selected as any number of bits. An extension bit
indicates whether a token is extended beyond the current
word, i.e., if it is set to binary one in all words of a
token, except the last word of a token. If the first word of
a token has an extension bit of zero, this indicates that the
token is only one word long.
Each token is identified by an address field that starts
at bit 7 of the first word of the token. The address field
is variable in length and can potentially extend over
multiple words. In a preferred embodiment, the address is no
longer than 8 bits long. However, this is not a limitation
on the invention, but on the magnitude of the processing
steps elected to be accomplished by use of these tokens. It
is to be noted under the extension bit identification label
that the extension bit in words 1 and 2 is a 1, signifying
that additional words will be coming thereafter. The
extension bit in word 3 is a zero, therefore indicating the
end of that token.
The token is also capable of variable bit length. For
example, there are 9 bits in the token word plus the
extension bit for a total of 10 bits. In the design of the
present invention, output buses are of variable width. The
output from the Spatial Decoder is 9 bits wide, or 10 bits
wide when the extension bit is included. In a preferred
embodiment, the only token that takes advantage of these
extra bits is the DATA token; all other tokens ignore this
extra bit. It should be understood that this is not a
limitation, but only an implementation.
Through the use of the DATA token and control token
configuration, it is possible to vary the length of the data
being carried by these DATA tokens in the sense of the number
of bits in one word. For example, it has been discussed that
data bits in word of a DATA Token can be combined with the
-` 214~23
124
data bits in another word of the same DATA token to form an
11 bit or 10 bit address for use in accessing the random
access memories used throughout this serial decompression
processor. This provides an additional degree of variability
that facilitates a broad range of versatility.
As previously described, the DATA token carries data
from one processing stage to the next. Consequently, the
characteristics of this token change as it passes through the
decoder. For example, at the input to the Spatial Decoder,
DATA Tokens carry bit serial coded video data packed into 8
bit words. Here, there is no limit to the length of each
token. However, to illustrate the versatility of this aspect
of the invention (at the output of the Spatial Decoder
circuit), each DATA Token carries exactly 64 words and each
word is 9 bits wide. More specifically, the standard
encoding signal allows for different length messages to
encode different intensities and details of pictures. The
first picture of a group normally carries the longest number
of data bits because it needs to provide the most information
to the processing unit so that it can start the decompression
with as much information as possible. Words which follow
later are typically shorter in length because they contain
the difference signals comparing the first word with
reference to the second position on the scan information
field.
The words are interspersed with each other, as required
by the standard encoding system, so that variable amounts of
data are provided into the input of the Spatial Decoder.
However, after the Spatial Decoder has functioned, the
information is provided at its output at a picture format
rate suitable for display on a screen. The output rate in
terms of time of the spatial decoder may vary in order to
interface with various display systems throughout the world,
such as NTSC, PAL and SECAM. The video formatter converts
2145123
125
this variable picture rate to a constant picture rate
suitable for display. However, the picture data is still
carried by DATA tokens consisting of 64 words.
11. DRAh INTERF~CE
A single high performance, configurable DRAM interface
is used on each of the 3 decoder chips. In general, the DRAM
interface on each chip is substantially the same; however,
the interfaces differ from one to another in how they handle
channel priorities. This interface is designed to directly
drive the external DRAMs used by the Spatial Decoder, the
Temporal Decoder and the Video Formatter. Typically, no
external logic, buffers or components will be required to
connect the DRAM interface to the DRAMs in those systems.
In accordance with the present invention, the interface is
configurable in two ways:
1. The detailed timing of the interface can be
configured to accommodate a variety of different
DRAM types.
2. The width of the data interface to the DRAM can
be configured to provide a cost/performance trade
off for different applications.
In general, the DRAM interface is a standard-independent
block implemented on each of the three chips in the system.
Again, these are the Spatial Decoder, Temporal Decoder and
video formatter. Referring again to Figures 11, 12 and 13,
these figures show block diagrams that depict the
relationship between the DRAM interface, and the remaining
blocks of the Spatial Decoder, Temporal Decoder and video
formatter, respectively. On each chip, the DRAM interface
connects the chip to an external DRAM. External DRAM is used
because, at present, it is not practical to fabricate on chip
the relatively large amount of DRAM needed. Note: each chip
has its own external DRAM and its own DRAM interface.
2145~2~
126
Furthermore, while the DRAM interface is compression
standard-independent, it still must be configured to
implement each of the multiple standards, H.261, JPEG and
MPEG. How the DRAM interface is reconfigured for multi-
standard operation will be subsequently further describedherein.
Accordingly, to understand the operation of the DRAM
interface requires an understanding of the relationship
between the DRAM interface and the address generator, and how
the two communicate using the two wire interface.
In general, as its name implies, the address generator
generates the addresses the DRAM interface needs in order to
address the DRAM (e.g., to read from or to write to a
particular address in DRAM). With a two-wire interface,
reading and writing only occurs when the DRAM interface has
both data (from preceding stages in the pipeline), and a
valid address (from address generator). The use of a
separate address generator simplifies the construction of
both the address generator and the DRAM interface, as
discussed further below.
In the present invention, the DRAM interface can operate
from a clock which is asynchronous to both the address
generator and to the clocks of the stages through which data
is passed. Special techniques have been used to handle this
asynchronous nature of the operation.
Data is typically transferred between the DRAM interface
and the rest of the chip in blocks of 64 bytes (the only
exception being prediction data in the Temporal Decoder).
Transfers take place by means of a device known as a "swing
buffer". This is essentially a pair of RAMs operated in a
double-buffered configuration, with the DRAM interface
filling or emptying one RAM while another part of the chip
empties or fills the other RAM. A separate bus which carries
an address from an address generator is associated with each
127 214 ~4 23
swing buffer.
In the present invention, each of the chips has four swing
buffers, but the function of these swing buffers is different
in each case. In the spatial decoder, one swing buffer is
S used to transfer coded data to the DRAM, another to read
coded data from the DRAM, the third to transfer tokenized
data to the DRAM and the fourth to read tokenized data from
the DRAM. In the Temporal Decoder, however, one swing buffer
is used to write intra or predicted picture data to the DRAM,
the second to read intra or predicted data from the DRAM and
the other two are used to read forward and backward
prediction data. In the video formatter, one swing buffer is
used to transfer data to the DRAM and the other three are
used to read data from the DRAM, one for each of luminance
(Y) and the red and blue color difference data (Cr and Cb,
respectively).
The following section describes the operation of a
hypothetical DRAM interface which has one write swing buffer
and one read swing buffer. Essentially, this is the same as
the operation of the Spatial Decoder's DRAM interface. The
operation is illustrated in Figure 23.
Figure 23 illustrates that the control interfaces
between the address generator 301, the DRAM interface 302,
and the remaining stages of the chip which pass data are all
two wire interfaces. The address generator 301 may either
generate addresses as the result of receiving control tokens,
or it may merely generate a fixed sequence of addresses
(e.g., for the FIF0 buffers of the Spatial Decoder). The
DRAM interface treats the two wire interfaces associated with
the address generator 301 in a special way. Instead of
keeping the accept line high when it is ready to receive an
address, it waits for the address generator to supply a valid
address, processes that address and then sets the accept line
high for one clock period. Thus, it implements a
21454~3
128
reguest/acknowledge (REQ/ACX) protocol.
A unique feature of the DRAM interface 302 is its
ability to communicate independently with the address
generator 301 and with the stages that provide or accept the
data. For example, the address generator may generate an
address as~ociated with the data in the write swing buffer
(Figure 24), but no action will be taken until the write
swing buffer signals that there is a block of data ready to
be written to the external DRAM. Similarly, the write swing
buffer may contain a block of data which is ready to be
written to the external DRAM, but no action is taken until an
address is supplied on the appropriate bus from the address
generator 301. Further, once one of the RAMs in the write
swing buffer has been filled with data, the other may be
completely filled and "swung" to the DRAM interface side
before the data input is stalled (the two-wire interface
accept signal set low).
In understanding the operation of the DRAM interface 302
of the present invention, it is important to note that in a
properly configured system, the DRAM interface will be able
to transfer data between the swing buffers and the external
DRAM 303 at least as fast as the sum of all the average data
rates between the swing buffers and the rest of the chip.
Each DRAM interface 302 determines which swing buffer it
will service next. In general, this will either be a "round
robin" (i.e., the next serviced swing buffer is the next
available swing buffer which has least recently had a turn),
or a priority encoder, (i.e., in which some swing buffers
have a higher priority than others). In both cases, an
additional request will come from a refresh request generator
which has a higher priority than all the other requests. The
refresh request is generated from a refresh counter which can
be programmed via the microprocessor interface.
Referring now to Figure 24, there is shown a block
2115423
129
diagram of a write swing buffer. The write swing buffer
interface includes two blocks of RAM, RAMl 311 and RAM2 312.
As discussed further herein, data is written into RAMl 311
and RAM2 312 from the previous stage, under the control of
the write address 313 and control 314. From RAMl 311 and
RAM2 312, the data is written into DRAM 515. When writing
data into DRAM 315, the DRAM row address is provided by the
address generator, and the column address is provided by the
write address and control, as described further herein. In
operation, valid data is presented at the input 316 (data
in). Typically, the data is received from the previous
stage. As each piece of data is accepted by the DRAM
interface, it is written into RAM1 311 and the write address
control increments the RAM1 address to allow the next piece
of data to be written into RAM1. Data continues to be
written into RAM1 311 until either there is no more data, or
RAMl is full. When RAM1 311 is full, the input side gives up
control and sends a signal to the read side to indicate that
RAMl is now ready to be read. This signal passes between two
asynchronous clock regimes and, therefore, passes through
three synchronizing flip flops.
Provided RAM2 312 is empty, the next item of data to
arrive on the input side is written into RAM2. Otherwise,
this occurs when RAM2 312 has emptied. When the round robin
or priority encoder (depending on which is used by the
particular chip) indicates that it is now the turn of this
swing buffer to be read, the DRAM interface reads the
contents of RAM1 311 and writes them to the external DRAM
315. A signal is then sent back across the asynchronous
interface, to indicate that RAMl 311 is now ready to be
filled again.
If the DRAM interface empties RAM1 311 and "swings" it
before the input side has filled RAM2 312 , then data can be
--` 214~423
130
accep~ed by the swing buffer sontinually. Otherwise, when
RAM2 is filled, the swing buffer will set its accept single
low until RAM1 has been "swung" back for use by the input
side.
The operation of a read swing buffer, in accordance with
the present invention, is similar, but with the input and
output data busses reversed.
The DRAM interface of the present invention is designed
to maximize the available memory bandwidth. Each 8x8 block
of data is stored in the same DRAM page. In this way, full
use can be made of DRAM fast page access modes, where one row
address is supplied followed by many column addresses. In
particular, row addresses are supplied by the address
generator, while column addresses are supplied by the DRAM
interface, as discussed further below.
In addition, the facility is provided to allow the data
bus to the external DRAM to be 8, 16 or 32 bits wide.
Accordingly, the amount of DRAM used can be matched to the
size and bandwidth requirements of the particular
application.
In this example (which is exactly how the DRAM interface
on the Spatial Decoder works) the address generator provides
the DRAM interface with block addresses for each of the read
and write swing buffers. This address is used as the row
address for the DRAM. The six bits of column address are
supplied by the DRAM interface itself, and these bits are
also used as the address for the swing buffer RAM. The data
bus to the swing buffers is 32 bits wide. Hence, if the bus
width to the external DRAM is less than 32 bits, two or four
external DRAM accesses must be made before the next word is
read from a write swing buffer or the nèxt word is written to
a read swing buffer (read and write refer to the direction of
transfer relative to the external DRAM).
The situation is more complex in the case of the
-
131 21~5~2~
Temporal D~coA~r and the Video Formatter. The Temporal
Deco~r's addressing i~ more complex because of its
predictive aspects as discussed further in this section. The
video formatter's addressing is more complex because of
multiple video output standard aspects, as discussed further
in the sections relating to the video formatter.
As mentioned previously, the Temporal Decoder has four
swing buffers: two are used to read and write decoded intra
and predicted (I and P) picture data. These operate as
described above. The other two are used to receive
prediction data. These buffers are more interesting.
In general, prediction data will be offset from the
position of the block being processed as specified in the
motion vectors in x and y. Thus, the block of data to be
retrieved will not generally correspond to the block
boundaries of the data as it was encoded (and written into
the DRAM). This is illustrated in Figure 25, where the
shaded area represents the block that is being formed whereas
the dotted outline represents the block from which it is
being predicted. The address generator converts the address
specified by the motion vectors to a block offset (a whole
number of blocks), as shown by the big arrow, and a pixel
offset, as shown by the little arrow.
In the address generator, the frame pointer, base block
2S address and vector offset are added to form the address of
the block to be retrieved from the DRAM. If the pixel offset
is zero, only one request is generated. If there is an
offset in either the x or y dimension then two requests are
generated, i.e., the original block address and the one
immediately below. With an offset in both x and y, four
requests are generated. For each block which is to be
retrieved, the address generator calculates start and stop
addresses which is best illustrated by an example.
Consider a pixel offset of (1,1), as illustrated by the
- 21454Z~
132
shaded area in Figure 26. The address generator makes four
requests, labelled A through D in the Figure. The problem to
be solved is how to provide the required sequence of row
addresses guickly. The solution is to use "start/stop"
technology, and this is described below.
Consider block A in Figure 26. Reading must start at
position (1,1) and end at position (7,73. Assume for the
moment that one byte is being read at a time (i.e., an 8 bit
DRAM interface). The x value in the co-ordinate pair forms
the three LSBs of the address, the y value the three MSB.
The x and y start values are both 1, providing the address,
9. Data is read from this address and the x value is
incremented. The process is repeated until the x value
reaches its stop value, at which point, the y value is
incremented by 1 and the x start value is reloaded, giving an
address of 17. As each byte of data is read, the x value is
again incremented until it reaches its stop value. The
process is repeated until both x and y values have reached
their stop values. Thus, the address sequence of 9, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, lS, 17... , 23, 25, ... ,31, 33,... ,... ,57,... ,63
is generated.
In a similar manner, the start and stop co-ordinates for
block B are: (1,0) and (7,0), for block C: (0,1) and (0,7),
and for block D: (0,0) and (0,0).
The next issue is where this data should be written.
Clearly, looking at block A, the data read from address 9
should be written to address 0 in the swing buffer, while the
data from address 10 should be written to address 1 in the
swing buffer, and so on. Similarly, the data read from
address 8 in block B should be written to address 15 in the
swing buffer and the data from address 16 should be written
to address 15 in the swing buffer. This function turns out
to have a very simple implementation, as outlined below.
Consider block A. At the start of reading, the swing
2145423
133
buffer addreQs register iQ loaded with the inverse of the
stop value. The y inverse stop value forms the 3 MSBs and
the x inverse stop value forms the 3 LSB. In this case,
while the DRAM interface is reading address 9 in the external
DRAM, the swing buffer address is zero. The swing buffer
address register is then incremented as the external DRAM
address register is incremented, as consistent with proper
prediction addressing.
The discu~sion so far has centered on an 8 bit DRAM
interface. In the case of a 16 or 32 bit interface, a few
minor modifications must be made. First, the pixel offset
vector must be "clipped" so that it points to a 16 or 32 bit
boundary. In the example we have been using, for block A,
the first DRAM read will point to address 0, and data in
addresses 0 through 3 will be read. Second, the unwanted
data must be discarded. This is performed by writing all the
data into the swing buffer (which must now be physically
larger than was necessary in the 8 bit case) and reading with
an offset. When performing MPEG half-pel interpolation, 9
bytes in x and/or y must be read from the DRAM interface. In
this case, the address generator provides the appropriate
start and stop addresses. Some additional logic in the DRAM
interface is used, but there is no fundamental change in the
way the DRAM interface operates.
The final point to note about the Temporal Decoder DRAM
interface of the present invention, is that additional
information must be provided to the prediction filters to
indicate what processing is required on the data. This
consists of the following:
a "last byte" signal indicating the last byte of a
transfer (of 64,72 or 81 bytes);
an H.261 flag;
a bidirectional prediction flag;
two bits to indicate the block~s dimensions (8 or 9 bytes
214S423
134
in x and y); and
a two bit number to indicate the order of the blocks.
The last byte flag can be generated as the data is read
out of the swing buffer. The other signals are derived from
the address generator and are piped through the DRAM
interface so that they are associated with the correct block
of data as it is read out of the swing buffer by the
prediction filter block.
In the Video Formatter, data is written into the
external DRAM in blocks, but is read out in raster order.
Writing is exactly the same as already described for the
Spatial Decoder, but reading is a little more complex.
The data in the Video Formatter, external DRAM is
organized so that at least 8 blocks of data fit into a single
page. These 8 blocks are 8 consecutive horizontal blocks.
When rasterizing, 8 bytes need to be read out of each of 8
consecutive blocks and written into the swing buffer (i.e.,
the same row in each of the 8 blocks).
Considering the top row (and assuming a byte-wide
interface), the x address (the three LSBS) is set to zero, as
is the y address (3 MSBS). The x address is then incremented
as each of the first 8 bytes are read out. At this point,
the top part of the address (bit 6 and above - LSB = bit 0)
is incremented and the x address (3 LSBS) is reset to zero.
This process is repeated until 64 bytes have been read. With
a 16 or 32 bit wide interface to the external DRAM the x
address is merely incremented by two or four, respectively,
instead of by one.
In the present invention, the address generator can
signaI to the DRAM interface that less than 64 bytes should
be read tthis may be required at the beginning or end of a
raster line), although a multiple of 8 bytes is always read.
This is achieved by using start and stop values. The start
value is used for the top part of the address (bit 6 and
214~423
135
above), and the stop value i8 compared with the start value
to generate the signal which indicates when reading should
stop.
The DRAM interface timing block in the present invention
S uses timing chains to place the edges of the DRAM signals to
a precision of a quarter of the system clock period. Two
quadrature clocks from the phase locked loop are used. These
are combined to form a notional 2x clock. Any one chain is
then made from two shift registers in parallel, on opposite
phases of the 2x clock.
First of all, there is one chain for the page start
cycle and another for the read/write/refresh cycles. The
length of each cycle is programmable via the microprocessor
interface, after which the page start chain has a fixed
length, and the cycle chain's length changes as appropriate
during a page start.
On reset, the chains are cleared and a pulse is created.
The pulse travels along the chains and is directed by the
state information from the DRAM interface. The pulse
generates the DRAM interface clock. Each DRAM interface
clock period corresponds to one cycle of the DRAM,
consequently, as the DRAM cycles have different lengths, the
DRAM interface clock is not at a constant rate.
Moreover, additional timing chains combine the pulse
from the above chains with the information from the DRAM
interface to generate the output strobes and enables such as
notcas, notras, notwe, notbe.
12. PREDICTION FILTER8
Referring again to Figures 12, 17, 18, and more
particularly to Figure 12, there is shown a block diagram of
the Temporal Decoder. This includes the prediction filter.
The relationship between the prediction filter and the rest
of the elements of the temporal decoder is shown in greater
214~423
136
detail in Figure 17. The essence of the structure of the
prediction filter is shown in Figures 18 and 28. A detailed
description of the operation of the prediction filter can be
found in the section, "More Detailed Description of the
Invention. n
In general, the prediction filter in accordance with the
present invention, is used in the MPEG and H.261 modes, but
not in the JPEG mode. Recall that in the JPEG mode, the
Temporal Decoder just passes the data through to the Video
Formatter, without performing any substantive decoding beyond
that accomplished by the Spatial Decoder. Referring again to
Figure 18, in the MPEG mode the forward and backward
prediction filters are identical and they filter the
respective MPEG forward and backward prediction blocks. In
the H.261 mode, however, only the forward prediction filter
is used, since H.261 does not use backward prediction.
Each of the two prediction filters of the present
invention is substantially the same. Referring again to
Figures 18 and 28 and more particularly to Figure 28, there
is shown a block diagram of the structure of a prediction
filter. Each prediction filter consists of four stages in
series. Data enters the format stage 331 and is placed in a
format that can be readily filtered. In the next stage 332
an I-D prediction is performed on the X-coordinate. After
the necessary transposition is performed by a dimension
buffer stage 333, an I-D prediction is performed on the Y-
coordinate in stage 334. How the stage perform the filtering
is further described in greater detail subsequently. Which
filtering operations are required, are defined by the
compression standard. In the case of H.261, the actual
filtering performed is similar to that of a low pass filter.
Referring again to Figure 17, multi-standard
operation requires that the prediction filters be
reconfigurable to perform either MPEG or H.261 filtering, or
2145423
_ 137
to perform no filtering at all in JPEG mode. Ac with many
other reconfigurable aspects of the three chip system, the
prediction filter is reconfigured by means of tokens. Tokens
are also used to inform the address generator of the
particular mode of operation. In this way, the address
generator can supply the prediction filter with the addresses
of the needed data, which varies significantly between MPEG
and JPEG.
13. ~C~~IN~ RFGI8TFR8
Most registers in the microprocessor interface (MPI) can
only be modified if the stage with which they are
associated is stopped. Accordingly, groups of registers
will typically be associated with an access register. The
value zero in an access register indicates that the group
of registers associated with that particular access
register should not be modified. Writing 1 to an access
register requests that a stage be stopped. The stage may
not stop immediately, however, so the stages access
register will hold the value, zero, until it is stopped.
Any user software associated with the MPI and used to
perform functions by way of the MPI should wait "after
writing a l to a request access register" until l is read
from the access register. If a user writes a value to a
configuration register while its access register is set to
zero, the results are undefined.
14. MICRO-PROCE880R INTERFACE
A standard byte wide micro-processor interface (MPI) is
used on all circuits with in the Spatial Decoder and
Temporal Decoder. The MPI operates asynchronously with
various Spatial and Temporal Decoder clocks. Referring to
Table A.6.1 of the subsequent further detailed description,
there is shown the various MPI signals that
2145423
138
are used on this interface. The character of the signal is
shown on the input/output column, the 6ignal name i8 shown
on the signal name column and a description of the function
of the signal is shown in the description column. The MPI
electrical specification are shown with reference to Table
A.6.2. All the specifications are classified according to
type and there types are shown in the column entitled
symbol. The description of what these symbols represent is
shown in the parameter column. The actual specifications
are shown in the respective columns min, max and units.
The DC operating conditions can be seen with reference
to Table A.6.3. Here the column headings are the same as
with reference to Table A.6.2. The DC electrical
characteristics are shown with reference to Table A.6.4 and
carry the same column headings as depicted in Tables A.6.2
and A.6.3.
15. MPI R~AD TIMING
The AC characteristics of the MPI read timing diagrams
are shown with reference to Figure 54. Each line of the
Figure is labelled with a corresponding signal name and the
timing is given in nano-seconds. The full microprocessor
interface read timing characteristics are shown with
reference to Table A.6.5. The column entitled Number is
used to indicate the signal corresponding to the name of
that signal as set forth in the characteristic column. The
columns identified by MIN and MAX provide the minimum
length of time that the signal is present the maximum
amount of time that this signal is available. The Units
column gives the units of measurement used to describe the
signals.
16. MPI ~RITF TIMING
The general description of the MPI write timing diagrams
21~54~3
139
are ~hown with reference to Figure 54. This Figure shows
each individual signal name a~ associated with the MPI
write timing. The name, the characteristic of the signal,
and other various physical characteristics are shown with
reference to Table 6.6.
17. ~LOLY ~n~rrp~ LOCATION8
In the present invention, certain less frequently
accessed memory map location~ have been placed behind
keyhole registers. A keyhole register has two rogisters
associated with it. The first register i~ a keyhole
address register and the second register is a keyhole data
register. The keyhole address specifies a location within
a extended address space. A read or a write operation to a
keyhole data register accesses the locations specified by
the keyhole address register. After accessing a keyhole
data register, the associated keyhole address register
increments. Random access within the extended address
space is only possible by writing in a new value to the
keyhole addre-ss register for each access. A circuit within
the present invention may have more than one keyhole memory
maps. Nonetheless, there is no interaction between the
different keyholes.
18. PICTURE-END
Referring again to Figure 11, there is shown a
general block diagram of the Spatial Decoder used in the
present invention. It is through the use of this block
diagram that the function of PICTURE END will be described.
The PICTURE END function has the multi-standard advantage
of being able to handle H.261 encoded picture information,
MPEG and JPEG signals.
As previously described, the system of Figure 11
is interconnected by the two wire interface previously
- 2145423
140
de~cribed. Each of the functional blocks is arranged to
operate accordinq to the state machine configuration shown
with reference to Figure 10.
In general, the PI~-T~RE_END function in accordance with
the invention begins at the Start Code Detector which
generates a PICTURE_END control token. The PICTURE_END
control token is passed unaltered through the start-up
control circuit to the DRAM interface. Here it is used to
flush out the write swing buffers in the DRAM interface.
Recall, that the contents of a swing buffer are only
written to RAM when the buffer is full. However, a picture
may end at a point where the buffer is not full, therefore,
causing the picture data to become stuck. The PICTURE_END
token forces the data out of the swing buffer.
Since the present invention is a multi-standard machine,
the machine operates differently for each compression
standard. More particularly, the machine is fully
described as operating pursuant to machine-dependent action
cycles. For each compression standard, a certain number of
the total available action cycles can be selected by a
combination of control tokens and/or output signals from
the MPU or they can be selected by the design of the
control tokens themselves. In this regard, the present
invention is organized so as to delay the information from
going into subsequent blocks until all of the information
has been collected in an upstream block. The system waits
until the data has been prepared for passing to the next
stage. In this way, the PICTURE_END signal is applied to
the coded data buffer, and the control portion of the
PICTURE_END signal causes the contents of the data buffers
to be read and applied to the Huffman decoder and video
demultiplexor circuit.
Another advantage of the PICTURE_END control token is
to identify, for the use by the Huffman decoder
- 141 2145423
demultiplexor, the end of picture even though it has not
had the typically expected full range and/or number of
signals applied to the Huffman decoder and video
demultiplexor circuit. In this situation, the information
held in the coded data buffer is applied to the Huffman
decoder and video demultiplexor as a total picture. In
this way, the state machine of the Huffman decoder and
video demultiplexor can still handle the data according to
system design.
Another advantage of the PICTURE_END control token is
its ability to completely empty the coded data buffer so
that no stray information will inadvertently remain in the
off chip DRAM or in the swin~ buffers.
Yet another advantage of the PICTURE_END function is
its use in error recovery. For example, assume the amount
of data being held in the coded data buffer is less than is
typically used for describing the spatial information with
reference to a single picture. Accordingly, the last
picture will be held in the data buffer until a full swing
buffer, but, by definition, the buffer will never fill. At
some point, the machine will determine that an error
condition exits. Hence, to the extent that a PICTURE_END
token is decoded and forces the data in the coded data
buffers to be applied to the Huffman decoder and video
2~ demultiplexor, the final picture can be decoded and the
information emptied from the buffers. Consequently, the
machine will not go into error recovery mode and will
successfully continue to process the coded data.
A still further advantage of the use of a PICTURE END
,o token is that the serial pipeline processor will continue
the processing of uninterrupted data. Through the use of a
PICTURE END token, the serial pipeline processor is
configured to handle less than the expected amount of data
and, therefore, continues processing. Typically, a prior
- 214~423
142
art machine would stop it~elf because of an error
condition. As previously described, the coded data buffer
counts macroblocks as they come into its storage area. In
addition, the Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplexor
generally know the amount of information expected for
decoding each picture, i.e., the state machine portion of
the Huffman decode and Video Demultiplexor know the number
of blocks that it will process during each picture recovery
cycle. When the correct number of blocks do not arrive
from the coded data buffer, typically an error recovery
routine would result. However, with the PICTURE_END
control token having reconfigured the Huffman Decoder and
Video Demultiplexor, it can continue to function because
the reconfiguration tells the Huffman Decoder and Video
Demultiplexor that it is, indeed, handling the proper
amount of information.
Referring again to Figure 10, the Token Decoder
portion of the Buffer Manager detects the PICTURE_END
control token generated by the Start Code Detector. Under
normal operations, the buffer registers fill up and are
emptied, as previously described with reference to the
normal operation of the swing buffers. Again, a swing
buffer which is partially full of data will not empty until
it is totally filled and/or it knows that it is time to
empty. The PICTURE END control token is decoded in the
Token Decoder portion of the Buffer Manager, and it forces
the partially full swing buffer to empty itself into the
coded data buffer. This is ultimately passed to the
Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplexor either directly or
through the DRAM interface.
19. FLUSHING OPERATION
Another advantage of the PICTURE_END control token is
its function in connection with a FLUSH token. The FLUSH
214512~
143
token is not a6sociated with either controlling the
reconfiguration of the state machine or in providing data
for the system. Rather, it completes prior partial signals
for handling by the machine-dependent state machines. Each
of the state machines recognizes a FLUSH control token as
information not to be processed. Accordingly, the FLUSH
token is used to fill up all of the remaining empty parts
of the coded data buffers and to allow a full set of
information to be sent to the Huffman Decoder and Video
Demultiplexor. In this way, the FLUSH token is like
padding for buffers.
The Token Decoder in the Huffman circuit recognizes
the FLUSH token and ignores the pseudo data that the FLUSH
token has forced into it. The Huffman Decoder then operates
only on the data contents of the last picture buffer as it
existed prior to the arrival of the PICTURE END token and
FLUSH token. A further advantage of the use of the
PICTURE END token alone or in combination with a FLUSH
token is the reconfiguration and/or reorganization of the
Huffman Decoder circuit. With the arrival of the
PICTURE END token, the Huffman Decoder circuit knows that
it will have less information than normally expected to
decode the last picture. The Huffman decode circuit
finishes processing the information contained in the last
picture, and outputs this information through the DRAM
interface into the Inverse Modeller. Upon the
identification of the last picture, the Huffman Decoder
goes into its cleanup mode and readjusts for the arrival of
the next picture information.
20. FLUSH FUNCTION
The FLUSH token, in accordance with the present
invention, is used to pass through the entire pipeline
processor and to ensure that the buffers are emptied and
that other circuits are reconfigured to await the arrival
2I~5~23
144
of new data. More specifically, t~e precent invention
comprises a combination of a PICTURE END token, a padding
word and a FLUSH token indicating to the serial pipeline
processor that the picture processing for the current
picture for~ is completed. Thereafter, the various state
machines need reconfiguring to await the arrival of new
data for new handling. Note also that the FLUSH Token acts
as a special reset for the system. The FLUSH token resets
each stage as it passes through, but-allows subsequent
stages to continue processing. This prevents a loss of
data. In other words, the FLUSH token is a variable reset,
as opposed to, an absolute reset.
21. 8TOP-AFTER PICTURE
The STOP AFTER PICTURE function is employed to shut
down the processing of the serial pipeline decompressing
circuit at a logical point in its operation. At this
point, a PICTURE END token is generated indicating that
data is finished coming in from the data input line, and
the padding operation has been completed. The padding
function fills partially empty DATA tokens. A FLUSH token
is then generated which passes through the serial pipeline
system and pushes all the information out of the registers
and forces the registers back into their neutral stand-by
condition. The STOP AFTER PICTURE event is then generated
and no more input is accepted until either the user or the
system clears this state. In other words, while a
PICTURE END token signals the end of a picture, the
STOP AFTER_PICTURE operation signals the end of all current
processing.
3 0 2 2 . M~J~T~ -8TANDA~D - 8E:ARCH MODE
Another feature of the present invention is the use of
a SEARCH_MODE control token which is used to reconfigure
2145~23
145
the input to the serial pipeline proce~sQr to look at the
incoming bit stream. When the search mode is set, the
Start Code Detector searches only for a specific start code
or marker used in any one of the compression standards. It
will be appreciated, however, that, other images from other
data bitstreams can be used for this purpose. Accordingly,
these images can be used throughout this present invention
to change it to another embodiment which is capable of
using the combination of control tokens, and DATA tokens
along with the reconfiguration circuits, to provide similar
processing.
The use of search mode in the present invention is
convenient in many situations including 1) if a break in
the data bit stream occurs; 2) when the user breaks the
data bit stream by purposely changing channels, e.g., data
arriving, by a cable carrying compressed digital video, or
3) by user activation of fast forward or reverse from a
controllable data source such as an optical disc or video
disc. In general, a search mode is convenient when the
user interrupts the normal processing of the serial
pipeline at a point where the machine does not expect such
an interruption.
When any of the search modes are set, the Start Code
Detector looks for incoming start images which are suitable
for creating the machine independent tokens. All data
coming into the Start Code Detector prior to the
identification of standard-dependent start images is
discarded as meaningless and the machine stands in an
idling condition as it waits this information.
The Start Code Detector can assume any one of a number
of configurations. For example, one of these
configurations allows a search for a group of pictures or
higher start codes. This pattern causes the Start Code
Detector to discard all its input and look for the
- 214S423
146
group start standard image. When such an image is
identified, the Start Code Detector generates a GROUP_START
token and the search mode is reset automatically.
It is important to note that a single circuit, the
Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplex circuit, is operating
with a combination of input signals including the standard-
independent set-up signals, as well as, the CODING_STANDARD
signals. The CODING_STANDARD signals are conveying
information directly from the incoming bit stream as
required by the Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplex
circuit. Nevertheless, while the functioning of the
Huffman Decoder and Video Demultiplex circuit is under the
operation of the standard independent sequence of signals.
This mode of operation has been selected because it
is the most efficient and could have been designed wherein
special control tokens are employed for conveying the
standard-dependent input to the Huffman Decoder and Video
Demultiplexer instead of conveying the actual signals
themselves.
23. INVER8E MODELLER
Inverse modeling is a feature of all three standards,
and is the same for all three standards. In general, DATA
tokens in the token buffer contain information about the
values of the quantized coefficients, and about the number
of zeros between the coefficients that are represented (a
form of run length coding). The Inverse Modeller of the
present invention has been adapted for use with tokens and
simply expands the information about runs of zeros so that
each DATA Token contains the requisite 64 values.
Thereafter, the values in the DATA Tokens are quantized
coefficients which can be used by the Inverse Quantizer.
24. INVER8E Q~ANTIZER
- 2145~23
147
The Inverse Quantizer of the present invention is a
required element in the decoding sequence, but has been
implemented in such away to allow the entire IC set to
handle multi-standard data. In addition, the Inverse
Quantizer has been adapted for use with tokens. The
Inverse Quantizer lies between the Inverse modeller and
inverse DCT (IDCT).
For example, in the present invention, an adder in the
Inverse Quantizer is used to add a constant to the pel
decode number before the data moves on to the IDCT.
The IDCT uses the pel decode number, which will vary
according to each standard used to encode the information.
In order for the information to be properly decoded, a
value of 1024 is added to the decode number by the Inverse
Quantizer before the data continues on to the IDCT.
Using adders, already present in the Inverse
Quantizer, to standardize the data prior to it reaching the
IDCT, eliminates the need for additional circuitry or
software in the IC, for handling data compressed by the
various standards. Other operations allowing for multi-
standard operation are performed during a "post
quantization function" and are discussed below.
The control tokens accompanying the data are decoded
and the various standardization routines that need to be
performed by the Inverse Quantizer are identified in detail
below. These "post quantization" functions are all
implemented to avoid duplicate circuitry and to allow the
IC to handle multi-standard encoded data.
2 5 . ~ur r llAN DECODER AND PAR8ER
Referring again to Figures 11 and 27, the Spatial
Decoder includes a Huffman Decoder for decoding the data
that the various compression standards have Huffman-
encoded. While each of the standards, JPEG, MPEG and
2145423
148
H.261, require certain data to be Huffman encoded, the
Huffman decoding required by each ~tandard differs in some
significant ways. In the Spatial Decoder of the present
invention, rather than design and fabricate three separate
Huffman decoder~, one for each standard, the present
invention saves valuable die space by identifying common
aspects of each Huffman Decoder, and fabricating these
common aspects only once. Moreover, a clever multi-part
algorithm is used that makes common more aspects of each
Huffman Decoder common to the other standards as well than
would otherwise be the case.
In brief, the Huffman Decoder 321 works in
conjunction with the other units shown in Figure 27. These
other units are the Parser State Machine 322, the inshifter
323, the Index to Data unit 324, the ALU 325, and the Token
Formatter 326. As described previously, connection between
these blocks is governed by a two wire interface. A more
detailed description of how these units function is
subsequently described herein in greater detail, the focus
here is on particular aspects of the Huffman Decoder, in
accordance with the present invention, that support multi-
standard operation.
The Parser State Machine of the present invention, is a
programmable state machine that acts to coordinate the
operation of the other blocks of the Video Parser. In
response to data, the Parser State Machine controls the
other system blocks by generating a control word which is
passed to the other blocks, side by side with the data,
upon which this control word acts. Passing the control
word alongside the associated data is not only useful, it
is essential, since these blocks are connected via a two-
wire interface. In this way, both data and control arrive
at the same time. The passing of the control word is
indicated in Figure 27 by a control line 327 that runs
2145423
149
beneath the data line 328 that connects the blocks. Among
other things, this code word identifies the particular
standard that is being decoded.
The Huffman decoder 321 also performs certain control
functions. In particular, the Huffman Decoder 321 contains
a state machine that can control certain functions of the
Index to Data 324 and ALU 325. Control of these units by
the Huffman Decoder is necessary for proper decoding of
block-level information. Having the-Parser State Machine
322 make these decisions would take too much time.
An important aspect of the Huffman Decoder of the
present invention, is the ability to invert the coded data
bits as they are read into the Huffman Decoder. This is
needed to decode H.261 style Huffman codes, since the
particular type of Huffman code used by H.261 (and
substantially by MPEG) has the opposite polarity then the
codes used by JPEG. The use of an inverter, thereby,
allows substantially the same table to be used by the
Huffman Decoder for all three standards. Other aspects of
how the Huffman Decoder implements all three standards are
discussed in further detail in the "More Detailed
Description of the Invention" section.
The Index to Data unit 324 performs the second part of
the multi-part algorithm. This unit contains a look up
table that provides the actual Huffman decoded data.
Entries in the table are organized based on the index
numbers generated by the Huffman Decoder.
The ALU 325 implements the remaining parts of the
multi-part algorithm. In particular, the ALU handles sign-
extension. The ALU also includes a register file whichholds vector predictions and DC predictions, the use of
which is described in the sections related to prediction
filters. The ALU, further, includes counters that count
through the structure of the picture being decoded by the
- 214S~123
150
Spatial De~ r. In particular, the dimensions of the
picture are programmed into registers associated with the
counters, which facilitates detection of "start of
picture,~ and start of macroblock codes.
In accordance with the present invention, the Token
Formatter 326 (TF) assembles decoded data into DATA tokens
that are then passed onto the remaining stages or blocks in
the Spatial Decoder.
In the present invention, the in shifter 323 receives
data from a FIFO that buffers the data passing through the
Start Code Detector. The data received by the inshifter is
generally of two types: DATA tokens, and start codes which
the Start Code Detector has replaced with their respective
tokens, as discussed further in the token section. Note
that most of the data will be DATA tokens that require
decoding.
The ln shifter 323 serially passes data to the Huffman
Decoder 321. On the other hand, it passes control tokens
in parallel. In the Huffman decoder, the Huffman encoded
data is decoded in accordance with the first part of the
multi-part algorithm. In particular, the particular
Huffman code is identified, and then replaced with an index
number.
The Huffman Decoder 321 also identifies certain data
that requires special handling by the other blocks shown in
Figure 27. This data includes end of block and escape. In
the present invention, time is saved by detecting these in
the Huffman Decoder 321, rather than in the Index to Data
unit 324.
This index number is then passed to the Index to Data
unit 324. In essence, the Index to Data unit is a look-up
table. In accordance with one aspect of the algorithm, the
look-up table is little more than the Huffman code table
specified by JPEG. Generally, it is in the condensed data
214542~
151
format that JPEG specifies for transferring an alternate
JPEG table.
From the Index to Data unit 324, the decoded index
number or other data is pAS e~ ~ together with the
accompanying control word, to the ALU 325, which performs
the operations previously described.
From the ALU 325, the data and control word is passed
to the Token Formatter 326 (TF). In the Token Formatter,
the data is combined as needed with the control word to
form tokens. The tokens are then conveyed to the next
stages of the Spatial Decoder. Note that at this point,
there are as many tokens as will be used by the system.
26. INVER8E DI8C~TE CO8INE TRAN8FORM
The Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform (IDCT), in
accordance with the present invention, decompresses data
related to the frequency of the DC component of the
picture. When a particular picture is being compressed,
the frequency of the light in the picture is quantized,
reducing the overall amount of information needed to be
stored. The IDCT takes this quantized data and
decompresses it back into frequency information.
The IDCT operates on a portion of the picture which is
8x8 pixels in size. The math which performed on this data
is largely governed by the particular standard used to
encode the data. However, in the present invention,
significant use is made of common mathematical functions
between the standards to avoid unnecessary duplication of
circuitry.
Using a particular scaling order, the symmetry between
the upper and lower portions of the algorithms is
increased, thus common mathematical functions can be reused
which eliminates the need for additional circuitry.
21~5~23
152
Th~ IDCT responds to a number of multi-standard tokens.
The first portion of the IDCT checks the entering data to
ensure that the DATA tokens are of the correct size for
processing. In fact, the token stream can be corrected in
some situations if the error is not too large.
27. BUFFER MANAGER
The Buffer Manager of the present invention, receives
incoming video information and supplies the address
generators with information on the timing of the datas
arrival, display and frame rate. Multiple buffers are used
to allow changes in both the presentation and display
rates. Presentation and display rates will typically vary
in accordance with the data that was encoded and the
monitor on which the information is being displayed. Data
arrival rates will generally vary according to errors in
encoding, decoding or the source material used to create
the data. When information arrives at the Buffer Manager,
it is decompressed. However, the data is in an order that
is useful for the decompression circuits, but not for the
particular display unit being used. When a block of data
enters the Buffer Manager, the Buffer Manager supplies
information to the address generator so that the block of
data can be placed in the order that the display device can
use. In doing this, the Buffer Manager takes into account
the frame rate conversion necessary to adjust the incoming
data blocks so they are presentable on the particular
display device being used.
In the present invention, the Buffer Mnager primarily
supplies information to the address generators.
Nevertheless, it is also required to interface with other
elements of the system. For example, there is an interface
with an input FIFO which transfers tokens to the Buffer
Manager which, in turn, passes these tokens on to the wri~e
153 2145423
address generators.
The Buffer Manager also interfaces with the display
address generators, receiving information on whether the
display device is ready to display new data. The Buffer
Manager also confirms that the display address generators
have cleared information from a buffer for display.
The Buffer Manager of the present invention keeps track
of whether a particular buffer is empty, full, ready for
use or in use. It also keeps track of the presentation
number associated with the particular data in each buffer.
In this way, the Buffer Manager determines the states of
the buffers, in part, by making only one buffer at a time
ready for display. Once a buffer is displayed, the buffer
is in a "vacant" state. When the Buffer Manager receives a
PICTURE_START, FLUSH, valid or access token, it determines
the status of each buffer and its readiness to accept new
data. For example, the PICTURE_START token causes the
Buffer Manager to cycle through each buffer to find one
which is capable of accepting the new data.
The Buffer Manager can also be configured to handle the
multi-standard requirements dictated by the tokens it
receives. For example, in the H.261 standard, data maybe
skipped during display. If such a token arrives at the
Buffer Mnager, the data to be skipped will be flushed from
the buffer in which it is stored.
Thus, by managing the buffers, data can be effectively
displayed according to the compression standard used to
encode the data, the rate at which the data is decoded and
the particular type of display device being used.
21~5423
154
The foregoing description is believed to
adequately describe the overall concepts, system
implementation and operation of the various aspects of the
invention in sufficient detail to enable one of ordinary
skill in the art to make and practice the invention with
all of its attendant features, objects and advantages.
However, in order to facilitate a further, more detailed in
depth understanding of the invention,- and additional
details in connection with even more specific, commercial
implementation of various embodiments of the invention, the
following further description and explanation is pr~ferred.
2145423
155
This is a more detailed description for a multi-standard
video decoder chip-set. It is divided into three main
sections: A, B and C.
Again, for purposes of organization, clarity and
convenience of explanation, this additional disclosure is
set forth in the following sections.
Description of features common to chips in the
chip-set:
Tokens
Two wire interfaces
DRAM interface
Microprocessor interface
Clocks
Description of the Spatial Decoder chip
Description of the Temporal Decoder chip
SECTION A.l
The first description section covers the majority of
the electrical design issues associated with using the
chip-set.
a. 1 . 1 Typographic conv-ntions
A small set of typographic conventions is used to
emphasize some classes of information:
NAME8 OF TO~EN8
wire_name active high signal
wire_name active low signal
register_name
214~23
156
SECTION A.2 Video Decoder Family
30 MHz operation
Decodes MPEG, JPEG & H.261
Coded data rates to 25 Mb/s
Video data rates to 21 MB/s
MPEG resolutions up to 704 x 480, 30 Hz, 4:2:0
Flexible chroma sampling formats
Full JPEG baseline decoding
Glue-less page mode DRAM interface
208 pin PQFP package
Independent coded data and decoder clocks
Re-orders MPEG picture sequence
The Video decoder family provides a low chip count
solution for implementing high resolution digital video
decoders. The chip-set is currently configurable to
support three different video and picture coding systems:
JPEG, MPEG and H.261.
Full JPEG baseline picture decoding is supported.
720 x 480, 30 Hz, 4:2:2 JPEG encoded video can be decoded
in real-time.
CIF (Common Interchange Format) and QCIF H.261 video can
be decoded. Full feature MPEG video with formats up to 740
x 480, 30 Hz, 4:2:0 can be decoded.
Note: The above values are merely illustrative, by way
of example and not necessarily by way of limitation, of one
embodiment of the present invention. Accordingly, it will
be appreciated that other values and/or ranges may be used.
A.2.1 System configurations
A.2.1.1 Output formatting
In each of the examples given below, some form of output
formatter will be required to take the data presented at
the output of the Spatial Decoder or Temporal Decoder and
2145423
157
re-format it for a computer or display system. The details
of this formatting will vary between applications. In a
simple case, all that is required is an address generator
to take the block formatted data output by the decoder chip
and write it into memory in a raster order.
The Image Formatter is a single chip VLSI device
providing a wide range of output formatting functions.
A.2.1.2 JPEG Qtill picture decoding
A single Spatial Decoder, with no-off-chip DRAM, can
rapidly decode baseline JPEG images. The Spatial Decoder
will support all features of baseline JPEG. However, the
image size that can be decoded may be limited by the size
of the output buffer provided by the user. The
characteristics of the output formatter may limit the
chroma sampling formats and color spaces that can be
supported.
A.2.1.3 JPEG video d~coding
Adding off-chip DRAMs to the Spatial Decoder allows it
to decode JPEG encoded video pictures in real-time. The
size and speed of the required buffers will depend on the
video and coded data rates. The Temporal Decoder is not
required to decode JPEG encoded video. However, if a
Temporal Decoder is present in a multi-standard decoder
chip-set, it will merely pass the data through the Temporal
Decoder without alteration or modification when the system
is configured for JPEG operation.
A.2.1.4 H.261 decoding
The Spatial Decoder and the Temporal Decoder are both
required to implement an H.261 video decoder. The DRAM
interfaces on both devices are configurable to allow the
quantity of DRAM required for proper operation to be
reduced when working with small picture formats and at low
coded data rates. Typically, a single 4Mb (e.g. 512k x 8)
DRAM will be required by each of the Spatial Decoder and
158 2 145~ 23
the Té~oral Decoder.
A.2.1.5 MPEG decoding
The configuration required for MPEG operation is the
same as for H.261. However, as will be appreciated by one
of ordinary skill in the art, larger DRAM buffers may be
required to support the larger picture formats possible
with MPEG.
21~5~3
159
SECTION A.3 Tokens
A.3.1 Token for~t
In accordance with the present invention, tokens provide
an extensible format for communicating information through
the decoder chip-set. While in the present invention, each
word of a Token is a minimum of 8 bits wide, one of
ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that tokens can
be of any width. Furthermore, a single Token can be spread
over one or more words; this is accomplished using an
extension bit in each word. The formats for the tokens are
summarized in Table A.3.1.
The extension bit indicates whether a Token continues
into another word. It is set to 1 in all words of a Token
except the last one. If the first word of a Token has an
extension bit of 0, this indicates that the Token is only
one word long.
Each Token is identified by an Address Field that starts
in bit 7 of the first word of the Token. The Address Field
is of variable length and can potentially extend over
multiple words (in the current chips no address is more
than 8 bits long, however, one of ordinary skill in the art
will again appreciate that addresses can be of any length).
Some interfaces transfer more than 8 bits of data. For
example, the output of the Spatial Decoder is 9 bits wide
(10 bits including the extension bit). The only Token that
takes advantage of these extra bits is the DATA Token. The
DATA Token can have as many bits as are necessary for
carrying out processing at a particular place in the
system. All other Tokens ignore the extra bits.
` 21g~3
160
A.3.2 The DATA Token
The DATA Token carries data from one processing stage to
the next. Consequently, the characteristics of this Token
change as it passes through the decoder. Furthermore, the
meaning of the data carried by the DATA Token varies
depending on where the DATA Token is within the system,
i.e., the data is position dependent. In this regard, the
data may be either frequency domain or Pel domain data
depending on where the DATA Token is within the Spatial
Decoder. For example, at the input of the Spatial Decoder,
DATA Tokens carry bit serial coded video data packed into 8
bit words. At this point, there is no limit to the length
of each Token. In contrast, however, at the output of the
Spatial Decoder each DATA Token carries exactly 64 words
and each word is 9 bits wide.
A.3.3 Using To~en formatted data
In some applications, it may be necessary for the
circuitry that connect directly to the input or output of
the Decoder or chip set. In most cases it will be
sufficient to collect DATA Tokens and to detect a few
Tokens that provide synchronization information (such as
PICTURE_START). In this regard, see subsequent sections
A.16, "Connecting to the output of Spatial Decoder", and
A.19, "Connecting to the output of the Temporal Decoder".
As discussed above, it is sufficient to observe activity
on the extension bit to identify when each new Token
starts. Again, the extension bit signals the last word of
the current token. In addition, the Address field can be
tested to identify the Token. Unwanted or unrecognized
Tokens can be consumed (and discarded) without knowledge of
their content. However, a recoqnized token causes an
appropriate action to occur.
21~S~2~
161
Furthermore, the data input to the Spatial Decoder can
either be supplied as bytes of coded data, or in DATA
Tokens (see Section A.10, "Coded data input"). Supplying
Tokens via the coded data port or via the microprocessor
interface allows many of the features of the decoder chip
set to be configured from the data stream. This provides
an alternative to doing the configuration via the micro
processor interface.
.
2145423
162
Z 6~ 5 4 3 2 1 0 Token Name Re~erence
o o 1 QUANT_SCALE
c I o PREDICTION_MODE
O ~ 1 1 (reserved)
o o MVD_FORWARDS
I o I MVD_BACKWARDS
o o o o 1 QUANT_TABLE
o, o o o o 1 DATA
1 o o o o COMPONENT_NAME
o o o 1 DEFINE_SAMPLING
o o 1 o JPEG_TABLE_SELECT
o o 1 1 MPEG_TABLE_SELECT
o 1 o o TEMPORAL_REFERENCE
o 1 o 1 MPEG_DCH_TABLE
1 0 1 1 0 (reserved)
1 1 0 1 1 1 (reserved)
0 0 0 0 (reserved) SAVE_STATE
0 0 0 1 (reserved) RESTORE_STATE
1 1 1 o o 1 o TIME_CODE
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 (reserved)
o I o o o o o o o NULL
O O O O O O 0 1 (reserved)
O O O O O 0 1 0 (reserved)
O O O O O 0 1 1 (reserved)
o o o 1 o o o o SEQUENCE_START
O O 0 1 0 0 0 1 GROUP_START
o; o o 1 o o 1 o PICTURE_START
o, o o 1 o o 1 1 SLICE_START
o i o o 1 o 1 o o SEOUENCE_END
o o o 1 o 1 o 1 CODING_STANDARD
o o o 1 o 1 1 o PICTURE_END
o I o o 1 o 1 1 1 FLUS~i
o, o o 1 1 o o o FlLD_INFO
Table A.3.1 Summary of Tokens
21454~
163
- l'oken Narne Re~ererce
o o o 1 1 o o 1 MAX_COblP_lD
o o o 1 1 o 1 o EXTENSION_DATA
o o o 1 1 o 1 1 USER_DATA
o o o 1 1 1 o o DHT_MARKER
o o o 1 1 1 o 1 DQT_MAflKER
O O 0 1 1 1 1 0 (reserved) DNL_MARKER
O O 0 1 1 1 1 1 (reserved) DRI_MARKER
1 ¦ 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 (reserved)
0 1 0 0 ~ (reserved)
~ ! ~ 1 o ~ o ~ o (reserved)
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 (reserved)
o 1 1 0 o BIT_RATE
1 1 1 o 1 1 o 1 V8V_BUFFER_SIZE
1 1 1 o 1 1 1 o V8V_DELAY
o 1 1 1 1 PICTURE_TYPE
1 1 1 o o o o PICTURE_RATE
o o o 1 PEL_ASPECT
1 1 o o 1 o HORIZONTAL_SIZE
o o 1 1 VERTICAL_SIZE
1 1 o 1 o o 8ROKEN_CLOSED
1 1 o 1 0 1 CONSTRAINED
1 ! 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 (reserved) SPECTRAL_LIMIT
1 1 1 1 o 1 1 1 DEFINE_IIIAX_SAMPLING
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (reserved)
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 (reserved)
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 (reserverJ)
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 (reserved)
o o HORIZONTAL_MBS
o 1 VERTICAL_MBS
1 0 (reservedl
1 1 1 1 (reserved)
Table A. 3 .1 Summary of Tolcen~ (contd)
- 2145423
164
A.3.q Description of Toke~ns
This section documents the Tokens which are implemented
in the Spatial Decoder and the Temporal Decoder chips in
accordance with the present invention; see Table A.3.2.
Note:
."r" signifies bits that are currently reserved and carry
the value O
.unless indicated all integers are unsigned
- 2145423
165
E 7 6 1 5 4 3 1 2 1 0 Desc~iption
1 1 1 o 1 1 o o BIT_RATE testinloonly
1 r r r r r r b b
Carries the MPEG bit rate parameter R. Generated t~y ~e ~ultman
b b b b b b ~ b
decoder when decoding an MPEG bitstream. --~ -
O b b b b b b b b
t~ - an 19 bit integer as defined by MP'G
1 1 1 1 1 o 1 o o BROKEN_CLOSED
O r r r r r r c b
Carries two MPEG nags bits:
c - closed_gop
b broken_link
o o o 1 o 1 o 1 CODING_STANDARD
o s s s s s s s s
s - an 8 ba integer indicating the current coding standard. The
values currenny assigned are:
O- H261
1 - JPEG
, 2 - MPEG
1 1 1l o o o o c c COMPONENT_NAME
O n n n n n n n n
Communicates the ~L!Lti~,r,:,l"p bet~een a cr.-"?onent ID and the
co",po,le.,t name. See also ...
c 2 bit co" ,pone~nl ID
n - 8 bit co,.,pone ,1 'name
o 1 o 1 CONSTRAINED
o r r ~ ~ ~ r r C
c - carnes the cons~a~ne~J-parameters-na9 decoded trom an
MPEG bitstream.
Table A.3.2 Tokens implemented in the Spatial
Decoder and ~emporal Decoder (Sheet 1 of 9)
214~423
166
E 7 6 1 5 4 3 2 1 O - Descripoon
o l o o 1 c c DATA
d d 1 d d d d d d
Carries data through the decoder chip-sel.
O d d d d d d d d c-a2bilin~egerco~ on_nt ID(see A 3 5 ~ his field
is not defined ior Tokens Iha~ carry coded da~a ~ra!her ~.~an pi~el
i. ,io", .a~ion)
1 1 1 1 1 o 1 1 1 DEFINE_MAX_SAMPLING
r r r r r r h h
Max. Honzontal and Vertical sampling numbers. These descnbe
r r r r r r v v
~he maximum number oi blocks t~,o,,c~. "yh6rt;. ::y in any
co,."~on~nt oi a .,~ lvbla~. See A.3.5.2
h - 2 bit horizontal sampling number.
v - 2 bit verticai sampling number.
o o o 1 c c DEFINE_SAMPLING
r r r r r r h h
Horizontal and Verbcal sampiing numbers ior a particular colour r r r r r r v vco",t~one~,L See A.3.52
c - 2 bit CG- "pon_. ,1 ID.
h - 2 bi~ horizontal sampling number.
v - 2 bi~ ventical sampling numDer.
o o o o 1 1 1 o o DHT_MARKER
This Token iniotms the Video Demux that the DATA Token that
iollo~vs contains the s; ~ " , ol a Hu~man lable described
using the JPEG 'define Hu~man table segmenr- syntax. This Token
is only valid when the coding standard is configured as JPEG.
This Token is generated by the stan code detec:or during JPcG
decoding when a DHT marker has been encountered in the ~ata
stream.
Table A.3.2 To~en~ implemented in the Spatial
Decoder and Temporal Decoder (Sheet 2 of 9)
21~423
167
E 7 6l 5 4 3 2 1 1 0 - Description
o o o o 1 1 1 1 o DNL_MARKER
This Token informs the Video Demux tha~ the DATA Token that
lollows contains the JPEG parameter NL which specifies the
number of lines in a frame.
This Token is generated by the stan code detec~or during JPEG
decoding when a DNL marker has been encountered in the data
stream.
o o o o 1 1 1 o 1 DC~T_MARKER
This Token inlorms the Vldeo Demux that the DATA Token thal
lollows contains the ~p~ i1c : ~ o~ a quanbsabon table described
using the JPEG define quantisabon table segment syntax. This
Token is only valid when the coding standard is configured as
JPEG. The Video Demux generates a QUANT_TABLE To~en
containing the new quantisabon table i~fv~llldbon.
This Token is generated by the start code detector dunng JPEG
decoding when a DOT marker has been encountered in the data
stream.
o o o o 1 1 1 1 1 DRî_MARKER
This Token inlorms the Video Demux that the DATA Token thal
iollows contains the JPEG parameler Ri which specifies Ihe
number o~ minimum coding units between restart markers.
This Token is generated by the start code detector during JPEG
decoding when a DRI marker has Deen encountered in the Cata
stream.
Table A.3.2 Tokens implemented in the Spatial
Decoder and Temporal Decoder (Sheet 3 of 9)
21~5423
168
E 7' C ~i 4 3 2 1 0 ~ ~."~t.on
o o o 1 1 o 1 o EXTENSION_DATA JPEG
O v v v v v v v v
This Token in~orrns the video Demux that the DATA Token ha~
lollows contains extension data. See A. 11.3, Conversion ot start
codes to Tokens-, and A.14.6, ReceMng User and
Enension data,
During JPEG operabon Ihe 8 bit field ~ carries Uhe JPEG marker
value. This allows the class ot ex~ension data ~o be identified.
o o o o 1 1 o 1 o EXTENSION_DATA MPEG
This Token inlorrns the Video C~emux that the DATA Token that
~o~lows contains extension data. See A. 11.3, Conversion of stan
codes to Tokens-, and A.14.6, Receiving User and
Extension data,
1 o o o 1 1 o o o FIELD_INFO
O r r r t p ~ ~ ~
Carries i"~v ", n about the picture ~ollowing to aid its display.
This hnction is not signalled by any existing coding standard.
t i~ the picture is an interlaced irame this oit indicates i~ Uhe upper
field is first ~1=0) or second.
p . i~ pictures are fields this indicates i~ the next picture is upper
- (p-O) or lower in the ~rame.
t - a 3 bit number indicaUng position ot the field tn the 8 field PAL
uquence.
o o o o 1 o 1 1 1 FLUSH
Used to indicate the end o~ the current coded data and to push the
end o~ the data stream through the decoder.
o o o o 1 o o o 1 GROUP_START
Generated when the group o~ pictures stan code is lound w~len
decoding MPEG or the irame mar~er is ~ound when decor ing
JPEG.
Table A.3.2 Tokens implemented in the Spatial Decoder and Temporal Decoder (Sheet ~ 5f
214~4~
169
_. .~
E 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - Descnption
1 1 o o HORIZONTAL_MBS
r r r h h h h h
h a 13 bit number integer indictting the hori~onlal width ot the h h h h h h h h
picture in, . ,ac, vblv l s.
1 1 1 1 1 o 0 1 o HORIZONTAL_SIZE
h h h h h h h h
h 16 bit numbor integer indicabng the horizontal width o~ the
h h h h h h h h
picture in pixels. This can be any integer value.
1 1 1 o o 1 o c c JPEG_TABLE_SELECT
r r r r r r t t
Intorms the inverse quantiser which quantisabon table to use on
the specified colour cu~vvro~L
c 2 bit cv,.,~onc.lI ID ~see A.3.5.1
t - 2 bit integer table numt~er,
1 o o o 1 1 o o 1 MAX_COMP_ID
r r r r r r m m
m - 2 bit integer indicating the maximum value oi cvn.l onent ID
(see A.3.5.1 ) that will be used in the next picture.
0 1 1 o 1 o 1 c c MPEG_DCH_TA8LE
r r r r r r t t
Configures which DC coetficient Hutiman table should oe used lor
colour co,.,pono~,t cc.
c - 2 bit co,,,~ùncr,t ID (see A.3.5.1
t - 2 bit integer table number,
0 1 1 0 O 1 1 d n MPEG_TABLE_SELECT
Iniorrns the inverse quantiser whe~her to use the delault or user
defined quantsation table lor intra or non-intra information.
n - O indicates intra ;n~u~ at~vn~ 1 non-intra.
d - O indicates delault table, l user defined.
Table A.3.2 Tokens implemented in the Spatial
Decoder and Temporal Decoder (Sheet 5 of 9)
21~42~
170
E 7! 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Oescription
~ o ` 1 d v v v v MVD_BACKWARDS
V V Y V V V V V
Carries one CO.,~o-.c.lt (sit~er vertical or horizontal) ol the
bacl~, ~ motion vector.
d-Oindicabsxcon~n_.,l, 1 theycon,ponen~
v -12 bit two's ~ t numoer. The LS5 provides h~l pixel
resolution,
1 0 0 d v v v v MVD_FORWARDS
V V V V V V V V
Carries one co.,."or~ht ~either verffcal or horizontal) ol the
lotwards moffon vector.
d - O indicates x ct,..~.._.,t, 1 the y cu",l,onenl
v -12 bit two's ~.o.,.,A~ t number. The LSB provices hall pixel
resolution.
0 o o o o o o o o NULL
Does no~ing.
1 1 1 1 1 o o o 1 PEL_ASPECT
r . r p p p p
p - a 4 bit int ger as defined by MPEG.
o o o 1 o 1 1 o PICTURE_END
Inserted by the start code detector to indicate the end ol the cunent .
picture.
1 1 1 1 1 o o o o PICTURE_RATE
r r r r p p p p
p - a 4 bit integer as defined by MPEG.
o o o 1 o o 1 o PICTURE_START
r r r r n n n n
Indicates ttle ssart ol a new ~icture.
n - a 4 bit picture index altocated to the picture hy the stan code
delector.
Table A.3.2 Token~ implemented in the Spatial
Decoder and Tempor~l Decoder (Sheet 6 of 9)
21~5~3
171
E 7 6 ~'5 ~ 3 2 1 o 6- ~pl,on
o 1 1 1 1 PICTURE_TYPE MPEG
O r r r r r r p p
p - a 2 bit integer indicating the picture coding type o~ the picture
that ~ollows:
O - Intra
1 Predicted
2 6i~ tonally Predicted
3 - DC Intra
o 1 1 1 1 PICTURE_TYPE H.261
1 r r r r r r O 1
Indicates various H.251 opbons are on (1) or On ~O). These opbons
O r r s d ~ q 1 1
aro ahvays o~l for MPEG and JPEG:
s - Split Screen Indicator
d Document Camera
~ Free2e Picture F~elease
Source picture lormat:
q = O - aClF
q= 1 CIF
O O 1 O h y x b I PREDICTION_MODE
A set o~ nag bits that indicate the predicbon mode tor the
ublu.l~a that tollow
- ~orward predicOon
b - baclc~rard predicbon
x - reset ~orward vec~or predictor
y reset backward vector predictor
h - enable H.261 IooD filter
0 o o 1 s s s s s QUANT_SCALE
Intorrns the inverse quantiser o~ a new scale lactor
s - S bit integer in range 1 ... 31. The value O is reserved.
Table A.3.2 Tokens implemented in the Spatial Decoder and Temporal Decoder (Sheet 7 of
214~3
1~2
_
E 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ¦ 0 Descnption
o o o o ~ t QUANT_TA3LE
1 q q q q q q qj q
Loads the specified inverse r~uantiser table With 64 8 t~it uns;gned
integers. The values are in zig-zag orden
0 q q q q q q q q
t - 2 bit integet specifying the inverse quantiser table to b~e loaded.
o o o o 1 o 1 o o SEQUENCE_END
The MPEG sequence_end_code and the JPEG EOI matker cause
this Token ~o be genera~ed.
o o o o 1 o o o o SEC~UENCE_START
Gtemera~ed by the MPEG sequence_statt stan code.
o o o 1 o o 1 1 SLICE_START
ossssssss
Co.,~por,~ to the MPEG slice_stan, the H.261 GOB and the
JPEG resync intervaJ. The ;nte ~,.at.~l;on of 6 bit integer ~s' difters
between coding standards:
MPEG - Slice Venical Position -1.
H.261 Group o~ alccks l~lumber - 1.
JPEG - res~cl,l~ interval identification (4 LSBs only).
1 1 1 o 1 o o t t TEMPORAL_REFERENCE
o t t t t t I t ~
I - carries the temporal reletence. For MPEG this is a 10 bit integer.
For H.261 only the 5 LSBs are used, the MS3s will always be zero~
1 0 0 1 0 d TIME_CODE
r r r h h h h h
The MPEG time_code
1 r r m m m m m m
d - Drop Irame nag
r r s s s s s s
0 ~ h 5 bit integer specifying hours
m - 6 bit integer specifying minutes
s 6 bit integer specifying seconds
p - 6 t~it integer specifying pictures
Table A.3.2 Tokens imp~emented in the Spatial Decoder and Temporal Decooer (Sheet 8 of
214~4~3
173
E 7 6 I S ¦ 4 1 3 2 1, O Description
o o I o i 1 1 1 o ~, 1 USER_DATA JPEG
V V V V V V V V
This Token informs the v'ideo Demux that tthe DATA Token tha~
follows contains user data. See A.11.3, Conversicn of start coCes
to Tokens-, and A.14.6, 'Receivlng User and
Extension data',
During JPEG operation the 8 bit field ~ carr;es the JP--G marker
value. This allows the class of user data to be identified.
O O O O i 1 1 0 1 1 USER_DATA MPEG
This Token informs the Video Demux that the DATA Token that
follows contains user data. See A. 11.3, `Conversion of s;art codes
to Tokens-, and A. 14.6, 'Receiving User and
Extension data-,
o 1 1 o 1 VBV_BUFFER_SIZE
r 1' r r r r r s s
s a 10 bit integer as defined by MPEG.
O sj s s s s s s s
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 o VBV_DELAY
b I b b b b b b b
b - a 16 bit integer as defined by MPEG.
G b b b b b b b b
1 1 1 1 j 1 1 1 o 1 VERTICAL_MBS
r r r V V V V V
v - a 13 bn integer indicating the vertical size o~ the picture in
O v v v v v v v v
" ,ar,. ublo.,~.
o o 1 1 VERTICAL_SIZE
V V V I V V V V V
v a 16 bit integer indicating the vertical size of the picture in ~ix~!s.
O vj v vj V v v v v
This can be any integer value.
Table A.3.2 Tokens implemented in the Spatial
Decoder and Temporal Decoder ~Sheet 9 of 9)
21~5423
174
A.3.5 ~um~bPrs 3ignalle~ i~ Tokens
.3.5.1 ~o~po~e~t I~entifica~ion nu~ber
In accordance with the present invention, the Component
ID number is a 2 bit integer specifying a color component.
This 2 bit field is typically located as part of the Header
in the DATA Token. With MPEG and H.261 the relationship is
set forth in Table A.3.3.
Component ID - M~EG or H.261 colow co""~or,en~ '
O Luminanc~ (Yl
Blue dinerence signal (Cb / U)
2 Red dinerence signal (Cr / V)
3 Never used
Tabl- A.3.3 Component ID for HPEG and ~.261
2145~23
175
With JPEG the situation i6 more complex as JPEG does not
limit the color components that can be used. The decoder
chips permit up to 4 different color components in each
scan. The IDs are allocated sequentially as the
specification of color components arrive at the decoder.
A.3.5.2 ~orizo~tsl a~d Vortic~l sampling number~
For each of the 4 color components, there is a
specification for the number of blocks arranged
horizontally and vertically in a macroblock. This
specification comprises a two bit integer which is one less
than the number of blocks.
For example, in MPEG (or H.261) with 4:2:0 chroma
sampling (Figure 36) and component IDs allocated as per
Table A.3.4.
Honzonlal Venlcal
Component IDsampling ~Idth in blocks sampling Height in blocks
number number
O 1 2 1 2
0 1 0
2 0 1 0
3 NotuseaNotused NotusedNot used
Tablo A.3.4 ~ampling numbors for 4:2:0/MPEG
21~5~23
176
With JPEG and 4:2:2 chroma sampling (allocation of
component to component ID will vary between applications.
See A.3.5.1. Note: JPEG requires a 2:1:1 structure for its
macroblocks when processing 4:2:2 data. See Table A.3.5.
Honzontal Vertlcal
ccmDcrent 1~ sampling Wi~ n ~locks samDling He!g~t ~n ~loc.~s
num~er num~er
Y 1 2 0
U 0 1 ¦ O
V 0 1 1 0
Table A.3.5 8ampling numb-rs for 4:2:2 JPEG
21i~423
177
A.3.6 Sp~ial Token formats
In accordance with the present invention, tokens such as
the DATA Token and the QUANT_TABLE Token are used in their
"extended form" within the decoder chip-set. In the
extended form the Token includes some data. In the case of
DATA Tokens, they can contain coded data or pixel data. In
the case of QUANT_TABLE tokens, they contain quantizer
table information.
Furthermore, "non-extended form" of these Tokens is
defined in the present invention as "empty". This Token
format provides a place in the Token stream that can be
subsequently filled by an extended version of the same
Token. This format is mainly applicable to encoders and,
therefore, it is not documented further here.
Td~an Name MPEG JPEG H261
BIT_RATE
BROKEN_CLOSED
CODING_STANDARD
COMPONENT_NAME
CONSTRAINED
DATA
DEFINE_MAX_SAMPLING
DEFINE_SAMPLING
DRT_MARKER
DNL_MARKER
DaT_MARKER
DFll_lUARKER
Table A.3.6 tokens for different standards
2145~3
178
Token NameMPFGJpEG H261
EXTENSION_DATA
FIELD_INFO
FLUSH J ~ J
GROUP_START
HORIZONTAL_MBS J
HORIZONTAL_SIZE
JPEG TABLE_SELECT
MAX_COMP_ID
MPEG_DCH_TABLE
MPEG_TABLE_SELECT
MVD_BACKWARDS
MVD_FORWARDS
NULL J
PEL_ASPECT
PICTURE_END
PICTURE_RATE
PICTURE_START ~ J J
PICTURE_TYPE J ~ J
PREDICTION_MODE ~ ~ J
QUANT_SCALE J
QUANT_TABLE J
SEQUENCE_END ~ ~
SEQUENCE_START ~ ~ J
SLICE_START
TEMPORAL_REFERENCE J
TIME_CODE
USER_DATA
VBV_BUFFER_SIZE
VBV_DELAY
VERTICAL_MBS J
VEPITICAL_SIZE
Table A.3.6 Tokens for dirr~renl standards (contd)
214S423
179
A.3.7 Use of Tokens for different stan~rd~
Each standard uses a different sub-set of the defined
Tokens in accordance with the present invention; ss Table
A.3.6.
2145423
180
SECTION A.4 The two wire interfac~
A.4.1 Two-wir~ int~rfac~s and t~ Token Port
A simple two-wire valid/accept protocol is used at all
levels in the chip-set to control the flow of information.
Data is only transferred between blocks when both the
sender and receiver are observed to be ready when the clock
rises.
l)Data transfer
2)Receiver not ready
3)Sender not ready
If the sender is not ready (as in 3 Sender not ready
above) the input of the receiver must wait. If the
receiver is not ready (as in 2 Receiver not ready above)
the sender will continue to present the same data on its
output until it is accepted by the receiver.
When Token information is transferred between blocks the
two-wire interface between the blocks is referred to as a
Token Port.
~.4.2 ~h2r~ used
The decoder chip-set, in accordance with the present
invention, uses two-wire interfaces to connect the three
chips. In addition, the coded data input to the Spatial
Decoder is also a two-wire interface.
~.4.3 Bus sign~l~
The width of the data word transferred by the two-wire
interface varies depending upon the needs of the interface
concerned (See Figure 35, ~Tokens on interfaces wider than
8 bits". For example, 12 bit coefficients are input to the
Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform (IDCT), but only 9 bits
are output.
2145~23
18
Inl-~aCe Oa~a WICt~ (bn
Coaea ~ata InDu~ tc SD~W Docod-r a
OLtDUt con o~ SUDL O-COd-r g
InDut port o~ ,emDor~l D-coa-r 9
OutDut Dort o~ TemDor~l D~coa~r a
nDut pon o~ Im~ge Fomuner a
Tabl- A.~.l Two wir- interfac~ data width
In addition to the data signals there are three other
signals transmitted via the two-wire interface:
.valid
.accept
.extension
A.4.3.1 The ~Yt~nsion signal
The extension signal corresponds to the Token extension
bit previously described.
A.4.~ DQ ign consid~rations
The two wire interface is intended for short range,
point to point communication between chips.
The decoder chips should be placed adjacent to each
other, so as to minimize the length of the PCB tracks
1~ between chips. Where possible, track lengths should be
kept below 25 mm. The PCB track capacitance should be kept
to a mlnimUm.
2145~23
182
The clock di~tribution should be designed to minimize
the clock slew between chips. If there i~ any clock slew,
it should be arranged ~o that '~receiving chips" see the
clock before "sending chips".~
All chips communicating via two wire interfaces should
operate from the same digital power supply.
A.~.S I~terfac~ timing
30 MH~ Note~
Num. Characteristie Unit
Min.Max. 2
InDut sisnal set-up time S ns
Input 519nal hold time O ns
3 Output signal drive 3me 23 ns
OUtDut slgn~ ~olo 3me 2 ns
T~ble A.4.2 T~o wire interf2ce timing
a. Figures in Table A.4.2 may vary in accordance with
design variations
b. Maximum signal loading is approximately 20 pF
' Note: Figure 38 shows the two-wire interface between the
system de-mux chip and the coded data port of the Spatial
Decoder operating from the main decoder clock. This is
optional as this two wire interface can work from the coded
data clock which can be asynchronous to the decoder clock.
See Section A.10.5, "Coded data clock". Similarly the display
interface of the Image Formatter can operate from a clock that
is asynchronous to the main decoder clock.
21~5423
-
183
A.4.6- Signal lev-l-
The two-wire interface uses CMOS inputs and output.
V~Hm,n is approx. 70~ of V~D and V~Lm,~ is approx. 30% of VD~.
The values shown in Table A.4.3 are those for V~H and V~, at
their respective worst case V~D. Vi~D=5 . 0+0 . 25V.
Symt~ol ~Y~mot~- Min. Max. UnlLS
V~ Inoutloglc 1 vaug~ 3.60 VOO~O.S ! V
-VIL Inoutlogic O v~g~ GNO C.S 1.43 I V
VO~ Out~ut loglc ~ 1 vo~t~S- V~O o. t
VOO ~ 0.4 I V '
VOL OUtDUt l091C O VOIUS4 1 V '
0.4 `/~ ;
Incutlo-~g- curront : 10 ~A
Tabl- A.~.3 DC electrical c~aract-risttic~
a. 1OH< lmA
b. 1OH< 4mA
c. lo,<lmA
d. lo~<4mA
2145423
-
184
A.~.7 Control clock
In general, the clock controlling the transfers across
the two wire interface is the chip's decoder_clock. The
exception is the coded data port input to the Spatial
Decoder. This is controlled by coded clock. The clock
signals are further described herein.
`_ 2145423
185
SECT~ON A.~ DRAM Interface
A.5.1 ~h- DRAM int-rfac-
A single high performance, configurable, DRAM interface
is used on each of the video decoder chips. In general,
the DRAM interface on each chip is substantially the same;
however, the interfaces differ from one another in how they
handle channel priorities. The interface is designed to
directly drive the DRAM used by each of the decoder chips.
Typically, no external logic, buffers or components will be
necessary to connect the DRAM interface to the DRAMs in
most systems.
A.5.2 Int~rface ~ignal~
Inpul /
Sign~ Nu~ r~ ; .
OUtDut
DRAM_dau~31 01 UO The 32 bil wlde ORAM daat bus Optlonally tms 0us
n b- configw d to be 16 or 8 bits wide See
s ction A S 8
DRAM_acdr~10 01 0 The 22 bitwid- ORAM interbce ardctress Is tlme
multiote~r d ovu this 11 bit wide bus
O The ORAM Row Ad~re~ Strob~ signal
~3 01 O The DRAM CoiumnArtdress Slrooe slSinal One
signal is Drovided p r byte ot tne intertace s data
bus All ttle ~ signals are driven simu~laneou51y
WE o The ORAM Wn~e Enabte signal
~5E O Tha DRAM Outout En bb slgral
DRAM_-na~le I This input sign-l when low m~ s all the OUtpUI
si~nals on the intartace go high npad~ -e
Note on chip data ~ ~ ls nor S oop d wnen
~ne DRAM interiace is high ime r unce So errcrs
will occur i~ t~e cnip anemots to access - RAM wr ie
DRAM_enat~le is low
Table A.5.1 DRAM int~r~..ee sitanals
2145423
186
In a~cordance with the present invention, the interface
is configurable in two ways:
.The detail timing of the interface can be
configured to accommodate a variety of
different DRAM types
.The "width" of the DRAM interface can be
configured to provide a cost/performance
trade-off in different applications.
A.5.3 Configuring th- DRAM int-rf~c-
Generally, there are three groups of registers
associated with the DRAM interface: interface timing
configuration registers, interface bus configuration
registers and refresh configuration registers. The refresh
configuration registers (registers in Table A.5.4) should
be configured last.
A.5.3.1 Conditions ~ft-r res-t
After reset, the DRAM interface, in accordance with the
present invention, starts operation with a set of default
timing parameters (that correspond to the slowest mode of
operation). Initially, the DRAM interface will continually
execute refresh cycles (excluding all other transfers).
This will continue until a value is written into
refresh_interval. The DRAM interface will then be able to
perform other types of transfer between refresh cycles.
A.5.3.2 Bus configuration
Bus configuration (registers in Table A.5.3) should only
be done when no data transfers are being attempted by the
interface. The interface is placed in this condition
immediately after reset, and before a value is written into
refresh interval. The interface can be re-configured
later, if required, only when no transfers are being
attempted. See the Temporal Decoder chip access register
(A.1~.3.1) and the Spatial Decoder buffer manager access
register (A.13.1.1).
2145~123
187
A.5.3.~ Int-rfac- timing configuration
In accordance with the present invention, modifications
to the interface timing configuration information are
controlled by the interface timing access register.
Writing 1 to this register allows the interface timing
registers (in Table A.5.2) to be modified. While
interface_timing access = 1, the DRAM interface continues
operation with its previous configuration. After writing
1, the user should wait until 1 can be read back from the
interface_timing access before writing to any of the
interface timing registers.
When configuration is compete, 0 should be written to
the interface timing access. The new configuration will
then be transferred to the DRAM interface.
a. s . 3.4 R-fr-sh configuration
The refresh interval of the DRAM interface of the
present invention can only be configured once following
reset. Until refresh interval is configured, the interface
continually executes refresh cycles. This prevents any
other data transfers. Data transfers can start after a
value is written to refresh interval.
As is well known in the art, DRAMs typically require a
"pause" of between 100 ~s and 500 ~s after power is first
applied, followed by a number of refresh cycles before
normal operation is possible. Accordingly, these DRAM
start-up requirements should be satisfied before writing a
value to refresh interval.
A.5.3.5 R-ad acc-ss to configuration r-gist-rs
All the DRAM interface registers of the present
invention can be read at any time.
A.5.4 Interface timing (tic~s)
21~423
188
The-~RA~ interface timing is derived from a Clock which
is running at four times the input Clock rate of the device
(decoder clock). This clock is generated by an on-chip
PLL.
For brevity, periods of this high speed clock are
referred to as tic~s.
21~t5~23
189
A. 5. 5 Interface registtersi
Reçlster name ~O n Descr~tlon
rn o
intertace_timing_access l O Thls (uncuon enaCIe res~s er a bws ac:ess ro
Cll ;he OR~U mtertace umlng ccnfi5u a icn
registers The configurauon reSIs;e s shoulC rct
rw Ce modified while this reglster holCs the value
0 Wriung a one to this tegister recues~s access
to modiiy the configuration r gls crs At er a 0
has been wnn~n to this regi5ter uh- CRA,~1
Intertace witt st;trt to us~ th- new vabes In tne
timing configwabon r~jiSters
page_surt_lengtn 5 0 Speclfies the t-ngtn o~ the ccess s;art in ;icks
Cit The minimum v-lu- that can be uses is:
(meaning 4 tiClu) O seiects the mia~lmum
rw l~ngth ot 32 Dcks
transter_eycte_lengtt~ 4 0 Sp cifi s the t-ngtn oZ ~e last paSe reaC or
t~it write cycle in ticks The minlmum value ;hat ciar
C- used is 4 (m-an,ng 4 LckS) O selecS he
~w miaximum length ol 16 Lcks
r-~r-sn-cyc~ en9th 4 0 Specifi s the bng~n ot tne r~treSn eycle In uci~s
Dlt The minimum value tha~ can Ce Lse~ IS 1
(mean~ng 4 tlck5). 0 selecs ~e ma~lmum
~w lençth ol 16 ticks
RAS_tatling 4 O Speclfies the numoer o~ iiCkS attem~ne s;art ot
Clt the acc-~ss start tnat Fl~alls The mlni--um
vaiue tnat can Ce LSeri ,s ~ (meiLn~rS ~ Icks
~v selecs ine ma Imum len5 h ol 5 ::ks
C~S_lalling ' ~ ' S ~ Spec fies L~e numDer cl uc~i a' er ~e s a~ ol ia
' Dl~ ~eaC :yele ~vrlle^y^!eor ac;~sss~a- -a
(al!s The mln mum val_e t~a! :ar~ t~e ~secl s
(mear r5 ~ tlc~l G se ec s -e ~ e~~^
oF S ~ic~i
Tat~le A _ ~ Inter'acetlm~ng confjguration eg!ste!s
2145423
-
190
Reglsler nam- ~ _ D
DRAM_sau_wiatn 2 0 Sp c~fi s tn numoeroibit!tus a on ~ne DRAM I
bn in~ertacedUabuS DRAM-aaul31 0~ See
A56
rw
row_~aarcss_DiU 2 0 So clfi-s th- numo r ol bits us d ior ale row
bit adCress portion ol th- DR~M in~ertac~ ~CCress
buS S e A 5 1 0
r~
DRAM_cnaole 1 1 WriDng the v~u- O in to tnis reglster iorces ~e
bit DRAM int rt c- into high ~ ~ state
O ~rill b- r d Irom Ihis tegiss-r it eitl~e sne
rw DRAM_ n-~h ~1 Is low or 0 h~s b en
wrrtt n to th- r gist
CAS_str-ngtn 3 6 T~ sn - biS r-giss rs configure C~e outout
RAS_ssr-ngt~ bit drrv- ssr-ngtn o~ DRAM int r~ace signLs
adar_strengtn
rhis allows tn int ~c- to b configur d hr
DRAM saU_str ngtn
rw vuious ditl r nt lo~
OEWE_str-ngtn
S-~S t3
Tabl- A.5.3 Int-rfac- bus configuration r-gistors
211~q~
191
A.5.6 ~nt-rfac- op-ration
The DRAM interface uses fast page mode. Three different
types of access are supported:
.Read
.Write
.Refresh
Each read or write access transfers a burst of 1 to 64
bytes to a single DRAM page address. Read and write
transfers are not mixed within a single access and each
lo successive access is treated as a random access to a new
DRAM page.
Re51st r narrl ~ C C ~ I ~
r-ires~n_int-rvU 6 O ~his value sp~lh5 tn- mterval De~een
bit relresh cycl~s in p-riods ol 16 d-coder_cloclc
cycl Valu in tn- range 1 25i can ~e
rvv configured rhe valw O i5 automaDl~y loace5
an-r r~t und ~o~C-s the DRAM ir~er aCe o
conOnuously e~ecute retre5h cycl~sntll a va l~
r-fr sh inl-rval i5 configured It s
b oWe~ th~t r~r~sh_int-rv~l shc~
configur C on~y orco arter ach resec
no_r~lrtsh 1 0 Writing rh~ vUu~ ~ to this re9iSter ~ever!s
Dit e~ cution ol any rdr-sh cycl s
rw
Tabl- A.5.4 R-fr-sh configuration r-gist-rs
- 2145423
192
A.5.7 Acc-ss structure
Each access is composed of two parts:
.Access start
.Data transfer
In the present invention, each access begins with an
access start and is followed by one or more data transfer
cycles. In addition, there is a read, write and refresh
variant of both the access start and the data transfer
cycle.
Upon completion of the last data transfer for a
particular access, the interface enters its default state
(see A.5.7.3) and remains in this state until a new access
is ready to begin. If a new access is ready to
2145~23
193
begin when the last access has finished, then the new
access will begin immediately.
A.5.7.1 Acc-ss st~rt
The access start provides the page address for the read
or write transfers and establishes some initial signal
conditions. In accordance with the present invention,
there are three different access starts:
.Start of read
.Start of write
.Start of refresh
Nurn Cn-_ 'r l~b~ MinM~X Unlt Notes
~prtc~Ygcp~riods tOyrs9~st r ' '6 tlC~
RAS_~slling
6 ~CCsss SlUt tunDon s t ~y rCglSSsr 4 32
p~gs_st rt_lcngth
W pr ChUgC longth s-l Dy rogiStor 1 ' 6
CAS_hlllng
8 F~stD~9sro~rJorwnt cyclol ngt~s tDy 4 16
tno rCgiStcr tnnshr_cyc~o_l-ngth
9 ~ tr-sn cycls I ngth #t Dy th- rogi51sr r~ 16
rc~r-~h_cycls
Table A.5.5 DRAM ~nt-rfac- timing p~ram-t-rs
a. Thls value must be less than RAS falling to ensure
~ before RAS refresh occurs.
- 214S423
194
In each case, the timing of RAS and the row address is
controlled by the regi~ters RAS falling and
page start length. The state of OE and DRAM data[31:0] is
held from the end of the previous data transfer until **RAS
falls. The three different access start types only vary in
how they drive OE and DRAM data~31:0] when RAS falls. See
Figure 43.
A.S.7.2 D~t~ transfer
In the present invention, there are different types of
data transfer cycles:
.Fast page read cycle
.Fast page late write cycle
.Refresh cycle
A start of refresh can only be followed by a single
refresh cycle. A start of read (or write) can be followed
by one or more fast page read (or write) cycles. At the
start of the read cycle CAS is driven high and the new
column address is driven.
Furthermore, an early write cycle is used. WE is driven
low at the start of the first write transfer and remains
low until the end of the last write transfer. The output
data is driven with the address.
As a CAS before RAS refresh cycle is initiated by the
start of refresh cycle, there is no interface signal
activity during the refresh cycle. The purpose of the
refresh cycle is to meet the minimum RAS low period
required by the DRAM.
A.S.7.3 Interface d-fault state
The interface signals in the present invention enter a
default state at the end of an access:
RAS, CAS and WE high
~data and OE remain in their previous state
.addr remains stable
A.5.8 Data bus width
214S~23
195
The ~wo bit register, DRAM_data_width, allows the width
of the DRAM interface~s data path to be configured. This
allows the DRAM cost to be minimized when working with
small picture formats.
DR~M_C~ta_~iCth
0- 8 bn wiC- ~au bus on DR~M_d~t~31 2~1D
16 bit wido d~t~ buS on DRAM_C t (31 161'~
2 32 bit wids d~t~ bu~ on D~AM_d~t~31 01
Table A.S.6 Conf ig~tring DRAM data width
a. Default after reset.
b. Unused signals are held high impedance.
A.5.9 row address width
The number of bits that are taken from the middle
section of the 24 bit internal address in order to provide
the row address is configured by the register,
row address bits.
row_s~CnU_DIts WiCttl ot row sCdross
10 bits on DR~M_-Cdr~9 0]
2 11 bitson ~R~t~ dCr~10 0~
Tabl- A.5.7 Conf iguring row addr-s bits
- 2145423
196
A.5.lQ Address bits
On-chip, a 24 bit address is generated. How this
address is used to form the row and column addresses
depends on the width of the data bus and the number of bits
selected for the row address. Some configurations do not
permit all the internal address bits to be used and,
therefore, produce "hidden bits)ll.
Similarly, the row address is extracted from the middle
portion of the address. Accordingly, this maximizes the
rate at which the DRAM is naturally refreshed.
rowrow 4ddr-ss
d~ ~ cdurnn dd- ss tr~r~Oon
4rJdN~tn~4tiorl
wl~intcm~ t~rnal
widthht4m41:~ 4~tcrn~1
9~ 6] 0 18:01 8[19:151 0 110:61 15:l (5;0
16[20:lSi 110:51 15 11 ~4
32[21:1sjot10:4l (5:21~[3:0
10[15:61 [9:0] 8[19:161 0 ~10:61 ~5 01 [5:0
1 6t20: t 61 0 [ 1 0:51 [5: 1 1 (4:0
32[21:161 0 110:41 [5:21 [3-:0
11t16:6l0[10:01 8[19:17j~[10:6] [50l ~[
16[20:1~1 [1O:5j 15:1 j ~ 14:0
32[21:17j 0 [10:41 ~521 ~ [3:01
Table A.5.8 ~apping betw--n int-rnal and external addresses
2145~23
197
A.5.1 1 Low order column address bits
The least significant 4 to 6 bits of the column address
are used to provide addresses for fast page mode transfers
of up to 64 bytes. The number of address bits required to
control these transfers will depend on the width of the
data bùs (see A.5.8).
A.5.10.2 D-coding row addr-~s to ~cc-s~ mor- DRAM banks
Where only a single bank of DRAM is used, the width of
the row address used will depend on the type of DRAM used.
Applications that require more memory than can be typically
provided by a single DRAM bank, can configure a wider row
address and then decode some row address bits to select a
single DRAM bank.
NOTE: The row address is extracted from the middle of
the internal address. If some bits of the row address are
decoded to select banks of DRAM, then all possible values
of these "bank select bits" must select a bank of DRAM.
Otherwise, holes will be left in the address space.
A.5.11 DRAM Interf~c- n~bl-
In the present invention, there are two ways to make allthe output signals on the DRAM interface become high
impedance, i.e., by setting the DRAM enable register and
the DRAM-enable signal. Both the register and the signal
must be at a logic l in order for the drivers on the DRAM
interface to operate. If either is low then the interface
is taken to high impedance.
Note: on-chip data processing is not terminated when
the DRAM interface is at high impedance. Therefore, errors
will occur if the chip attempts to access DRAM while the
~0 in~erface is at high impedance.
In accordance with the present invention, the ability to
~ake the DRAM interface to high impedance is provided to
allow otner devices to test or use the DRAM controlled by
tne Spatial Decoder (or the Temporal Decoder) when the
2145423
198
Spatial ~ecoder (or the Temporal Decoder) is not in use.
It is not intended to allow other devlces to share the
memory during normal operation.
A.5.12 Refrffsh
Unless disabled by writing to the register, no_refresh,
the DRAM interface will automatically refresh the DRAM
using a~~S before R~ refresh cycle at an interval
determined by the register, refresh interval.
The value in refresh interval specifies the interval
between refresh cycles in periods of 16 decoder_clock
cycles. Values in the range 1.255 can be configured. The
value 0 is automatically loaded after reset and forces the
DRAM interface to continuously execute refresh cycles (once
enabled) until a valid refresh interval is configured. It
is recommended that refresh_interval should be configured
only once after each reset.
While resel is asserted, the DRAM interface is unable to
refresh the DRAM. However, the reset time required by the
decoder chips is sufficiently short, so that it should be
possible to reset them and then to re-configure the DRAM
interface before the DRAM contents decay.
A.5.13 Sign~l strengths
The drlve strength of the outputs of the DRAM interface
can be configured by the user using the 3 bit registers,
CAS_strength, RAS_strength, addr_strength,
DRAM_data_strength, and OEWE_strength. The MSB of this 3
bit value selects either a fast or slow edge rate. The two
less significant bits configure the output for different
load capacitances.
The default strength after reset is 6 and this
configures the outputs to take approximately lOns to drive
a signal between GND and VDD if loaded with 24pF.
2145~23
199
stren5~h V~lUe Onv- Cll~r~-,llnSlh.5
O ApDroI~ 4 ns~V into 6 pl b~d
Aopro~. 4 ns/V into 12 o~ lo~d
2 Appro~. 4 nsJV into 24 p~ lo~d
3 ADDrox. 4 nsfV into U p~ lo~d
4 ADproL 2 nstV into 6 p~ b~d
S APPrOL 2 ns~V into 12 p~ lo~d
6- Appro~ 2 nstV into 24 p~ lo-d
7 ~PDroL 2 n~/V into 8 D~ b~d
Tabl- A.5.9 Output strength configurstion~
a. Default after reset
When an output is configured appropriately for the load
it is driving, it will meet the AC electrical
characteristics specified in Tables A.5.13 to A.5.16. When
appropriately configured, each output is approximately
matched to its load and, therefore, minimal overshoot will
occur after a signal transition.
A.5.14 Electrical spocifications
All information provided in this section is merely
illustrative of one embodiment of the present invention and
is included by example and not necessarily by way of
limitation.
21~54~
200
SymOol Pararn lor Min. M~. Un~ts
Voo SUpO~y vol~g~ ttlv- ~0 GNc) 0.5 6.5 V
V~N InDu~von~ge on ~ny D~n GND 0 5 V0O ~ 5 V
T~ ODerUIn9 t~mW~tUrS 10 ~85 _
TS SlOra9e lemt#ratW~ 55 ~150 C
Tabl~ A.S.10 Maxi~um Rating--
Table A.S.10 sets forth maximum ratings for the
illustrative embodiment only. For this particular
embodiment stresses below those listed in this table should
be used to ensure reliability of operation.
Symt~ol Pu~rn Isr Min. Ma~. Units
V0O SupDly volt~gc rH~trvc to GND ~.7S 5.25 V
GN0 Ground 0 0 v
V~ Inputlogic 1 voltago 2.0 V00Ø5 V
Vl~ InDutlogic O volt~gs GN0 0.5 0.8 V
T~ O~o r~Dng tomooratur~ 0 70 C-
~able A.5.11 DC operating conditions
a. With TBA linear ftlmin transverse airflow
21~5~23
201
SymDol Param-~er Min. ~ M~. Units
VOL Output~oglc 0'volt~ge 1 0 4 v'
VO~ ~ Output logic '1 ' volt~ge 2 9 V
o Outputcurr nt ~100
2 OutDut ott stU- l~oe current ~ 20 I~A
112 Input l-sk~g- current ~ 10 ~
1~o RMS Dower suVoly curr-n~ 500 mA
CIN Input~ nc- S pF
COUT OUIDUt / 10 ,,~p_Il.nce S pF
Table A.5.~2 DC Electric~l oh2r~cteristics
a. AC parameters are specified using VO~ = O.8V
as the measurement level.
b. This is the steady state drive capability of
the interface.
Transient currents may be much greater.
21~5423
202
A.5.14.1 AC characteristics
Num. Parameter Min. M~.Unl( Nole
Cycle tlme -2 ~2 ns
I l Cycle om- -2 ~2 ns
l2 high pulS- ~2 ns
l3 Low Duls~ 2 ns
Il Cyd~ tim~ -2 ~2 nS
Table A.5.13 Differences fro~ no~inal v~lu~tt for ~ ~trob~
a. As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in
the art, the driver strength of the signal must be
5configured appropriately for its load.
Num. Pu~ler Min.M~x.Uni~ Note
l 5 Strob to str~t~e d~l~y 3 ~3 ns
l 6 Low ~old time 13 ~3 ns
17 Strot~e to strot~e practl-rge e.9. tCRP 9 ~3 ns
tRCS tRCH IRRHMRPC
~Pr~r9- puls- ~tw -n ~ny two -5 :2 r~
sign~ on wid- DRAMs e.9. tCP. O~
~twoen W~ rising anr~ lling e.g.
tRPC
l8 Pr~ rg~ t~or~ 12 ~3 ~5
Table A.5.14 Diff-r-nc-s from nomin~l
values b-tw~n two strob-s
a. The driver strength of the two signals must be
configured appropriately for their loads.
2145~2~
203
Num Parameter - Min. Ma~u Unlt No~e~
l9 set up om ~12 3 ns
~old om 12 ~3 rS
21 Aaaress acoess tlme 12 ~3 ns
22 Ne~t v~lid ~tte~ st~ot~e12 ~3 n5
T~ble A.5.15 Differ~nc~e~ fro~ nominal
b-tween a bus and strobe
a. The driver strength of the bus and the strobe must
be configured appropriately for their loads.
Num Patameter Min. Ma~t. Urit Note
23 Read cata s t up om~ ore C ~Si slgnal O .. s
statls to nse
24 R aa dU~ hold bme aner ~ slgnal O r5
st~Qs to 9o hi9h
Tabl- A.5.16 Differenc-s from nominal
b-tw-t~n ~ bu~ ~n~ ~ ~trob-
~ hen reading from DRAM, the DRAM interface samples
DRAM_data~31:0] as the ~ signals rise.
214542~
204
p~t~rn~r D run-l t v r~t"
nrtm- numD-r n~me numD-r n, m- numt~r
IPC lOtRSH lCIRHCP 18
tCPRH
tRC l 1 tCSH t,ASR 19
IRP 12 tRWL tASC
tCP tCWL tC)S
tCPN tRAC tRAH 20
RAS 13 tOACllOE tCAH
ICAs tCHR tDH
tCAC tCRP 17 tAR
tWP tRCS tAA 21
IRAsp lRCH If~L
tRASC tRRH IR~O 22
tACPttCPA 14 tRPC
IRCQ 15 tCP
tCSR IRPC
Tabl- A 5 17 Cro~-r-f-r-nc- b-tw~-n '~t~nd~rd~ DRAM
param~t-r n~m-~ ~nd timing par~m-t-r numb-r~
2 145423
205
SECTION A.6 Microprocessor interface (MPI)
A standard byte wide microprocessor interface (MPI) is
used on all chips in the video decoder chip-set. However,
one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that
microprocessor interfaces of other widths may also be used.
The MPI operates synchronously to various decoder chip
clocks.
A.6.1 MPI sign-ls
Input I
Signai Name r--, i. .
OUtDUt
enaOle(1 0I Incut Two active low chip en Di-s ~oln musl De low to
enaDle accesses via the MPI
~w Inpu~ High indicates thal a device ~shes to r~ad values
~rom the video cnip
Thrs signai Shouid be staDI- wtule the !~iC is
enabl d
arCor~n OI Inoul ACCt ss sp ofi-s one ot 2" locUIons in ~ne cni~ s
m-mor~r maD
~his signal should D~ St~bl~ vrhile Ihe c `~C is
enaDled
rtat~[7 0] Outcut ~ bit ~de cata 1/0 port rneSe C~ns ar- n,gn
c 1 ~ it ~ith-r ~naDI~ 5j9n~1 is hiS~
jrq OUtPUt An actJve Iow op-n coll ctor interruct reque~st
signai.
Table A.6.1 MPI int-rfac- signals
21~5423
206
A.6.2 MPI el-ctrical sip-cificationsi
Sym~ol Para~m-ler Min Max Unlts
V~O Supply vdtag- r-l~tive to GND -O S 6 5 V
V,~ Inoutvonageon any pm GND O S VOO O 5 V
, ~ Operanng temperature 40 ~ôS 'C
s S~orage ~emperature S; ~lSO C
Table A.6.2 Abtolute MaYimu~ R~tings'
Symt~ol P~run-tet Min M~x Umts
V~C SuPPlY voit~g~ r~l~trr~ to GNO '~,~5 525 V
GNO Groun~t O O V
V ~ Input logic ~1' voitage 2 0 VOO . O S V '
Vl~ Input logic 'O' vdt~ge GNO - O S O S V 1-1
~~ Operuing t mp r~ture O 70 C~
Tabl- A.6.3 DC Operating conditionti
a. AC input parameters are measured at a 1.4V
s measurement level.
b. with TBA linear ft/min transverse airflow.
2145~23
207
Symool Futuncl-t Min MUt Units
VOL OUtPUt l091C C volt~g-- 0 4 V
Vo x Op-n coll ctor outDut loglc '0' 0 4 V
volta9~
OUtDUt l091C '1' v0114g- 2 4 V
lo OutDulcurr nl ~ lX
cOc Op n coll ctoroutDut curr nt 4 0 ~ 0 mA
02 OUtPUt oll ~l- b-lU9- curron~ : 20 ~4
I!N Inputl-~g-curr-nt :10 ~A
1~ RMS ~owor~upplycurrcnt 500
C ~ Inpul ~ 5 5F
CO~'T OUtDUt / IO ~D~ c 5 D'
T~bl~ A.6.4 DC El-ctrical ch~ract-ristics
a. lo<lo~m~
b. This is the steady state drive capability of
the interface. Transient currents may be
much greater.
c. When asserted the open collector ~ output
pulls down with an impedance of 1oon or less.
2I45~23
`
208
A.6.2.1 AC characteristics
Notes
Num. Charact~rlst~ Min. Ma~t Unlt
Ena~le low ocnoc 100 ns
26 Enaols hlsh p~riod 50 ¦ns
27 Address or rw sot-uD tO chlp ~naDi~ O ns
28 Addr~ss or r~ hold from chlo cisaDle O ns
29 OutDut turn-on time 20 ns
~oa~ data acesss tim~ 70 ns t~
31 R~ac aata hOld oms S ns
32 Road C~ta turn-oti ~m~ 20
Table A.6.5 ~icroproc-ssor int-rfac- r-ad timing
a. The choice, in this example, of ena~le[0]
to start the cycle and enable[1] to end it
is arbitrary. These signal are of equal
status.
b. The access time is specified for a maximum
load of 50 vF on each of the data[7.0].
Larger loads may increase the access time.
Num. Ch~ ,1. Min. Ma~. ¦ Unit Not5s
33 Wnt ~at~ set-uo tlms 15 nS
3~ Wnt~ aat~ lO~ t~mo O ns
Table A.6.6 Microproc-ssor int-rfac- writ- timing
a. The choice, in this example, of ena~le[0
to start the cycle and enale!l~ to end
it is arbitrary. These signal are of equal
status.
~ ~145~3
209
A.6.3 Int-rrupts
In accordance with the present invention, "event" is the
term used to describe an on-chip condition that a user
might want to observe. An event can indicate an error or
lt can be informative to the user's software.
There are two single bit registers associated with each
interrupt or "event". These are the condition event
register and the condition m~sk reqister.
A.6.3.1 condition vent r-gist-r
The condition event register is a one bit read/write
register whose value is set to one by a condition occurring
within the circuit. The register is set to one even if the
condition was merely transient and has now gone away. The
register is then guaranteed to remain set to one until the
user's software resets it (or the entire chip is reset).
The register is set to zero by writing the
value one
writing zero to the register leaves the register
unaltered.
The register must be set to zero by user
software
before another occurrence of this condition can
be observed.
The register will be reset to zero on reset.
A.6.3.2 Condition mn~ r-gi~t-r
The condition mask register is one bit read/write
register which enables the generation of an interrupt
request if the corresponding condition event register(s)
is(are) set. If the condition event is already set when 1
30 lS written to the condition mask register, an interrupt
request will be issued immediately.
The value 1 enables interrupts.
The register clears to zero on reset.
~nless stated otherwise a block will stop operation
21~5423
210
after ~e~erating an interrupt request and will re-start
operation after either the condition event or the condition
mask register is cleared.
A.6.3.3 Event and m~sk bits
Event bits and mask bits are always grouped into
corresponding bit positions in consecutive bytes in the
memory map (see Table A.9.6 and Table A.17.6). This allows
interrupt service software to use the value read from the
mask registers as a mask for the value in the event
registers to identify which event generated the interrupt.
A.6.3.4 T~e chip event and m~k
Each chip has a single "global" event bit that
summarizes the event activity on the chip. The chip event
register presents the OR of all the on-chip events that
have 1 in their mask bit.
A 1 in the chip mask bit allows the chip to generate
interrupts. A 0 in the chip mask bit prevents any on-chip
events from generating interrupt requests.
Writing l to 0 to the chip event has no effect. It will
only clear when all the events (enabled by a l in their
mask bit) have been cleared.
A.6.3.5 Th- irq signal
The irq signal is asserted if both the chip event bit
and the chip event mask are set.
2~ The irq signal is an active low, "open collector" output
which requires an off-chip pull-up resistor. When active
the irq output is pulled down by an impedance of loon or
less.
I will be appreciated that pull-up resistor of
approximately 4kn should be suitable for most applications.
A.6.4 Accessing r-gister~
A.6.4.1 Stopping circuits to n~ble acc-ss
In the present invention, most registers can only
- 214~423
211
modified if th- block with which they are Associated is
stopped. Therefore, groups of registers will normally be
associated with an ~ccess register.
The value O in an access register indicates that the
group of registers a6sociated with that access register
should not be modified. Writing 1 to an access register
requests that a block be stopped. However, the block may
not stop immediately and block's access register will hold
the value O until it is stopped.
Accordingly, user software should wait (after writing 1
to request access) until 1 is read from the access
register. If the user writes a value to a configuration
register while its access register is set to 0, the results
are undefined.
A.6.~.2 Rogi~t~r- holding intqg~r-
The least significant bit of any byte in the memory mapis that associated with the signal data[O].
Registers that hold integers values greater than 8 bits
are split over either 2 or 4 consecutive byte locations in
the memory map. The byte ordering is "big endian" as shown
in Figure 55. However, no assumptions are made about the
order in which bytes are written into multi-byte
registers.
Unused bits in the memory map will return a O when read
except for unused bits in registers holding signed
integers. In this case, the most significant bit of the
register will be sign extended. For example, a 12 bit
signed register will be sign extended to fill a 16 bit
memory map location (two bytes). A 16 bit memory map
location holding a 12 bit unsigned integer will return a O
from its most significant bits.
A.6.~.3 ~yholod address location~
In the present invention, certain less fre~uently
accessed memory map locations have been placed behind
21~54~
212
"keyhol~ ~. A "keyhole" has two registers associated with
it, a keyhole address register and a keyhole data register.
The keyhole address specifies a location within an
extended address space. A read or a write operation to the
keyhole data register accesses the location specified by
the keyhole address register.
After accessing a keyhole data register the associated
keyhole address register increments. Random access within
the extended address space is only possible by writing a
new value to the keyhole address register for each access.
A chip in accordance with the present invention, may
have more than one "keyholed" memory map. There is no
interaction between the different keyholes.
A.6.5 Sp~ci~l regi~ters
A.6.5.1 Unus~d r~gistarQ
Registers or bits described as "not used" are locations
in the memory map that have not been used in the current
implementation of the device. In general, the value O can
be read from these locations. Writing O to these locations
will have no effect.
As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the
art, in order to maintain compatibility with future
variants of these products, it is recommended that the
user's software should not depend upon values read from the
unused locations. Similarly, when configuring the device,
these locations should either be avoided or set to the
value 0.
A.6.5.2 R~s~rv-d r~gist~rs
Similarly, registers or bits described as "reserved" in
the present invention have un-documented effects on the
behavior of the device and should not be accessed.
A.6.5.3 ~ese registers
Furthermore, registers or bits described as ~test
registers" control various aspects of the devlce's
2145423
-
213
testability. Therefore, these registers have no
application in the normal use of the devices and need not
be accessed by normal device configuration and control
software.
21~5423
214
SECIION A.7 Clocks
In accordance with the present inventions, many
different clocks can be identified in the video decoder
system. Examples of clocks are illustrated in Figure 56.
As data passes between different clock regimes within
the video decoder chip-set, it is reQynchronized (on-chip)
to each new clock. In the present invention, the maximum
frequency of any input clock is 30 ~ . However, one of
ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that other
frequencies, including those greater than 30MHz, may also
be used. On each chip, the microprocessor interface (MPI)
operates asynchronously to the chip clocks. In addition,
the Image Formatter can generate a low frequency audio
clock which is synchronous to the decoded video's picture
rate. Accordingly, this clock can be used to provide
audiotvideo synchronization.
A.7.1 8p~itial D~codor clock ~ignal~
The Spatial Decoder has two different (and potentially
asynchronous) clock inputs:
Input /
Signal Narne Descnp~ion
Output
coded_clock Input rhls c!oc~ controls cata ;rans'er in to '~.e codeC cata
port ot the Ssatial Decoder.
On chip this clock controls tne processing of the
codeC Cata until it reaches the coded data ~uiter.
aecoder-clock Input rhe oecoCer ciock controis the rr,alonty ol ~.e
processing lunctions cn the Spa;lal Decocer.
rhe Cecoder clock aiso controls the transler oi dala
out oi .he Spatial Decoder through Its OUtDUt port.
Tabl- A.7.1 ~patial D-cod-r cloc~s
- 2145423
215
A.7.2 T~mporal D-eoder clock signals
The Temporal Decoder has only one clock input:
Input /
Signal Name ~ ,p~(,
OutplJt
~hcoc- _clocl~ ~nDU~ ~h- ~ coCer c~ock con~rols aJI ot tna processlng
lunc~ions on the T mooral D coder
~c C coder clock aso controls transfer ol data In lo
t~ Tempor~ D co~-r tnrougn iU input port anC out
vi~ itS OUtpUt pOrt.
T~bl~ A.7.2 T~mpor~l Decod~r clock~
A.~.3 El-ctrical ~pecification~
30 Mhz
Num Cnua ,,I,C Un,l Nole
Min M~
35 Clock p riod 33 n5
36 Clock high period 13 ns
3~ Clock low p nod 13 ns
Ta~le A.7.3 ~nput cloc~ r-quirom-nts
- 2145~23
216
Symbol Pu~meter Min. Ma~. Unlts
V!~InDu~ logic '1' volt~go 3.6J V~ 0 5 V
V~,InDut logic 'O' voltag- GND ~ O.S l.43 V
lozInDut lo-k~g~ curr~nt ~10 ILA
Tabl~ A.7.~ Clock input conditions
A.7.3.1 CMOS l~v~19
The clock input signals are CMOS inputs. V~Hm~ is
approx. 70% of Vl)D and VI~NZ is approx. 30% of VDD. The
values shown in Table A.7.4 are those for VIH and VL at
their respective worst case VDD. VDD=5 . + . 25V.
A.7.3.2 8t~bility of clocks
In the present invention, clocks used to drive the DRAM
interface and the chip-to-chip interfaces are derived from
the input clock signals. The timing specifications for
these interfaces assume that the input clock timing is
stable to within + 100 ps.
- 21~5~23
217
SECT10~ A.8 JTAG
As circuit boards become more densely populated, it is
increasingly difficult to verify the connections between
components by traditional means, such as in-circuit testing
using a bed-of-nails approach. In an attempt to resolve
the access problem and standardize on a methodology, the
Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) was formed. The work of
this group culminated in the "Standard Test Access Port and
Boundary Scan Architecture", now adopted by the IEEE as
standard 1149.1. The Spatial Decoder and Temporal Decoder
comply with this standard.
The standard utilizes a boundary scan chain which
serially connects each digital signal pin on the device.
The test circuitry is transparent in normal operation, but
in test mode the boundary scan chain allows test patterns
to be shifted in, and applied to the pins of the device.
The resultant signals appearing on the circuit board at the
inputs to the JTAG device, may be scanned out and checked
by relatively simple test equipment. By this means, the
inter-component connections can be tested, as can areas of
logic on the circuit board.
All JTAG operations are performed via the Test Access
Port (TAP), which consists of five pins. The trst (Test
Reset) pin resets the JTAG circuitry, to ensure that the
device doesn't power-up in test mode. The tck (Test Clock)
pin is used to clock serial test patterns into the tdi
(Test Data Input) pin, and out of the tdo (Test Data
Output) pin. Lastly, the operational mode of the JTAG
circuitry is set by clocking the appropriate sequence of
bits into the tms (Test Mode Select) pin.
The JIAG standard is extensible to provide for
additional features at the discretion of the chip
manufacturer. On the Spatial Decoder and Temporal Decoder,
- 2145~23
218
there are 9 user instructions, including three JTAG
mandatory instructions. The extra instructions allow a
degree of internal device testing to be performed, and
provide additional external test flexibility. For example,
all device outputs may be made to float by a simple JTAG
sequence.
For full details of the facilities available and
instructions on how to use the JTAG port, refer to the
following JTAG Applications Notes. --
a. 8.1 Connection of JTAa plns ~n non-JTaa Systeas
Signal Directlon Descnpoon
trst lnDut ThiS pin has an intemal pull~up, but mus; t~e taken
low at power up even it the JTAG lea ures are no~
being used This may be achieved t~y c^nnecDng
trst in cornmon with the chiD reset pin rese-
tCi Input Thes- pins have internal pull~ups, ar,cl--ay ~e len
tms d;~onne_t.d it the JTAG circui'Jy is not ~eing used
tck Input This pin does not have a pull-up anC snouid be lleC
to ground it the JTAG circuitry is not used
tCo Curput High llllph~dnce e~tcepl Curing JTAG s an
operabons Il JTAG is not ~eing useC ~is pin may
~e len dis~onne_l~d
T~bl- A.8.1 ~ow to conn-ct JTAG inputs
`- 214S423
219
A.8.2 Level of Conformance to IEEE 11~9.1
A.8.2.1 Rule~
All rules are adhered to, although the following should
be noted:
Rut-s D- ~ti~
3 1 1 (b) ~h- t~t Din is ~r~d
3 5 llb~ Guu~nte~ lor ~U putlic insttucDo~s (s-e IEEE 11~9 1
52 1(c))
5 2 1 (c) Guu nt~ lor ~11 pubtic instructlor~ For som~ V~ U
instnJcDons tho TDO pin mey bo cttve during ~ny ot ttlC
st W C~Dtur~DR~ E~it1-DR E~il-2-DR ~ P~us~DR
5 3 1(~) Pow r On-r~#t is ~i vod by us- ol t~ ~i pm
62 1 (-.n A co~ lor ~- SYPASS in trucoon is looC d in ol- T st Loglc
Reset sUte
7 1 1(~) Un-alloc~lea instruction coo~ are e~uivLent to 3YPASS
72 1 (c) T~lere is no o~lc- ID reti5#~
Tabl- A.8.2 JTAG Rul-s
21~23
220
~u~es i~ ,~t~o~
7 9 1 (tl) single~sleD oDeraaon reculres ert-mal conuol ol ~e sYs~em
clock
7 9 1 ( ) There Is no RUNEilST fac~lity
7 11 1 ( ~) Thare is no 10COiDE insttuctlon
7 12 1 ( ) Th-re is no i~Sc~CODE instrucaon
e l l (~) There is no devee i~ 1~ n regisUt
8 2 1 (c) Guuanleea ?or all ouùlic insttuctions Th- apCarent !ength ol
the 3ath Irom tai to tao may change una-r certaln
circumstances while Drivate insuucuon coaes ar~ Ioaehd
e 3 1 (a i) Guaranteea ~or all puiolic insttuctions 0Ua may De loaoed at
~irn-s o~hH tnan on the nsing eoige o~ tck Whii- ~nvate
insttuctions codes u- load d
10 4 1 (e) During INTEST~ ti~ syst-m cioci~ Dm mtJst ~e con~ollea
e~amally
10 6 1 (c) Dunng INTEsT~ outDut pins ate conitolled ~y aua s~ltt-d in via tdl
Tabl- A . 8 . 2 JTAG RUl-~i
A. 8 . 2 . 2 R-col~-nt~tion~
n ~ , C
32 1(~) tr k is a ~ uno~ CMOS input
3 3 t (c) tJn~ h S a hlgh ~C ~ ~. 3ull uD
3 6 1 (d) (~Ppli~ to us~ ol chip~
3 7 1(~) (APoli-s to us- ol Chip)
6 1 1(-) The SAMpLEl~RELoAo instructlon coC- IS loaeee curmg
caDture-lR
7 2 1 (i~) Th- INTEST instnucaon Is sup30tt-a
7 7 1(9) Zuos are loaaea at system o~tput Dlns aunng E%~-ST
7.7.2(h~ All SyS~er!l out3uts may ~e se~ high-imo aance~
, 3, (n z,roS are ioaeea at sys em in3ul 3Ins r~tunnS IN ~
3 t 1 (~ e) Deslgn s~ecl~lc !esl eata r~gist-rs are nol ~USIlC y ac:e C e
Table A.8.3 Recommenciations met
- 2145~23
221
R n ~
10 4 ~(~ Durirg EXTEST ~ ~ ~n into tSIo t~p lOglC ttom
ttla s~m cloc)l ph t5 th t ~d ~ mal~
Tabl- A. 8 . ~ Reco~-nd~tion~ not iaple~ente~d
A. 8 . 2 . 3 P-rmi~ion~
D `i
3 2 l(c) Gu r~nted ~or all puDlic i~tl~eti~s
6 l l (l) T~ instrucDon ~sg~t r is not u~d lo c pture doslgn SD onc
i.\ ~ ", - ~
7 2 1(9) S~r I ~CdibonL DUt~lic r ~n re proviCe~
~ 3 1 (a) S v r l Drr~at in~rue~on co~ u alloc~tad
7 3 l (c~ ~Rulo?) 5uetl i~trucDons cod s u Cocum nt C
7 ~ ) AdCition~l cod s psttottn id<ntlcutv to 9YP~SS
10 1 1(1) E-ch outWt pin n s its o~n 3 sUto control
10 3 1(~) ~ DU-Ihl IttC!l 8 Drtr~d-c
10 3 l (i j) Dunng EXTi ST input pin~ ue ct~nttoll-d by t~ata snittec In v~a
tal.
10 6 t (C e~ 3 sUte c-lls ~re nol totc-d in~cDve in t~o T st Loglc R~sel
st~t~
T~bl~ A. 8 . 5 P-rmi~t~ion~ m-t
2145~23
222
SECTl~ A.9 Spatial Decoder
30 MH7 operation
Decodes MPEG, JPEG & H.261
Coded data rates to 25 Mb/s
Video data rates to 21 MB/s
Flexible chroma sampling formats
Full JPEG baseline decoding
Glue-less DRAM interface
Single +5V supply
208 pin PQFP package
Max. power dissipation 2.5W
Independent coded data and decoder clocks
Uses standard page mode DRAM
The Spatial Decoder is a configurable VLSI decoder chip
for use in a variety of JPEG, MPEG and H.261 picture and
video decoding applications.
In a minimum configuration, with no off-chip DRAM, the
Spatial Decoder is a single chip, high speed JPEG decoder.
Adding DRAM allows the Spatial Decoder to decode JPEG
encoded video pictures. 720x480, 30Hz, 4:2:2 "JPEG video"
can be decoded in real-time.
With the Temporal Decoder Temporal Decoder the Spatial
Decoder can be used to decode H.261 and MPEG (as well as
JPEG). 704x480, 30Hz, 4:2:0 MPEG video can be decoded.
Again, the above values are merely illustrative, by way
of example and not necessarily by way of limitation, of
typical values for one embodiment in accordance with the
present invention. Accordingly, those of ordinary skill in
the art will appreciate that other values and/or ranges may
be used.
214~423
223
A. 9 .1 Spatial D~cod-r Signals
Signæ ~ UO Pin Nurnt~ r C _t
codert_cloclt 1 162 Coded 0-1- Po~ Uxd to suPoly
coaed-c~ 7 Ol I 172 171 169 16a 167 166 164 code~d d~U or Toi~en~s to ~e Sp tlul
163 Ood~c
coaec_enn 1 174
Se- #cttons A l O 1 ard
cod-d_v~lid 1 162
coC~ ccept O 161 A 4 1
oyte_moCe I 176
en-ol-ll 0] 1 126 127 b~icro Proc- sor Inl rbce (MPI)
w 1 125
~do ~6 0] 1 136 135 133 132 131 130 128
C~t~70] 0 1U ~51 149 147 145 143 141 S- ~c~on~61
140
r~ O 154
DRAM_ct~U~31 0] UO 15 17 19 20 22 2S 27 30 31 ORAbllnt rt c~
33 35 38 39 42 44 4~ 49 57
59,61,63 66 68 70,~2 ~4,76
S - se0On ~52
79 91 ~3 ~ ~5
DRAM_~rtdr~10 01 0 1U 186 lU 189 192 193 195
197 199 200 203
0 11
~3 0] O 2 4 6 8
;~E o 12
Zi~ 0 20
DRAbt_enaol- I 112
ou~_C~U~ 01 88 ~9 90 92 93 9~ 95 97 9~ Ou~n Po -
out_enn O 87
S-e J ction ~4 1
cut_valid O 99
ou~ ~c~pt 1 100
JTA5 pa~
116
9ee SeCDon
~-~ O 120
:--5 1 117 .~
! 1 121
Ta~le A 9 1 Spalial Decoder signals
- 2145g23
224
S;gnal N~ ~ Pin Nurnt~er Dect ~ption
d cr~r_clock 1 177 ~he main Cecooer cloc~ S~ SecDon
A7
rffet 1160 ReseD
Table A.9.1 Spatial Decoder signals (contd)
Signal Nuna VO Ptn NunL C, ;~Jtlon
tphOish I 1~ l~ov rtid 1th ntphO;sh~ndtph1ishut
tph1ith 1 123 inpUls lor th on chip Iwo Dh~ clock
ov rrid 1 110
For nomul openoon s t overrid- O
tphOhh nd tph 1 ish are ignored (so conn cl
to CND or VOO~
cniptnt 1 111 S<t cnipt~St ~ O lor normaJ operUion
t~oop 1 114 Cono ct to GND or VOO duing normal
op ntion
ramtfft 1 109 l~ nmtfft 1 test ol th- on-chp RAMs is
en~d
S-t nmtfft O lor normat opennon
pll~ct 1 17~ ll pll~t a . O ~h~ on-chlp ph~e loc)tr C
loops ua dis Cl d
S-l pll#ba ~ 1 lor nom~al oDerauon
ti I 100 Two cbcks r quir~ Dy tle DRAM imerlace
q 1 179 during te5t openbon.
Connect to GND ct VDo Culng normal
openDon
poout 0 207 Tha r~o pins ~re ~ o ~ lor an
2Cin I 206 esurra filter lot tne ~h~ce loc~ loop
Tab~e A.9.2 Spatial Decoder Test signals
2145423
225
Slgnal N~rr~ _P~l Signal Name ~in Signal Nam- Pin Signal N~m~ P
nc zoa nc 156 nc 104 nc 52
les ~In 207 nc 155 nc 103 nc S '
;es ln 206 ~ 154 nc '02 nc 50
GNo 205 nc 1SJ V~O 101 DRAM_Cata~151 ¦43
OE 204 data~7~ 152 out_acccpt 100 nc 14
ORAM_adCr(0]203 d~t~(6] 151 out_v~lid 99 DRAM-cau(l6l 14~
VW 202 nc 150 out_data[01 98 nc 46
nc 201 daU(Sl 149 out_data~11 97 GNO ¦4s
ORAM-adcr[ll 200 nc 1413 GNO 96 DRAM_C~ta[17~ !4
DRAM_aadrt21199 d-t-l41 147 out_dU~[2] 95 nc 43
GNO 1g8 GNo 146 out_C~t~t3] 94 OP~AM_d~U~181 2
ORAM_addr~31197 dat~3l 145 out_dat l4l 93 VDD 41
nc 196 nc 144 ~ t~ (S] 92 nc 40
DRAM_acdr~4~l9S d-tat2] '43 VDD 91 oRAM-~atal19~ 39
VDD 194 nc 142 out_data(6] 90 DFlAM-datal2ol 38
DRAM_~ddr[S]193 d 1-~1] 141 Out_d l~17] 89 nc 37
oRAM-addrt6l 192 dUa(0¦ 140 otn_d U(Ol 88 GNO 36
nc 191 t c 139 out_s~tn 87 oRAM-datal2ll 35
GhO 190 VOO t38 GNO 86 nc 34
ORAM-~cdrr7] le9 nc 137 MAM-d~t 10] 85 DRAM-t ~U(22~ 3
DQAM_acdr(8]188 ~r(61 136 DRAM_d~(1¦ 84 VDO ;2
VOD 187 addrtSl 13S DR~M_dau(2] t3 ORAM eat~(23l 31
ORAM-aodri9l 186 GND 134 VOO 82 DRAM_da~a~24] 30
nc 18S ~a~tt4] 133 ORAM_d-t t31 81 nc 29
OPAM_~ddr~l01 184 addrt3] 132 nc 80 GNO 28
GNO 183 ~ddr[2] 131 oRAM_t5 U~4] '9 DRAM_e~ul251 27
coda-c!ock 182 ~ddtt1l 130 GND 78 nc 26
VOo 181 VOD 129 nc 77 ORAM_data(261 25
le5 ~ln 180 addr~0] 128 DRAM_daUtS] 76 nc 2
les ~In 179 en~D~01 127 nc 75 VOD 23
tesl ~In 178 enaolcj11126 DRAM_~U[61 7~ DRAM_eata(271 !22
eecocer_:~ocx 177 r~ 125 VOD 73 nc 2
~e_~oce 176 GND t24 ORAM Cata(7~ 72 DRAM_ea a~251 2~
GNO 1175 le5 ~m 123 nc 71 ORAM Ca a~29~ S
caed-e~n ll74 t slDIn 122 DRAM_dau(81 ~0 GNO
Table A.s.3 Spatial Decode~ Pin Assignments
214~23
226
S~l N~rne hn Sigr~l N~ Pin S~na~ Na~e ~ ~ S~nal Name Pln
nc 206 nc 156 nc l G~ nc 52
lest pin 207 nc 155 nc l 03 nc 51
test Din 206 uq 154 nc 102 nc 50
GNO 205 K 1S3 VDO 101 DRAM_~U(15j 49
OE 20~ d~ta(7¦152 ou~_acce~t 100 nc 48
OF~ht ~d~r[0l 203 d~t~(61 151 ou~_valid 99 DF~AM_Cau(16j 47
VOO 202 nc 150 out_data[0] 58 nc 46
nc 201 d U(5]149 out_Cat~[l] 9? GNO 45
DR~ dd 11~ 200 nc 14~ GND 96 OAAM_0at t171 44
DFW~_ ~Cr~21 1g9d t [41 147 out_daUt2¦ 95 nc 43
GNo 198 GNO 146 out_d~Ut3¦ 94 OFUM_d t~[l91 42
DFUM_addr[3l 197d~t~t31 1 5 out_d~U~4] 93 VDD 4 ~
nc 196 ~ 4 out_C U[5] 92 K 40
DF~ht_ dd~(41 195 d~t l21 143 VOO 91 DFUM_d~t~19] 39
VOD 19J nc 142 out_daUtcl 90 DRAM_d~20~ 38
OFl~ ddr~Sl 193 d~l1] 141 out_d t~ 89 nc 37
DF~t_~d~rl6¦ 192 d~pl 1~0 out_d~U~8¦ 88 GNO 36
nc 191 nc 13S ou~onn 87 ORAM_~U(21l 35
GND 190 VOO 138 GNO 86 nc 34
OFt~ ddr~71 1 U Y 137 DFUM_d~U[0185 ORAM_d~U[221 33
DF~M_~dd t81 188 ~[61 136 DFlAM-dua[1l 54 VOD 32
VDO 187 ~S] 135 OFlAM_d~U[21 83 DRAM_~t~t231 31
DFUhl_~ddrt91 186 GNO t34 VOO 82 DRAM_C~tt 124¦ 30
nlc 135 ~ 133 ORAM_dau(3]81 nc 29
DF~_adcrt101 184 ~31 132 nc 80 GNo 28
GNO 183 U1~2¦ 131 DFUM_C~tat~l 79 DF~AM_C~ut25] 27
coded_clock 182 addr[1] 130 GND 78 nc 26
VDD 1g1 VDO 129 nc 77DFtAM_datat261 25
t tpin 150 U~Ol 129 DFlAM_data~S~ 76 nc 2~
test pin 179 n~pl 127 nc 75 VDD 23
t stpin 178 ~1~ 126 OR~A_d~tta[61 74 O~AM_~t~t27~ 22
ae~er_ctrcl~ 177 rw 125 VDO 73 nc 21
b~te_mode ~76 GND 124 DR~M Catal71 72 DRAM_~ta~29~ 25
GND 175 ~e5t pin 123 nc 71 ! ,,~M_~:al291 ~
coa~d-estn 174 t stpin 122 DRAM_aatala~ 70 1 5r
l'ab~e A.9.3 Spatial Decoder Pin Assisnments
21~q~3
227
S~gnal N~ tn S~l N~ ~in Sign~l Nur~ ~n S~grlal N~mc P"~
~c 173 ~st 121 GN0 69 DPAM~ (3G1 17
cxee_Cu~71172 tCo 120 OR~ t [91 68 nc 16
coeeo_~al~[61 171 nc 1~9 ~ 67 OR~M_C~u(3ll 15
vOO 1~0 VOO 11a OR~M_CU~(10l 66 ~'00 14
:oeeo ~l~(sl 169 Ims 117 V00 65 nc l3
coe C_CU~[~I 1U tdi 116 nc 64 WE 12
c~Ceo_~ta(31 16~ tct~ 115 O~M_C~t llll 63 ~ 11
coCeC_C~t~(21 166 t~stpin 11- rc 62 nc 10
GND 16S GN0 113 0~41~ 121 61 GND 9
cwa-o~;~(ll16J, OR~_~b 112 GN0 60 ~ 01 8
coeeo_C-I~[01 163 t~t pin 111 oR~4-a~l~(13l 59 nc
coCe~_valiC 162 tt~h 110 rc 5~ ~ll 6
c~C~d_ cceo~ 161 I ~tpi~ 109 0R~ 141 5~ vO0 5
resel 16C nc 10~ VDO j6 ~;21 4
vOO 159 r~ 10~ ne 55 rlc 3
nc 158 r,c 106 nc 5~ ~;31 2
nc 157 nc 1 OS nc 53 nc
~abl- A.9.3 Spatial Decoder Pin Assignments (contd)
A.9.1.~ "nc" no connect pins
The pins labeled nc in Table A.9.3 are not currently
used these pins should be left unconnected.
A.9.1.2 V~ and GND pin~
As will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the
art, all the Vl,l, and GND pins provided should be connected
to the appropriate power supply. Correct device operati~n
21~5423
228
cannot be ensured unless all the V~ and GND pins are
correctly used.
A.9.1.3 Te t pin conn-ctions for normal operation
.~ine pins on the Spatial Decoder are reserved for
internal test use.
Pin nu~r Conntlon
Conn cl to GNO bl nor~ul ooerauon
C~ct to V~O tor normal Wer~Uon
L~e ODen C-rc~ lor rnorrnal ooera~lo
Table A.9.~ D-fault te~t pin conn-ctions
A.9.1.~ JTAG pins for normal op-ration
See section A.8.1.
214S423
229
A. 9 . 2 Spatial D-cod-r memory ~ap
Addr. (h~s) Rqi~t N~m~ S~ t~ls
OsOO .... Os03 Inl~mup~sor~ r ~ ~.9.6
Os04 .... Os07 In~utek~itr~gist n ~.9.7
Os08 .... O~OF St~rt eods d bCtOt rsgists
Os10 . . . Os1 S ~dhr ~n~ con~d rsgists~s A.9.8
Os16 .... Os1~ Not ~d
Os18 ... , o~e3 DA~U ht~ ~ tur t~srs A.9.9
0~2~, ... 0~26 ~ul~ nwu~r ~ srd Icsyhob r~iste-s ~.9.1C
0~27 Not ~d
0 8 ..... Os2F Hullnun d cod r r gis~ A.9. 13
0~30 .... 0~39 In~ ~u nt~r rsgist~rs ~.9.1
Os3~.... 0~3EI No~
Os3C R~d
o~o ... 0~3f Not U~d
Os~O ... Os7F T st r ~jstsrs
Tab~e A.g.5 Ov_. v;e~ ot Spatial ~ecor~er memory map
2145~23
`_
230
A~C-. 9a
g~s~er N~ P~ge ~ rences
~he~) num
OsO0 7 c lip_ v nt CED_EVENT_0
6 not us-d
S ilbgsl_bngtl~_coun~_ v nt
SCo-lLLEG~ LENG7~/-couNr
4 r rvd m y re~ 1 or O
SCo-JpEG-ovERupplNG-s7;~FiT
3 -~C ~F ~g_st n_-v nt
Sco-Nov-JpEG-o~ERulpplNG-sTARr
2 ut ~ _st n_ v nt
SCO_UNRECOGNlSEO_SrARr
stop_dt r_picture_e~nt
SCO_STOP_AF7ER_P~CTURE
0 non_~lign d_st n_~nt
SCo-Nt~fv-ALlGNEo-sTART
0~01 7 ct~ip_rN k CED_~ASIC_0
6 not u#d
S IU pl_bngtt~_count_mssk
4 r~wd ~rit 0 to ~is bc tion
SCO_JPEG_Ov~RUPPlNG_Sr~Rr
3 non~p~ _rn#k
2 ~ _~n_tn- k
stop_~tJ~lut_tn- k
O non_digni_~n_mcsk
0~02 7 Idct_too_l~_~nt loCr OEFF NUM
6 Idet_too_m ny_~nt IDCr SuPER_NUM
S ee pt_ N~h_~nt 8S_STRE~M_ENO_EVENr
4 t rpt_met_ev nt 8S_ r~RGET MET EVENT
3 count r_~ h d_too_~ rty_ ~nt
8S_FLUS~_8EFORE r~RGET_MEr_EVENr
2 eounUr_tlu~h d_ev~nt 8S_FLUS~_EVENT
p~rser_event OE~VX_EVENT
o hut~rr~n_event ~UFF~AN_EVENT
Table A.9.6 Interrupt #rvice area registers
- 2 14~423
231
it
Rq~r N~ P~g~ r~ r~r~
(h~ n~T~.
0~3 7 Ida_too_~_mn~t
6 ida_too~ r~_rn~
~ p
4 t~rge~_rn t_m~l~
3 eount r_llu h d_too_e~r~y_m~
2 eount r_tlu~
, 1 p~r_m#lt
O ilutl~n_rn 1~
T~bl- A 9 6 ~nt-rrupt ~-rvic- ~r-~ r-gi~t-r~ (cont~)
2145423
232
Ador 91t
R~gist r N~ Pa~e rd~r-nc~s
(he~) num
0~04 ~ co~_~u~
6 n~b_mpl_lnp~n
S cod d_~
4 0 nol u~d
0~05 7 0 coded_d~
0~06 7 0 nol u~d
0~07 7 0 not u~d
o~oe 7:1 nol u~C
O ~ codo_d~or_~
Iso ~npul_clr~rdt_~
CEO_SCO_~CCESS
O~Og 7 ~, nol u~-d CEO_SCO_CONJ~OL
2 di~rd_ ~n lon_d t~
dl~rd_u- r_d~U
O Ignor-_non_ 1ign d
O~OA 7 5 not U#d CEO_SCO_ST~TU5
. in#rt_~u nc~_st~rt
3 disrd_~ll_d~
2 0 st n_cn~_#~rctl
Tab~e A.9.7 Ssars code detector and input circuit . ~g.sle, s
2145~23
--
233
~c-. ait
R gi~ N~ Fs9- r terences
(h-x) num
OxOB 7 0 r str 5ps-bngtl_count
OxOC ~ O
OxOD 7 2 not o#C
1 0 st~n_code_~ecto~_coCing_~un~rC
OxOE 7~0 sun-nlu
OxOF 7 4 not u~
3 0 picture_numi~r
Table A.9.~ Stut code d~t _tor ~nd input circuit r~;~ters (contd)
AdCr Bit
R gist Nsme ~ge referencc5
(\lex) num
Ox l O 7 1 nol u~
O surtup_ o~ CEO_8S_ACCESS
ûxll 73 notu~d
2 0 bit_count_p~nc i- CED_BS_PRESCALE
Ox12 7 0 bit_count_~rpt C 0_BS_rARGFT
Ox13 7 0 bit_count CEO_BS_COUNr
C-14 71 notus C
O ottchlp_~u u CED_BS_OUEUE
Ox 15 7 1 notu~d
0 en b~_str- m CEO_BS_ENA8LE_NXT_SnU
Tabh A.9.8 8ut~er statl-up regislers
214S423
`_
234
ACdr. Bd
F~g~ N~me P~ge relerences
(h~) num.
O~rl8 t:5 nolus d
4:0 p~ge_~Q_bn9m
CED_IT ~At;E_ST~T_LENG~H
0~197:4 nol
3:0 resd_c~ck_1eng~
0~1A7:~ nol us d
3:0 ~nt~_c~1cl _~ga
~abk A.9.9 DRAIA i.~t~ S:e configu ~ c~ ~3 'e ~
2.35 2145g23
AaCt. ~rl
Rqist r N~ P~ge relercr~
(hex) num.
Ox1B7:~ nol U#d
3:0 r-~r~n_c~cl-_lengtn
OxlC7:4 notuscd
3:0 C~S_hlling
Ox1D7:~ notud
1:0 R~S_blling
Ox1E7:1 notuud
O Int~cc_Umlng_ucc s~
Ox1F?.~ r 1~h_hto~d
Ox20 7 no~
6:4 DR~ll,l_~dCr_~ngtnl2:0
3:1 CAS_~w,9~-0]
O RAS_~ng~t21
Ox217 6 R~S_ ~t~:]
5:3 O~WE_~ht2 0]
2 0 M~ l_~b_n~t~ g]
0 2 7 AccE:ss W~ br ~ ~ ~ ?nol
r~dCED_OR~_CONFlGUf~E
6 ~ro_hln n
S M~.~ll_~Ob
, no_~h
3 2 ro~_~ l :O
1.~ MA~_~_~ld~1 :01
Cx237:0 T t ~ CED_PLL~I~S_CONFIG
TableA.9.9 D~A~ t~ configuration(~g;st~.s (contd)
Adtr. 5it
R-gist~ir N~ P~g~ r~renc~s
(~ex) nu~L
Cx2~ 7:1 notu~ d
O Dun r_mcn 9--_~CCs
Ox25 ~:6 nol u~ed
5:0 bu~ r_r~r~g r_~no~ a~rff~
C~26 7:0 t~u~l~r_~ r~ g~r_~qrnob_r~u
Table A.9.10 Butter manager accesS and keyhole registers
214~423
236
~r. ~t
~ ~y ~ p~g< r~l~nnc~s
(~) ~r
OxOQ 7D not
0~01 ~.2
1 0 cdb_b~s-
Ox02 ~ 0
0~03 7D
O~tO~, 7:0 rotuS d
0~05
~ O edb_bngth
0~06 ~.0
0~0~ ~:0
Ox08 7 O nol U#d
OxO9 70 cdb_r ~d
OxO~ 7D
0~ ~ O~
O~ O not w~d
OxOD 7.0 c~b_num~
O~OE 7 0
OxOf ~ O
OxlO 70 notu~ d
Oxl1 70 tD_~
Oxl2 ~:0
Ox13 7 0
Ox14 ~:0 ~ ~d
Ox1S 7 0 tb_~
Ox16 7
Ox17 7:0
Ox18 7:0 rot ~d
0~197.~ t~_r d
0~ O
0~1570
0~1 C 7.0 ~ol u#d
0~1 D 7:0 t~_num~c~
0~1E7:0
Q~1F70
Tab~e A 9.11 Bu~ter manager e~ended addresS s~ace
2145~23
237
i~t
i~qister N~me P~qe rebr-nccs
~)nunL
Os20 7 0 not u~d
Os21 70 butt r_limit
0~27 0
0~23 7 0
0~24 7 4 not u~d
3 CdiO_tUII
2 cdb_cmpty
tb_lull
O t~_ mpt~y
Tab~e A.9.11 Buffer ...- l~ger e~l.ndcd address space (contd)
Aodr i3it
i~ gi~tcr N~ P~gc rct nc~s
(~)num
Os29 7 ~ _r I CEO_I~ CrRtt77
6 4 iluttm n_ nor_cod ,2 I CEO_~t_Cr~Lr6:~
3 0 ~t ~n control b~ p] t ct P Ci~
C8i~, t21 ~ 4ni bit fi- d bngth C8P
Or29 7:0 i~-#r_ mr_cod- CED-H-Diuux-ER~
o~ 7 4 notu~ d
3 0 ~mu~_ir~ol-_cddrff~
0~i3 7~ CEO_~ KEYhCLE_~DOR
0~2C 7~0 d mu~ ob_dot~ CEO_H_ltErHOLE
0~ 7 dummy_i~t_pictur- CED_H_ALU_REG0.
r_~_t S~ t
6 r~dd_into CEO_~_ALU_REG0.r_ficld_inh_on
5 1 not u- d
O continu CED_~ ALu-REGQr-cononuc-olt
0~E 7 0 rom_nni~on CEO_H_~LU_REGl
o~F 7:o p~u r 9~t r
Tabk A.9.12 Video demux registers
2145423
238
Ar~Cr B/t
R gist r N~ p~ge reler nces
(hcx) nu~L
Ox2F 7 cED-H-TRAcE-EvENrwn~llosn9e step, r~
wiU ~ re~ en th- St P h~5 ~n r ompbbd
6 C0_H_TRACE_M~SK #l lo on to enter single
step mode
S CEO_H_rRACE_RSt pUlW r~l ~n s quenced
1,0
O r~ol u~ d
Table A . 9 . ~2 Vid-o d-~tuY r-gi~t-r~ ( cont~ )
214~23
`_
239
ACCt Bit
Registu N~ P~gs rcluc~ s
(h~x~ nutn
C~OO 7 0 nol used
OYOF
Y~O 7 0 llorkJ#I~ r ho~5
OY1 1 7.0
0~12 7:0 V~tt~lS t_v~15
OS13 7:0
OY 1 4 7:2 not u~
1 0 bUn t~ t hd'~cr si~c
OY15 7 O
OY 16 7 ~, nol u~d
3 0 p l_~P et t o~l_~ct
OY17 72 rloluS d
bit_r t t_bl~t te
OY1~ 7:0
OY19 7:0
OY1 A 7:~, ItOI u#d
3-0 pie_nt r ole_t~
0~1B 7 1 nolu#C
O ~ t_co~ t~ ~
Or 1 C 7:0 piCtur _t~
01~ l D 7 0 ~261_pc_t~p-
Table A 913 V;deo t~cmux extcnded ddress space (Sheet 1 ot 8)
2145423
`_
240
A~Cr. B~
F~ r NYT~- Pag- nl-nnces
I (h~X) nurL
! Ox1E7J~ rlotus d
1 0 bro~sn_cto~d
Oxl F7:5 rlot uxd
4~ pr dic~on_mode
Ox20 ~0 v~v_W~r
Ox21 ~o
Ox22 7D priv~lC rsgat r MpEG ~uU_pd_~d JPG
p ndin~ ~_ch~
Ox23 ~ O privsta tcgat r ~APEG ~utl_~l_~wd JPEG
r son_ind-x
Ox2~ 7 0 privUa rotist r hon2_mO_copy
Ox25 70 plc_numb r
Ox26 7 1 not us d
1,0 m~_h
Ox27 71 not uc d
1 0 mu_v
0~23 70 prilQtot~t rxrUchl
O prt t r oistscr~2
Ox2A 7D p~r r gist rscr~3
Ox2B 7 0 ~ItMPEG W d1, H261 h900
0~2C 7 O ~ts r~r ~IPEG ~roup, JPEG h~st_scan
Ox20 7 O plinta r pt r tApEG h-Dic~ra
Ox2E 7 ~rnmlr_~t~c~ur r ,m_
6 R~ld_into
5 1 r~ol uxd
O co~nu
Ox2F 7:0 rom_nvhion
Ox30 72 nolus d
1 0 dc_hutt_0
Ox31 7 2 rlot us~d
1 o dc_hu~_1
0~32 7 2 r~ol uxd
1 :0 dc_hun_2
TaD~e A.9.13 Video ~emux extend~d address s~ace (S~leet 2 of 8)
214~23
._
241
_ _ _ . _ _
~dr. Bn
_ Rqist r Narn ~ge r~t~er~Ce5
nUm
Ox33 7~:2 not u#d
1.0 ~c_~lUtr_3
0~3, 7 2 notus d
1 O ~c_hun_O
Ox~S ?~ nol uoed
1 :0 ~C_I~Uf~
Ox36 7 2 nol u#d
1.0 ~c_lwn_2
0~37 7 2 not t~d
1 0 c_llutr_3
ox38 7 not u#d
1 0 ~ 0 r_t~_O
Ox39 7 2 rto~ l~d
1D to 1 r_t~ 1
0~ 7:2 not U#d
1 o t~_2 r t~ 2
0~39 7 2 not U~d
1 0 tQ3 r t~_3
Or3C 7 0 . ~ _r~_O t_c_O
0~3D 7.0 ; r J- _nJme_1 r_c_1
0~3E 7:0 : r t_n-n- _2 r_c_2
Ox3F 7:0 : , ~r t_n _3 r_c_3
Ox40 70 pr~t ~ t rs
0~63
O~J,O 70 r_dc_cr d_O
Ox~t 7.0
Ox42 7 r_tlc_D~ d_1
Ox~3 7 0
Ox~ 7:0 r_oc_or d_2
O~tS 7.0
0~6 7 O r_oc_Dr~_3
01~7 7:0
0~ 7:0 r~ot use~
0~4F
Tab~e A.9.13 Vit*o demux e~tended address space (Sheet 3 of 8)
_ 21~5423
242
AdCr Ba
~e9~t r Nur~ P~r;- relerences
(he~) nu~
0~50 7.0 r_pr-v_mht
OxS 1 ~ .0
OXS2 ~ O ~ V_
OxS3 7 0
OxS4 7 0 r_prcv_mhO
OxS; 7 0
OxS6 7 0 r_Drov_mvo
0~57 7:0
OXS8 70 notus d
OXSF
0~60 7.0 r_nOrj~ mOCnt
0~6 ~ 7.0
OX62 70 r_v n_mCcnt
OX63 7 0
0~6~ 7:0 ~0~ r_hok_mbs
OY65 7 O
O~j6 70 v rt_ ~t' ~ t_vort_lrbS
0~67 7:0
0~68 7O p~l r gia rr_r~t~n_cnt
0~69 7:0
0~6A 7.0 resun_lnt~l r_r stut_int
OsSB 7 0
0~6C 7.0 pnv~h regrst r r_Dlk_n_cnt
0~60 7 0 priv~U rqist r r_Olk_v_cnt
0~6E 7 0 pr~U rqist r r_co~
0~6F 7 O ~ C ~ I_id r_m~_compid
0~70 70 codinQ~nr~r~ r_co~in std
0~71 7 0 priv~U r~r r_p~n m
0~72 7 0 pr~t r gi t r r_twd_r_si2-
0173 7 0 D~t rqist r r_D~d_r_si2e
0~74 7 0 nol u#d
~7
^~7~ 72 nol use~
1 o ~Oc~ n_0 r_~k_h_O
Ta~e A.9.13 Video demux extended address space (Shee~ 4 ot 8
2145~23
243
~OCr. ~a
~ Rcg6ter N~ Page relerences
(h~X) nun~L
Ox79 7 2 nol used
1:0 olocl~s_h_l r_blk_h_l
Os7A 7.2 nolus d
1.0 bloclu_h 2 r_Dlk_h_2
Ox7B 7 ~ nol u#d
1.0 bloc~_h_3 r_blk_h_3
Os7C 72 no~us d
1.0 blocl~_v_0 r-blk-v-o
Ox7D 7~ nolus d
1:0 blocl~_v_1 r_blk_v_l
0~7E 7 2 not us d
1 0 Olocl~s_v_2 r_blk_v_2
Ox7F 7 2 nolus d
1:0 bloclu_v_3 r_blk_v_3
Os7F 7:0 nol i
Oxf F
Ox100 7.0 Cc_~it~_0[1S:01 CED_H_KEY_C~C_CP50
Ox10F
OX110 7:0 oc-~iu-l[ls:olcED-ll-lcEr-Dc-cpB1
Ox11F
0~120 7.0 not us-d
0~13~
Osl40 7.0 xc_bils_0[15:0] CED-H-KE`t-Ac-cpBo
0~14F
O~tSO 7 0 ~Ic_~ lS:Ol CEO_H_KEY_~C_CPB1
Oxl SF
0~160 7:0 nol u#d
0~17F
C~l~O ~:0 rJC_2sSss_O CED-H-KEy-zssss-lNoExo
O~lel 7:0 oc_2ssss_1 CED_H_KEY_ZSSSS_IN
~18~ 7:0 nol usec
OY1 â8 7:0 ~c_eoc_O CED_~_KEV_EO~_INDEXO
TaDle A.9.13 Videa demux extendet address space (Sheet S ot 8)
21~5~23
244
AoC~, B~
R-g~ler~m~ P~ reterences
~-(h~X) num.
Ox189 7-0 ~c_~oO_1 CEo-H-KEy-Eoc-lNoEx1
0x1BA 70 not ~ d
0x198
0x1eC 7:0 ec_~rl_0CED_H_KEY_ZRL_1~0EX0
ox 1 eo 7.0 ~c-2rl-tcED-H-KEy-zRL-l~DE
0x1eE 7:0 no~d
0x1FF
0x200 7.-o ec_hu~vsl_0(161:0]CED_H_KEY_AC_~00_0
0x2AF
0x280 70 rJc-hun~ql-o~11:o]cED-H-KEy-oc-lToD-o
0x2BF
0x2C0 7:0 rlol~
0~FF
0x300 7.0 sc_hunv~l_l[161:0]CED_H_KEY_AC_lTO0_
0Y3AF
0x3B0 70 ~c_hr~ql_1[11:0]CED_H_KEY_DC_ITO0_1
0x38F
0x3C0 7g r~lu~
0x7FF
0~900 ~.0 pn~t~ r g~us
Ox~C
F
0~00 7~ CE0_KEY_TCOEFF_CP8
0x80F
0x810 70 CE0_KEY_C9P_CP9
O~e1F
0xt20 7:0 CED_KEY_~8~_CP8
0x82F
0x830 7:0 CE0_KEY_MVD_CPB
O~e3F
o~s~o 7:0 CED_KEY_~TYPE_I_CPB
O~e~F
Tab~e A.9.13 Video demux extended address spaee (Sheet 6 ot 8)
- 2145q23
245
A~cr. 3a
Rbqr~ N~m~ P~r~l~r~r~
~) nun~
0~850 7:0 CEO_KEY_ ~ YPE_P_CP9
0~85F
0~860 7:0 CED_KY_MTYPE_8_CPB
O~B6F
O~B70 7:0 CEo-KEy-MTypE-H261-cp8
O~BBF
OYBBO 7.0 nolus~d
0~900
Or901 7:0 CEO_KY_HOST~OM_O
0~02 7:0 CED_KEY_HOsTROM_1
0~03 7:0 CEO_KEY_HOSTROM_2
O~OF
0~10 70 no~
0
F
O~AC 7:0 CED_KEY_O~X_WORO_O
o
O~AC 7.0 CED_KEY_3M%_WORO_1
O~AC ~0 CED_KEY_OMX_WO~D_2
O~AC 7:0 CED_KEY_DMX_WOPID_3
OxAC 7:0 CED_KEY_OMX_WOP10_4
O~C 7:0 CEO_KEY_DMX_WOFID_5
O~C 7:0 CED_KEY_DMX_WORD_6
O~AC 7:0 CED KEY_DMX_wO~D_7
Table A.9.13 V~o~eo demuY e~ended address space (Sheet 7 ot 8)
2145~23
246
~oCr. Brt
;~, Register N;rr~ Pase relerences
(h~) num.
0~C 7:0 CED_KEY_DM%_WORO_S
O AC 7:0 CED_KEY_OMX_WORO 9
0xAC 7 0 nol us~
A
OxAC
B
0xAC 7:0 CEO_KEY_DMX_AlNcR
C
O~AC 7:0
0xAC 7.0 CED_IOEY_DMX_CC
E
OxAC 7:0
F
Table A.9.13 Video demux cxb2n1 ! d address space (Sheet 8 o~ 8J
A~r. ait
Rqist r Nune Page relerer~ce5
(llex) nu~L
7 1 nol u#o
0~30 7:1 not us~
O i~_~CC~
0x31 7:2 notus d
1 0 I~_coding_st~nCsrC
0~32 ?:5 nol us~
4:0 testr gisl riQ~cab
0x33 7 " nol u#d
1.0 Iest re~isle~ i4_c~ .,t
0~34 7 ~ nol usa
1:0 lest re~ster inver*e_4u~ntiser_pre~iclion_mOae
0~357:0 l~s(regrsterlpe~ in~ on
Ta~le A.s.14 Inverse quantiser regislers
- 2145423
247
AoCr ~n
Reglsl r Narn- Pa5e elerences
(h-~) num
0~36 7 2 nol useC
1 0 last reSIs U mpeg_ nCi ._~ion
0~3? 7 0 not used
0~32 ? 0 io t~able_~eyhole_~CCr-ss
0~39 7 0 lo t~tbl~ yhol~_C4U
T~bl- A. 9 .1~. Inv-r~- gu~ntiz-r r-gi~t-r- (cont~)
AdCr
Regisl-r Nune Pa5e re~-rences
t)
O~OO Or3F JPEG Invene cu~ntlsatJon taD~e 0
MpEG C-~ault inUa ~able
Ox40 0~7F JPEG Inverse quanosanon UDle 1
MPEG da~ault non-lntra Uble
0~80 0~3F JPEG Inver5e quamlsanon UDle 2
MPEG Co rn !C - ~e ~ inDr~ t ble
O~CO O~FF JPEG nverse quanDsaDon Ubl- 3
MpEG rtown-loaCeo non innra Uble
Tabl~ A. 9 .15 Iq tabl- ext~nded ~re~ pace
_ 2145~23
248
SECTlOr`I A.10 Coded data input
The system in accordance with the present invention,
must know what video standard is being input for
processing. Thereafter, the system can accept either pre-
existing Tokens or raw byte data which is then placed intoTokens by the Start Code Detector.
Consequently, coded data and configuration Tokens can be
supplied to the Spatial Decoder via two routes:
The coded data input port
The microprocessor interface (MPI)
The choice over which route(s) to use will depend upon
the application and system environment. For example, at
low data rates it might be possible to use a single
microprocessor to both control the decoder chip-set and to
do the system bitstream de-multiplexing. In this case, it
may be possible to do the coded data input via the MPI.
Alternatively, a high coded data rate might require that
coded data be supplied via the coded data port.
In some applications it may be appropriate to employee a
mixture of MPI and coded data port input.
21gt5~23
249
A. lo. ~ ~he coded data port
Inout /
Signu Name C~
OutPut
codoo_clocl~ Inpul A Chck op nong U UD to 30 MH2 controlling ~he
op ntJon oi th- input circuit
cOd-~_C~ta(~ OJ Input Th- ~dUd 1~ w~ras rSqui d lo Implem~n~ a
coaoc_e~tn Input Tok n t~on t ~ ~ 9 ~ 0it ~ta values See sec~on
coa~ n~ldInDut
A ~ hr n sl ctrical ~s L ~ ot ;his
coCad_accapt O~tput
int-rl o~
Circui s on chip must P-cl~ge h- coded ~ata in~o
Tokan~
ort- mo~aInput Wh-n high thU signt~ indicuas that Irto ~t on ~s o
o- tr~bn d aaoss tn cod-o dat~ port In ~r~
mods nt~r than rokcn rno~e.
$abl- A. 10.1 Cod-~ data port signal~
`- 2145423
250
The coded data port in accordance with the present
invention, can be operated in two modes: Token mode and
byte mode.
A.10.1.1 Tok-n mode
In the present invention, if byte mode is low, then the
coded data port operates as a Token Port in the normal way
and accepts Tokens under the control of coded valid and
coded accept. See section A.4 for details of the
electrical operation of this interface.
The signal byte_mode is sampled at the same time as data
~7:0], coded_extn and coded_valid, i.e., on the rising edge
of coded_clock.
A.10.1.2 Byte mode
If, however, byte_mode is high, then a byte of data is
transferred on data[7:0] under the control of the two wire
interface control signals coded_valid and coded_accept. In
this case, coded_extn is ignored. The bytes are
subsequently assembled on-chip into DATA Tokens until the
input mode is changed.
l)First word ("Head") of Token supplied in token mode.
2~Last word of Token supplied (coded_extn goes low).
3)First byte of data supplied in byte mode. A new
DATA Token is automatically created on-chip.
A.10.2 Supplying data via th- MPI
Tokens can be supplied to the Spatial decoder via the
MPI by accessing the coded data input registers.
A.10.2.1 Writing Tokens via th- MPI
The coded data registers of the present invention are
grouped into two bytes in the memory map to allow for
efficient data transfer. The 8 data bits, coded_datai7:0;,
are in one location and the control registers, coded_busy,
enable mpi_input and coded_extn are in a second locat~^r..
21~5423
251
(See Table A.9.7).
When configured for Token input via the MPI, the current
Token is extended with the current value of coded_extn each
time a value is written into coded_data[7:0~. Software is
responsible for setting coded_extn to 0 before the last
word of any Token is written to coded-data[7:0].
For example, a DATA Token is started by writing 1 into
coded_extn and then Ox04 into coded data[7:0]. The start
of this new DATA Token then passes into the Spatial Decoder
for processing.
Each time a new 8 bit value is written to
coded datar7:0;, the current Token is extended. Coded extn
need only be accessed again when terminating the current
Token, e.g. to introduce another Token. The last word of
lS the current Token is indicated by writing 0 to coded_extn
followed by writing the last word of the current Token into
coded data[7:0].
~ister nun- ~ ~ rl sption
c.
cocec_enn 1 ~ Tolten~ can D- su~p~i~ to l~e Soa~lal Cecccer
rw via the MVI D~ wntinS to tn~e reSIs;ers
~O~ OI 8 ~t
w
coCeC_Dus~ 1 1 Th- st~t- ot tt ls reglslers mclca es I :r e
r Sp~tl~l D cod-r is ~DI- Io aCCeC! .~ ler5
wnnen into coC~_dat~t7 O]
Ttl~ VLU~ 1 in~iat~s th~t ~ int~ c~ Is OU5'1
and unaOle to accept Cata B-havloums
unC-rin C d t~ uS r tri-s to wnle lo
coC-d_Cat~ Ol wh-n coCoC_Dus~ ~
enaDle-mpl-inpul 1 The valu- ,n tt~s tunclion enaDIe reS!S erS
rw controlswtl-th rcOCeCCatainDutlC~eS^a:~
D coC-ms vla ~le coded Cau cor ~i or vla ~^e
MPI (1).
Ta~le A.10.2 Co~e~ data inpu~ registers
2145423
252
Each time before writing to coded-data[7:o~ coded_busy
should be inspected to see if the interface is ready to
accept more data.
A.10.3 Switching b-t~--n iApUt mod-
~
Provided suitable precautions are observed, it ispossible to dynamically change the data input mode. In
general, the transfer of a Token via any one route should
be completed before switching modes.
Prev~ous rnod- No~t MorJ- ~h~viour
9~a Tokon Ttu on-ctlip circuttry will wo th- last byte suPp~
MPI hput Drte rnoC- ~5 tl~ st byto ol th- DATA Token ~a
it w~s constrUcting (i - ~ nn bn w~ e se~ lo 5!
9-lore ccopting tt~e ne~ Tok~n
Tabl- A.10.3 8~itching data iApUt mod-s
2145423
-
253
~-~o~ o~ N~ ~cCe 1, ~e~av,o~r
~ol~e~ o~cnlo e:rc~ uy s~C~I~ng ~ en ,n ,ol(en
~OC~ is /e~ sle~! !or cO~ ~e ~c~(e~t, e.
Wl~ the e~ ~,t C~ ~e 1~5~ ~e o~ -'cr~.a~lcn se' ~
O) ~e~o~e S~ 5 I yte moCe. I
UPI In~ot Ac~ss ;0 Illsul v~ tn~ P~ wlll ~c: :e ~ran:er l.e.
c~Ced_~usy ~11 ~m~m S~l to ) on31 ~~e O~C!:-
clreoitry su~ly~rlg ~ Tok~n In :~e~ e ~.as
compl~t~ ~n~ Tolt~n (i.~. Wdh :t e ~t~ n 0~ tnc '25
~ o~ h,.-~ n s-t to 0).
MPI I~U~ 3Y~ conttol solr~u- muSl h~v~ ec ~ e
MPI inCut Tok~ it ot t~ 135; ~yte ~f
Al~r.. ~l~ s~t to o) ~or~ ~n~ mpi_input s Sel
0.
Tabl- A.~0.3 Switching data input mod-s ~contd)
The first byte supplied in byte mode causes a DATA Token
header to be generated on-chip. Any further bytes
transferred in byte mode are thereafter appended to this
DATA Token until the input mode changes. Recall, DATA
Tokens can contain as many bits as are necessary.
The MPI register bit, coded busy, and the signal,
coded accept, indicate on which interface the Spatial
decoder is willing to accept data. Correct observation of
these signals ensures that no data is lost.
A.10.4 Rate of accepting coded dat~
In the present invention, the input circuit passes
Tokens to the Start Code Detector ~see section A.11). The
Srart code Detector analyses data in the DATA ~okens bi~
~, serially. The Detector~s normal rate of
21~5423
254
procesSi~g is one bit per clock cycle (of coded_clock).
Accordingly, it will typically decode a byte of coded data
every 8 cycles of coded_clock. However, extra processing
cycles are occasionally required, e.g., when a non-DATA
Token is supplied or when a start code is encountered ln
the coded data. When such an event occurs, the Start Code
Detector will, for a short time, be unable to accept more
information.
After the Start Code Detector, data passes into a first
logical coded data buffer. If this buffer fills, then the
Start Code Detector will be unable to accept more
information.
Consequently, no more coded data (or other Tokens) will
be accepted on either the coded data port, or via the MPI,
while the Start Code Detector is unable to accept more
information. This will be indicated by the state of the
signal coded accept and the register coded busy.
By using coded accept and/or coded busy,the user is
guaranteed that no coded information will be lost.
However, as will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in
the art, the system must either be able to buffer newly
arriving coded data (or stop new data for arriving) if the
Spatlal decoder is unable to accept data.
. A.10.5 Cod~d dat8 clock
In accordance with the present invention, the coded data
port, the input circuit and other functions in the Spatial
Decoder are controlled by coded clock. Furthermore, this
clock can be asynchronous to the main decoder clock. Data
transfer is synchronized to decoder clock on-chip.
21~S423
255
SECTI~I A.ll Start code detector
A.ll.l Start cod~s
As is well known in the art, MPEG and H.261 coded video
streams contain identifiable bit patterns called start
5 codes. A similar function is served in JPEG by marker
codes. Start/marker codes identify significant parts of
the syntax of the coded data stream. The analysis of
start/marker codes performed by the Start Code Detector is
the first stage in parsing the coded data. The Start Code
Detector is the first block on the Spatial Decoder
following the input circuit.
The start/marker code patterns are designed so that they
can be identified without decoding the entire bitstream.
Thus, they can be used in accordance with the present
invention, to help with error recovery and decoder start-
up. The Start Code Detector provides facilities to detect
errors in the coded data construction and to assist the
start-up of the decoder.
A.11.2 St~rt cod- d-t-ctor r-gist-rs
As previously discussed, many of the Start Code Detector
registers are in constant use by the Start Code Detector.
So, accessing these registers will be unreliable if the
Start Code Detector is processing data. The user is
responsible for ensuring that the Start Code Detector is
halted before accessing its registers.
The register start code_detector access is used to halt
the Start Code Detector and so allow access to its
registers. The Start Code Detector will halt after it
generates an interrupt.
There are further constraints on when the start code
search and discard all data modes can be initiated. These
are described in A.11.8 and A.11.5.1.
2145~23
256
R-~gist-r n~m~ sc p ,on
C.
sUr~_coa-_3-t ctor_ cc-s~ ~ O Writing 1 to tnis regls;e ~-Cu sts tnat tr.e s;a-
rw code det ctor s~op to allow acci ess `o ~;s
regis~ers ~he user snou!c wa~t un~ e væue
c~n oe read irom t~s reglSter InCicaa^s ~a
oD~r~tlon hi~ StODD C anC acc-ss Is ~ossiaie.
Tabl- A 11 1 8tart cod- d-t-ctor
r-giist-r~ ~8~--t 1 of 5)
21~5923
._
Reg~ster na,me ~ . C~ Y ~1 on
ilbqal_l-ngtn_count_ev-nt 1 0 An Ul qu length coun~ evenl wlll oc: r d wn,ie
nv d~ing JPEG c~u. ~ l~ngth counl Gelc :s
ill-gal_bngttl_count_nusk 1 0 lound c~rrying a valu- les5 lhan 2 This should
~w only oCCur as th- r sult ol an error ~n ~he JPE G
daU
Il the m slt rsgist r is Sel Io 1 then an Inlerr_ l
c n h- g n-ratad and the slart coae Cetec or
wiU StOp Bshaviour tollowlng an error 6 nol
d tlliS anor is suDpressed (mas~
~-g~st r s t to 0) S-- A 11 4 1
IP~ g_over~pping_sUn_ev nt 1 0 11 tha coding stuul rC is JPEG and the
rW ~qu nce 0xFF 0xFF is lounC while looking br
iP 9_0~ I~;p ~g_sun_mast~t 1 0 amarlc-rcod-t~ev-ntwilloccur
rw rhis s qu-nce is a l-gal stutting secuence
1~ th- mask r gister is s-t to 1 then an inlern t
c n h- g n-rt t tt nd ~he stan coCe Cetec or
witt StOD B-- A 11 4 2
o _ ~p ng_sUn_ v nt 1 Itth~coCin9st nCardis~lPEGor H25t anc
~v t n c c lat~ ~ st n coCe is lound wnile !oola~s
O - ;; 3_stan_mask 1 0 tor a start coC this event will occur 11 the rr asY
rw r gist-r is set to 1 then an Inle~Tuot c2n De
g-n-rateC and the stan coC- Cetector ~11 s ;^
S--A11 ~2
Table A.11.1 Start code detector registers (Sheet 2 ot 5)
- 214~g2~
gister nam~ Descnp~lon
r . 3n Is~_sUrt_event 1 0 11 an un ~;OgA ~cC s;an ;oCe IS enc^unterec
r~v this rvent wtll cur 1~ Ue Tas~ re7lstems set
ur .CC gnlsed_st~tn_rrt s~t 1 0 to 1 then an internupt can t~e generateC anC tne
rw stan CoCC CeteCtor ~vtll stop
sun_valu~ 9 x The sWt code value rea5 Irom the ~ns ream s
~O availao~e in the regl5ter stan_v~lue while ~e
st~rt COC~ d~tec~or Is nalteC See A. 1 1 4.3
Dunng normal oceratlon stan_value contains
th- value ol the most renay CecaeC starJ
marker coCe~
Only the C LS~s ol st; n_vatu~ are useC during
H~61 oD-rauon Th- 4 ~lSE~s will t~e zero.
stop_atter_pictu e_e~wnt 1 0 1~ th- reSIster stop_aner_pic~ure Is set to 1
rvv th tn a stop a~ter p~cture event will ~e seneratec
stop_~n~r_olctur~ k 1 0 ~tt r th~ ~nC ot 2t Dlctur~ !taS pass~C through
r~v th- sun cod- d~tector
stop_~r_pictur- 1 0 If th- mas)t re~gistemS set to 1 then an Interrupt
rvv can h- g-neratec anC tne s an coCe oeteC or
v~ill stop S- e A 11 5 1
stop-aner picture Coes not reset !O ~ a~ter
the enC ot a plCtUre nas t~een Cetec!eo so
shoulC Xt cleareC Cirec~v
Table A.11.1 Start eode detector register5 (Sheet 3 Ot 5)
2145~23
259
Reglster name ~ Descnpt~on
tr
non_aligneC_5un_event 1 0 When i9note-non-ali9neo ~s se !O l. s an
~w coCes tha~ ue not byte a~ignec a~e Igrorr C
non_allgned_suQ_mast~ 1 0 (t eateC as no mal data~
rw When ignore_non_aligneC is SCI ~c 0 H 251
ignore_non_aligneC 1 0 anC MPE5 stan eoC-s wlll be C-tec eC
n~ re9arcless ol byte alignment anC ~e non-
aligneC stUt vent wilt be; ~r _ ~n
1~ the m~st~ r-gister is set to 1 then the evenl
will caus an in~enuDt and the stan coCe
d~t ctor wtll stoD~ Se A 11 6
Il the coding sUnd~rC is configurec as ~ PE5
Ignore_non_align d is ignored ana tle non-
ali5n d sUrt vent wtll n ve ~e g-nerateC
CiscarC_e~rten~ion_CtaU 1 1 When t1~ese reglsters ar- set to 1 e~tenslon or
rw us r C-ta that cannot t~ decodect Cy he
etiscarC_user_CaU 1 1 SpUiL D coder i5 CiscuCed by t~e s an coCe
rv~ C-t cto~ Se- A 1 1 3 3
oiscarct_all_CaU 1 0 Wh-n s t ~o 1 a~ ~U anC Tot~ens are
n~ Cisct rC-d by th- stan coCe Cetec or Th s
connnues until a FLUSH Token is suc~lleo or
th register i5 set tO O dir ctly
Tl~- FLUSH Token that resets this regls e ms
disc~rW and not outDut Cy th- start ccCe
d-tector Se~ A 11 5
¦ in#Q_se~UenCe_suQ l l See A.11.7
rv~
TaDle A.11.1 Start code detector registers (Sheet 4 ot 5)
2145423
260
ai
Regist-r name ~ cnon
~i
sUn_code_xa~ch 3 5 When tr~s reglste Is s~ o ~ ne s ar~ :::e
rw deiec~or operates normall1 ~lhen se! o a
~gher value nhe sUn coCe Ce~ec cr c soarcs
d~ta un~il the sD~clfiec ty~e o~ s ar ;xe !S
det ctod When the sD ~eC s a t :xe s
Cetected the register is set U C anC :r~a
OD-~Don ~ollow5 Sse A 11 3
sUtt_coCe_CeteC~or_coding_sUnCUd 2 0 This regis~r configures ~he coCing s;a~:aro
rv uSed by the sUrt coCe Ce!e~c or The e~ s;er
c~n be lo~ded direcny or ~y uslng a
CODING_STANDARD ol~en
Whenwer the s~rt code Ce!ector ;erera;es a
CODING_STANDARD Token (see
A 11 7 4 it c~mes its cur
coding st~ndud confiqura~_n his Toi~en wlll
tt n configure the coding sUnCarC useC ~y all
oth-~ pUts o~ th~ decode :hiD-set See A.21.1
~ndA 11 7
picture_numo~r 4 0 E~ch bme tne sUrt coCeC :et C:or O-!eC:S a
rw picture sttut code in the CaU sUeam (:r -e
H.26 1 or ~EG ecuivalenl) a
PICTURE_START Token is Sene~a;eC
which rn s the cu~ent v~lu~ oi
piaure_number This reSIs er then
increm nts
Ta~le A.11.1 Start code deteetor ,egistlLrs (Sheet 5 ot S)
214542~
261
F~-gis:~r ~am- ~ ~n C Y
u~ c
l-ngth_co~nt 16 0 Thi~ r~glst-r cont~ curr~llt v~lue ol ~e
~0 JPEG l~n~ count. ~his r~gist~r 5 moc5~e~
und-r th~ con~ol o~ co~ u c!xk and
only o~ r-~ vi~ ~- MPI w-le~ ~ stan
cod- d-l~ctor i~ StO~D~.
Tabl- a. 1~. 2 8tart code det-ctor t~st r~gist-rs
A.11.3 Conversion of start codes to Tok~ns
In normal operation the function of the Start Code
Detector is to identify start codes in the data stream and
to then convert them to the appropriate start code Token.
In the simplest case, data is supplied to the Start code
Detector in a single long DATA Token. The output of the
Start Code Detector is a number of shorter DATA Tokens
interleaved with start code Tokens.
Alternatively, in accordance with the present invention,
the input data to the Start Code Detector could be divided
up into a number of shorter DATA Tokens. There is no
restriction on how the coded data is divided into DATA
Tokens other than that each DATA Token must contain 8 x n
bits where n is an integer.
Other Tokens can be supplied directly to the input of
the Start Code Detector. In this case, the Tokens are
passed through the Start Code Detector with no processing
2145~23
262
to other 6tages of the Spatial Decoder. These Tokens can
only be inserted just before the location of a start code
in the coded data.
A.11.3.1 Start code formats
Three different start code formats are recognized by the
Start Code Detector of the present invention. This is
configured via the register,
start_code_detector_coding_standard.
C~Cing S~ncar~ S~an Co~e Pa~em (he~) Siz~ o~ s~r. :^ce val~,e
MPcG OxCO 0~00 0~1 ~alu~, 8 ~it
JPEG QxF- ~vaiue~ 3 ~it
.261 OxCO O~ value~ 4 ~n
Table A.11.3 Start code for~ats
:o A.11.3.2 Start code Token equivalents
Having detected a start code, the Start Code Detector
studies the value associated with the start code and
generates an appropriate Token. In general, the Tokens are
named after the relevant MPEG syntax. However, one of
ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the Tokens
can follow additional naming formats. The coding standard
currently selected configures the relationship between
start code value and the Token generated. This
relationship is shown in Table A.11.4.
2145423
263
S~a~ COC- ValU~
SUnCOCeTOk~n9en~ e~ MPEG H.25t JPEG JP-5
~heX) (heX) (heX) (nVTe)
PICTURE_START oxoo oxoo 0XOA SCS
SLICE_START ~ oxo1 IO 0X01 IO 0XD0 ~O RS I ~ 10
0XAF 0XCC 0XD7 RS T t
SEOUENCE_START oxa3 0XD8 SOI
SEOUENCE_END oxB7 OxD9 EOI
GROUP_START oxes oxco SOF0~
USER_DATA oxe2 OxEO to APP0 ~O
0XEF APPF
0XfE COM
EXTENSION_DATA 0xJ5 oxc~ JPG
0XF0 1O JPG0
0XFD JPG~
Ox02 to RES
oxeF
0XC1 ~O SOF~ 10
0~CS SOF"
0XCC DAC
DHT_MARKER OxC4 DHT
DNL_MARKER - OxDC 3NL
DCT_MARKER oxDa j OOT
DRI_MARKER 0XDD I ORI
Tabl- A. ll. ~ Tokens from start cod- valu-
a. This Token contains an 8 bit data field which is
loaded with a value determined by the start code
value.
b. Indicates start of baseline DCT encoded data.
2145423
264
A.11.3 3 Extended featur-~ of th- coding standards
The coding standards provide a number of mechanisms to
allow data to be embedded in the data stream whose use is
not currently defined by the coding standard. This might
be application specific "user data" that provides extra
facilities for a particular manufacturer. Alternatively,
it might be "extension data". The coding standards
authorities reserved the right to use the extension data to
add features to the coding standard in the future.
Two distinct mechanisms are employed. JPEG precedes
blocks of user and extension data with mar~er codes.
However, H.261 inserts "extra information" indicated by an
extra information bit in the coded data. MPEG can use both
these techniques.
In accordance with the present invention, MPEG/JPEG
blocks of user and extension data preceded by start/marker
codes can be detected by the Start Code Detector.
H.261/MPEG "extra information" is detected by the Huffman
decoder cf the present invention. See A.14.7, "Receiving
Extra Information".
The registers, discard extension data and
discard user data, allow the start Code Detector to be
configured to discard user data and extension data. If
this data is not discarded at the Start Code Detector it
can be accessed when it reaches the Video Demux see A.14.6,
"Receiving User and Extension data".
The Spatial Decoder of the present invention supports
the baseline features of JPEG. The non-baseline features
of JPEG are viewed as extension data by the Spatial
Decoder. So, all JPEG marker codes that precede data for
non-baseline JPEG are treated as extension data.
- 2145~23
265
..11. 3 . 4 ~ Ta~le ~ef i~it~o~
JPEG supports down loaded Huffman and quantizer tables.
In JPEG data, the definition of these tables is preceded by
the marker codes DNL and DQT. The Start Code Detector
generates the Tokens DHT MARKE~R and DQT MARKER when these
marker codes are detected. These Tokens indicate to the
Video Demux that the DATA Token which follows contains
coded data describing Huffman or quantizer table (using the
formats described in JPEG).
10 A. 11. 4 Error det~l-tion
The Start Code Detector can detect certain errors in the
coded data and provides some facilities to allow the
decoder to recover after an error is detected (see A.11.8,
"Start code searching").
A.11.4.1 Illegal Jp~a l~ngth count
Most JPEG marker codes have a 16 bit length count field
associated with them. This field indicates how much data
is associated with this marker code. Length counts of 0
and 1 are illegal. An illegal length should only occur
following a data error. In the present invention, this
will generate an interrupt if illegal length count mask is
set to 1.
Recovery from errors in JPEG data is likely to require
additional application specific data due to the difficulty
of searching for start codes in JPEG data (see A.11.8.1).
.11.9.2 Ov~rlapping ~tart/m~rker cod-s
In the present invention, overlapping start codes should
only occur following a data error. An MPEG, byte aligned,
overlapping start code is illustrated in Figure 64. Here,
the Start Code Detector first sees a pattern that looks
like a picture start code. Next the Start Code Detector
sees that this picture start code is overlapped with a
group start. Accordingly, the Start Code Detector
- 2145423
266
generates a overlapping start event. Furthermore, the
Start Code Detector will generate an interrupt and stop if
overlapping start_mask is set to 1.
It is impossible to tell which of the two start codes is
the correct one and which was caused by a data error.
However, the Start Code Detector in accordance with the
present invention, discards the first start code and will
proceed decoding the second start code "a~ if it is
correct" after the overlapping start-code event has been
serviced. If there are a series of overlapped start codes,
the Start Code Detector will discard all but the last
(generating an event for each overlapping start code).
Similar errors are possible in non byte-aligned system~
(H.261 or possibly MPEG). ln this case, the state of
ignore_non_aligned must also be considered. Figure 65
illustrates an example where the first start code found is
byte aligned, but it overlaps a non-aligned start code. If
ignore_non_aligned is set to 1, then the second overlapping
start code will be treated as data by the Start Code
Detector and, therefore no overlapping start code event
will occur. This conceals a possible data communications
error. If ignore_non_aligned is set to 0, however the
Start Code Detector will see the second, non aligned, start
code and will see that it overlaps the first start code.
A.11.4.3 ~nrecognised start cod-s
The Start Code Detector can generate an interrupt when
an unrecognized start code is detected (if
unrecognized_start_mask = 1). The value of the start code
that caused this interrupt can be read from the register
start_value.
The start code value OxB4 (sequence error) is used in
MPEG decoder systems to indicate a channel or media error.
For example, this start code may be inserted into the data
by an ECC circuit if it detects an error that it was unable
2145~2~
267
to co~ect.
A.11.4.~ 8-qu-nc- of v-nt g-n-ration
In the present invention, certain coded data patterns
tprobably indicating an error condition) will cause more
than one of the above error conditions to occur within a
short space of time. Consequently, the sequence in which
the Start Code Detector examines the coded data for error
conditions is:
l)Non-aligned start codes
2)Overlapping start codes
3)Unrecognized start codes
Thus, if a non-aligned start code overlaps another,
later, start code, the first event generated will be
associated with the non-aligned start code. After this
event has been serviced, the Start Code Detector's
operation will proceed, detecting the overlapped start code
a short time later.
The Start Code Detector only attempts to recognize the
start code after all tests for non-aligned and overlapping
start codes are complete.
A.1~.5 D-cod-r start-up ~nd Jhutdown
The Start Code Detector provides facilities to allow the
current decoding task to be completed cleanly and for a new
task to be started.
There are limitations on using these techniques with
JPEG coded video as data segments can contain values that
emulate marker codes (see A.11.8.1).
A.11.5.1 Cl-~n nd to d-coding
The Start Code Detector can be configured to generate an
interrupt and stop once the data for the current picture is
complete. This is done by setting stop after picture = 1
and stop after picture mask = 1.
Once the end of a picture passes through the Start Code
Detector, a FLUSH Token is ~enerated (A.11.7.2),
2145423
268
an int8r~upt is generated, and the Start Code Detector
stops. Note that the picture just completed will be
decoded in the normal way. In some applications, however,
it may be appropriate to detect the FLUSH arriving at the
output of the decoder chip-set as this will indicate the
end of the current video sequence. For example, the
display could freeze on the last picture output.
When the Start Code Detector stops, there may be data
from the "old" video sequence "trapped" in user implemented
buffers between the media and the decode chips. Setting
the register, discard all data, will cause the Spatial
Decoder to consume and discard this data. This will
continue until a FLUSH Token reaches the Start Code
Detector or discard all data is reset via the
microprocessor interface.
Having discarded any data from the "old" sequence the
decoder is now ready to start work on a new sequence.
A.11.5.2 Wh-n to st~rt disc~rd all mod-
The discard all mode will start immediately after a 1 is
~ritten into the discard all data register. The resultwill be unpredictable if this is done when the Start Code
Detector is actively processing data.
Discard all mode can be safely initiated after any of
the Start Code Detector events (non-aligned start event
etc.) has generated an interrupt.
A.11.5.3 Starting a n-w s-qu-nce
If it is not kno~n where the -tart of a new coded video
sequence is within some coded data, then the start code
search mechanism can be used. This discards any unwanted
data that precedes the start of the sequence. See A.11.8.
A.11.5.4 Jumping b-twe-n segu-nces
This section illustrates an application of some of the
techniques descrlbed above. The objective is to "jump"
2145~23
26g
from On~ part of one coded video sequence to another. In
this example, the filing system only allows access to
"blocks" of data. This block structure might be derived
from the sector size of a disc or a block error correction
system. So, the position of entry and exit points in the
coded video data may not be related to the filing system
block structure.
The stop after picture and discard all data mechanisms
allow unwanted data from the old video seguence to be
discarded. Inserting a FLUSH Token after the end of the
last filing system data block resets the discard all data
mode. The start code search mode can then be used to
discard any data in the next data block that precedes a
suitable entry point.
a. 1l. 6 Byt- alignm-nt
As is well known in the art, the different coding
schemes have quite different views about byte alignment of
start/marker codes in the data stream.
For example, H.261 views communications as being bit
serial. Thus, there is no concept of byte alignment of
start codes. By setting ignore non aligned = 0 the Start
Code Detector is able to detect start codes with any bit
alignment. By setting non-aligned start mask = 0, the
. start code non-alignment interrupt is suppressed.
In contrast, however, JPEG was designed for a computer
environment where byte alignment is guaranteed. Therefore,
marker codes should only be detected when byte aligned.
When the coding standard is configured as JPEG, the
register ignore non_aligned is ignored and the non-aligned
start event will never be generated. However, setting
ignore non aligned = 1 and non aligned start mask = o is
recommended to ensure compatibility with future products.
MPEG, on the other hand, was designed to meet the needs
of both communications (bit serial) and computer (byte
2145423
270
oriented; systems. Start codes in MPEG data should
normally be byte aligned. However, the standard is
designed to be allow bit serial searching for start codes
(no MPEG bit pattern, with any bit alignment, will look
like a start code, unless it is a start code). So, an MPEG
decoder can be designed that will tolerate loss of byte
alignment in serial data communications.
If a non-aligned start code is found, it will normally
indicate that a communication error has previously
lo occurred. If the error is a "bit-slip" in a bit-serial
communications system, then data containing this error will
have already been passed to the decoder. This error is
likely to cause other errors within the decoder. However,
new data arriving at the Start Code Detector can continue
to be decoded after this loss of byte alignment.
By setting ignore non_aligned = 0 and
non aligned start mask s 1, an interrupt can be generated
if a non-aligned start code is detected. The response will
depend upon the application. All subsequent start codes
will be non-aligned (until byte alignment is restored).
Accordingly, setting non aligned start mask = 0 after byte
alignment has been lost may be appropriate.
MPEG JPEG ~.261
ignor~_non_~lign~ 0 1 0
non_~lign~C_~t~n_m~lt 1 0 0
Table A.11.5 Configuring for byt- alignm-nt
- 214542~
271
.~1.7 Automatlc To~eu ge~eratiou
In the present invention, most of the Tokens output by
the Start Code Detector directly reflect syntactic elements
of the various picture and video coding standards. In
addition to these "natural" Tokens,some useful "invented"
Tokens are generated. Examples of these proprietary tokens
are PICTURE_END and CODING STANDARD. Tokens are also
introduced to remove some of the syntactic differences
between the coding standards and to ~tidy up" under error
conditions.
This automatic Token generation is done after the serial
analysis of the coded data (see Figure 61, "The Start Code
Detectorn). Therefore the system responds equally to
Tokens that have been supplied directly to the input of the
Spatial Decoder via the Start Code Detector and to Tokens
that have been generated by the Start Code Detector
following the detection of start codes in the coded data.
A.11.7.~ Indic~ting the ~nd of a pictur~
In general, the coding standards don't explicitly signal
the end of a picture. However, the Start Code Detector of
the present invention generates a PICTURE_END Token when it
detects information that indicates that the current picture
has been completed.
The Tokens that cause PICTURE_END to be generated are:
SEQUENCE_START, GROUP_START, PICTURE_START, SEQUENCE_END
and FLUSH.
A.11.7.2 Stop aft~r pictur~ ~nd option
If the register stop_after_picture is set, then the
Start Code Detector will stop after a PICTURE_END Token has
passed through. However, a FLUSH Token is inserted after
the PICTURE_END to ~push~ the tail end of the coded data
through the decoder and to reset the system. See A.11.5.1.
21~S423
272
A.1~.7.3 ~ntroducing sequ-nc- start for ~.26~
H.261 does not have a syntactic element equivalent to
sequence start (see Table A.11.4). If the reglster
insert sequence start is set, then the Start Code Detector
will ensure that there is one SEQUENCE START Token before
the next PICTURE START, i.e., if the Start Code Detector
does not see a SEQUENCE START before a PICTURE START, one
will be introduced. No SEQUENCE START will be introduced
if one is already present.
This function should not be used with MPF~ or JPE~G.
A.11.7.~ 8-tting coding st-n~rrd for ach s-gu-nc-
All SEQUENCE START Tokens leaving the Start Code
Detector are always preceded by a CODING STANDARD Token.
This Token is loaded with the Start Code Detector's current
coding standard. This sets the coding standard for the
entire decoder chip set for each new video sequence.
A.11.8 8tart cod- s-arching
The Start Code Detector in accordance with the
invention, can be used to search through a coded data
stream for a specified type of start code. This allows the
decoder to re-commence decoding from a specified level
within the syntax of some coded data (after discarding any
data that precedes it). Applications for this include:
start-up of a decoder after jumping into a coded data
2~ file at an unknown position ~e.g., random accessing).
to seek to a known point in the data to assist recovery
after a data error.
For example, Table A.11.6 shows the MPEG start codes
searched, for different configurations of
start_code search. The equivalent H.261 and JPEG
start/marker codes can be seen in Table A.11.4.
- 2145423
273
_sur~_c~ rcn Slan ca~5 sea. cne~ ~or
o ~ Nor~nal cx~allon
Rl~#rVe~ (Wdl Denav~ ~s c,s~a~ ca~a)
3 ~ ~U~IC~ Sl~n
sun_coC~ ch S~ eo~ ~uc~ or
grouD o- ~u~ st~n
S c pctur-~ group o ~u~nc- ~n
6 ~lic-, ~e~r~. grouD or ~u~ I
t~ n~SI sUn a m~rlt r eo~
T~bl- A.1~.6 8t~rt cod- s-~rch ~od-s
a. A FLUSH Token places the Start Code Detector
in this search mode.
b. This is the default mode after reset.
When a non-zero value is written into the
start code search register, the Start Code betector will
start to discard all incoming data until the specified
start code is detected. The start code search register
will then reset to O and normal operation will continue.
The start code search will start immediately after a
non-zero value is written into the start code search
register. The result will be unpredictable if this is done
when the Start Code Detector is actively processing data.
So, before initiating a start code search, the Start Code
Detector should be stopped so no data is being processed.
- The Start Code Detector is always in this condition if any
of the Start Code Detector events (non-aligned start event
etc.) has just generated an interrupt.
A.11.8.1 Limitations on using start cod- search wit~ JPEG
21q542~
-
.
274
Most ~PEG marker codes have a 16 bit length count field
associated with them. This field indicates the length of a
data segment associated with the marker code. This segment
may contain values that emulate marker codes. In normal
S operation, the Start Code Detector doesn't look for start
codes in these segments of data.
If a random access into some JPEG coded data "lands" in
such a segment, the start code search mechanism cannot be
used reliably. In general, JPEG coded video will require
additional external information to identify entry points
for random access.
- 214~423
2~5
SECTJ~N A.12 Decoder start-up control
A.12.1 Ov-rvi-w of d-cod-r start-up
In a decoder, video display will normally be delayed a
short time after coded data is first available. During
this delay, coded data accumulates in the buffers in the
decoder. This pre-filling of the buffers ensures that the
buffers never empty during decoding and, this, therefore
ensures that the decoder is able to decode new pictures at
regular intervals.
Generally, two facilities are required to correctly
start-up a decoder. First, there must be a mechanism to
measure how much data has been provided to the decoder.
Second, there must be a mechanism to prevent the display of
a new video stream. The Spatial Decoder of the invention
provides a bit counter near its input to measure how much
data has arrived and an output gate near its output to
prevent the start of new video stream being output.
There are three levels of complexity for the control of
these facilities:
Output gate always open
Basic control
Advanced control
With the output gate always open, picture output will
start as soon as possible after coded data starts to arrive
at the decoder. This is appropriate for still picture
decoding or where display is being delayed by some other
mechanism.
The difference between basic and advanced control
relates to how many short video streams can be accommodated
in the decoder~s buffers at any time. Basic control is
sufficient for most applications. However, advanced
control allows user software to help the decoder manage the
start-up of several very short video streams.
2145~23
276
A.12.2 ~PEG vid-o buff-r v-rifi-r
MPEG describes a "video buffer verifier" (VBV) for
constant data rate systems. Using the VBV information
allows the decoder to pre-fill its buffers before it starts
to display pictures. Again, this pre-filling ensures that
the decoder's buffers never empty during decoding.
In summary, each MPEG picture carries a vbv delay
parameter. This parameter specifies how long the coded
data buffer of an "ideal decoder" should fill with coded
lo data before the first picture is decoded. Having observed
the start-up delay for the first picture, the requirements
of all subsequent pictures will be met automatically.
MPEG, therefore, specifies the start-up requirements as
a delay. However, in a constant bit rate system this delay
can readily be converted to a bit count. This is the basis
on which the start-up control of the Spatial Decoder of the
present invention operates.
A.12.3 D-finition of ~ str-am
In this application, the term stream is used to avoid
confusion with the MPEG term se~uence. Stream therefore
means a quantity of video data that is "interesting" to an
application. Hence, a stream could be many MPEG sequences
or it could be a single picture.
The decoder start-up facilities described in this
chapter relate to meeting the VBV requirements of the first
picture in a stream. The requirements of subsequent
pictures in that stream are met automatically.
2145423
277
A. 1~2 . 4 8tart-Up control r-gi~t-rSt
R-gis er n~me ~ Descn~tlon
~o
sUrtup_~cctns 1 0 Wnong 1 to thss reSIster re~uests ;ra -e ~ t
CEO_~JS_ACCESS co~Jnur it~ 9~:e ocer!lng bg~c 5~0D :0 allow
~Cc~ tO th ir configur~oon rqisle~s
Di~_count O O T~tis0itcountems rcl~ _n~asc~Ce~:aa
Ce~_35_COUNT rw le~vu th- stUt cOOe Cel CtOr The nu--_er ol
bil_count_p sc~le J 3 bitsr~uir dto ircrementbit_count: ce s
CED_95_MESCALE tw t DplroL 2~-~n~ 5t2.
Trte Dit Counter star counting 0its at er a
FLUSH Totun p~S-5 ttlrou5n Ihe D~ un er
It iS rt~t to ~t ro itnd th~n StopS A ~ Ln3r9
~tt~r the bit count Urget ha5 Oeen met
bit_count_urg--t 8 ~ T~lo r~giSt~r sp clfi~s h~ Dit co ;nt tarSet A
CeD_9S_rAfrGET rw tuge~ met vent is ~en-r~teo wt eneve mne
idlowtn9 condiOon t#COmeS true
~it_eount ~- bit_count_tlt g-t
Urget_m-t_ev nt 1 0 When the 0it count tuqel is m t ~ls even
95_r~f~GEr ~tEr_EVEWr Iw o- gen~rUa 1~ t~ tnask regisler Is sel ;o
t rget_m-t_tnntc 1 0 th-n an interrupt can 0e generate~ howevcc
r~ the hit counter W~ OT stOP Drocesslrg Ca;a
rhis event wtll occur when the Ce ;oLr er
ir.rr ,U to its uget It will also oc:_ ~ a
tYget velue is wrllten which is less an ^~
Cu~l tO the current value ol tre C; c: r e
Writtng 0 to bit_count_ -rget w i aiwa s
generilte a tarSet me~ even~
Ta~le A.12.1 Deco~er start-up (e,3;s~ers
`~ 2145423
278
-
t~-gist-r n-m- ~ D ~t G~
~i t~
count-r_tlu~n-d_ v-nt t 0 Wh-n ~ F-USH To~en p~s truousn ~he ~ll
8s-FLus~/-cvENT r~v count circuit thiS v-nt w~ll Occur Il the ma
COunt- _tlu~h-d-ma~t~ 1 0 r-giSt r ~ S t tO 1 th n ~n inlenu~t can ee
rw g-nerU d snd th- bit c~unt-r ~11 SlcD
count r_tlush-C_too_-srl~_ v nt 1 0 ll ~ FLUSH Token D~ s through ~e o t
8S_FLUSI t-8c-~oRE-r~RGEr-MEr-EvENr ~ count C~Cuit nd the e~t count Urget ha5 not
eount-r_tlusn-d_too_ rt~_mast~ 1 û b- nm tt~v ntwitl occw ll th- m~Sit
rw reg~t r iS Set to 1 th n ~n interruDt can D-
gen rU C and the Dn count-r wjll StOD
S A1210
ottchip_qu-u- 1 0 Setttn9 this register to l con6gur s ~he gate
CED_95_OVEUE rv openin9 togk to r~uire _ ~ pr.-
Suppo~ When tnis r-siSW is s-t lo 0 ~he ou ;ut
9ste conuol togie wiU ~ut~ ccnuol he
op~oon ol tl~e outDut gate
S-s eoon A t 2 6 ~nd A 12 7
enaDle_stre m 1 0 When nonehipqu ueisinuse~mlnS o
CE3-3s-EMAJLE-Nxr-sTht rw enstcl-_su am conuols th- b h~our ot ~he
Output 9U- tt-r the tnC ol strearn ~sses
throug~l it
on in thU r-gistet en~ol-~ ttl- C~J SlJt 5~
op n
Tne r gist r will be r-set wr~n an
cc-pt_en-t~l- ime uo~ is genera c
Table A.12.1 De~Qdcr stat,l-up re~i~ters (contd)
21~5423
279
R-gi~r n~ ~ ;~ O ~ tio
as ,3~
~ec p~_ n-ol--~H~ 1 0 rhrsevH~ulo~c~t-s tr~t ~ FLUSH Tolten n~s
8S_S~E~M_ENO_EVENT r~' puu~ ~rough ~e outDUt 9~le (c~us~ng It lo
cc pt_ n~Ole_m~ 1 0 clo~) U~ IhU ~n en~Ole w~s sv~llU~le lo allow
w t~ 9~te lo open
l~ the m~sl~ reqlSler is scl lo 1 then an ;n err
can Oe ~enertt~ tnC the resiSt~r
en~Cb_suesm w~ll t~e reseL S~e A 12 ? 1
T~bl- A 12 1 D-cod-r ~t~rt-up r-gi~t-r~ (contd)
2145423
280
A.~2.5 oueput gat- always open
The output gate can be configured to remain open. This
configuration is appropriate where still pictures are being
decoded, or when some other mechanism is available to
manage the start-up of the video decoder.
The following configurations are required after reset
thaving gained access to the start-up control logic by
writing 1 to startup access):
set offchip queue = 1
set enable stream = l
- ensure that all the decoder start-up event mask
registers are set to 0 disabling their interrupts
(this is the default state after reset~.
(See A.12.7.1 for an explanation of why this holds the
output gate open.)
A.12.6 ~9ic op-ration
In the present invention, basic control of the start-up
logic is sufficient for the majority of MPEG video
applications. In this mode, the bit counter communicates
directly with the output gate. The output gate will close
automatically as the end of a video stream passes through
it as indicated by a FLUSH Token. The gate will remain
closed until an enable is provided by tne bit counter
circuitry when a stream has attained its start-up bit
count.
The following configurations are required after reset
(having gained access to the start-up control logic by
writing 1 to startup_access):
set bit count_prescale approximately for the expected
range of coded data rates
set counter flushed_too early mask = 1 to enable this
error condition to be detected
Two interrupt service routines are required:
~'ideo Demux service to obtain the value of
-- 214S423
281
vbv delay for the first picture in each new
stream
Counter flushed too early service to react to
this condition
The video demux (also known as the video parser) can
generate an interrupt when it decodes the vbv_delay for a
new video stream (i.e., the first picture to arrive at the
video demux after a FLUSH). The interrupt service routine
should compute an appropriate value for bit_count target
and write it. When the bit counter reaches this target, it
will insert an enable into a short queue between the bit
counter and the output gate. When the output gate opens it
removes an enable from this queue.
- 214~423
282
A.~2.~.1 8tart~g ~ ~ str~ ~ortly 3fter anot~r
f ~ e~
A~ an example, the MPEG stream which i~ about to f inish
is called A and the MPEG stream about to start is called B.
A FLUSH Tok-n should be inserted after the end of A. This
pushes the last of its coded data through the decoder and
alerts the various sections of the decoder to expect a new
stream.
Normally, the bit counter will have re~et to zero, A
having already met its start-up conditions. After the
FLUSH, the bit counter will start counting the bits in
stream B. When the Video Demux has decoded the vbv delay
from the first picture in stream B, an interrupt will be
generated allowing the bit counter to be configured.
As the FLUSH marking the end of stream A passes through
the output gate, the gate will close. The gate will remain
closed until B meets its start-up conditions. Depending on
a number of factors such as: the start-up delay for stream
B and the depth of the buffers, it is possible that B will
have already met its start-up conditions when the output
gate closes. In this case, there will be an enable waiting
in the queue and the output gate will immediately open.
Otherwise, stream B will have to wait until it meets its
start-up requirements.
A.12.6.2 A succ~io~ of short stro~u-
The capacity of the queue located between the bitcounter and the output gate is sufficient to allow 3
separate video streams to have met their start-up
conditions and to be waiting for a previous stream to
finish being decoded. In the present invention, this
situation will only occur if very short streams are being
decoded or if the off-chip buffers are very large as
compared to the picture format being decoded).
In Figure 69 stream A is being decoded and the
214S~23
283
output gate is open). Streams B and C have met their
start-up conditions and are entirely contained within the
buffers managed by the Spatial Decoder. Stream D is still
arriving at the input of the Spatial Decoder.
Enables for streams B and C are in the queue. So, when
stream A is completed B will be able to start immediately.
Similarly C can follow immediately behind B.
If A is still passing through the output gate when D
meets its start-up target an enable will be added to the
queue, filling ,the queue. If no enables have been removed
from the queue by the time the end of D passes the bit
counter (i.e., A is still passing through the output gate)
no new stream will be able to start through the bit
counter. Therefore, coded data will be held up at the
input until A completes and an enable is removed from the
queue as the output gate is opened to allow B to pass
through.
A.12.7 Advanced operation
In accordance with the present invention, advanced
control of the start-up logic allows user software to
infinitely extend the length of the enable queue described
in A.12.6, "Basic operation". This level of control will
only be required where the video decoder must accommodate a
series of short video streams longer than that described in
A.12.6.2, "A succession of short streams".
In addition to the configuration required for Basic
operation of the system, the following configurations are
required after reset (having gained access to the start-up
control logic by writing 1 to start_up access):
set offchip queue = 1
set accept_enable_mask = 1 to enable interrupts
when an enable has been removed from the queue
set target_met_mask = 1 to enable interrupts
when a stream's bit count target is met
2145423
284
Two ad~itional interrupt service routines are
required:
accept enable interrupt
Target met interrupt
When a target met interrupt occurs, the service routine
should add an enable to its off-chip enable queue.
A.12.7.1 Output gat- logic b-havior
Writing a 1 to the enable stream register loads an
enable into a short queue.
When a FLUSH ~marking the end of a stream) passes
through the output gate the gate will close. If there is
an enable available at the end of the queue, the gate will
open and generate an accept_enable event. If
accept_enable mask is set to one, an interrupt can be
generated and an enable is removed from the end of the
queue (the register enable stream is reset).
However, if accept_enable mask is set to zero, no
interrupt is generated following the accept_enable_event
and the enable is NOT removed from the end of the queue.
This mechanism can be used to keep the output gate open as
described in A.12.5.
A.12.8 Bit counting
The bit counter starts counting after a FLUSH Token
passes through it. This FLUSH Token indicates the end of
the current video stream. In this regard, the bit counter
continues counting until lt meets the bit count target set
in the bit_count_target register. A target met event is
then generated and the bit counter resets to zero and waits
for the next FLUSH Token.
The bit counter will also stop incrementing when it
reaches it maximum count (255).
A.12.9 Bit count presc le
In the present invention, 2~ P~S"''~n x 512 bits are
2145423
-
285
requir~d to increment the bit counter once. Furthermore,
bit count prescale is a 3 bit register than can hold a
value between O and 7.
n ~e (bils) nw ~ ~(bi~)
O O to 2621~4 1024
0 to 5242~8 20~
7 0 to 3~457280 122880
Tabl- A.12.2 Ex~mpl- bit count-r rang-s
The bit count is approximate, as some elements of the
video stream will already have been Tokenized (e.g., the
start codes) and, therefore includes non-data Tokens.
A.12.10 Count-r flush-d too arly
If a FLUSH token arrives at the bit counter before the
bit count target is attained, an event is generated which
can cause an interrupt (if counter flushed too early mask =
1). If the interrupt is generated, then the bit counter
circuit will stop, preventing further data input. It is
the responsibility of the user's software to decide when to
open the output gate after this event has occurred. The
output gate can be made to open by writing O as the bit
count target. These circumstances should only arise when
trying to decode video streams that last only a few
pictures.
2145~23
.
286
SECTION A.13 Buffer Management
The Spatial Decoder manages two logical data buffers:
the coded data buffer (CDB) and the Token buffer (TB).
The CDB buffers coded data between the Start Code
Detector and the input of the Huffman decoder. This
provides buffering for low data rate coded video data. The
TB buffers data between the output of the Huffman decoder
and the input of the spatial video decoding circuits
(inverse modeler, quantizer and DCT). This second logical
buffer allows processing time to include a spread so as to
accommodate processing pictures having varying amounts of
data.
Both buffers are physically held in a single off-chip
DRAM array. The addresses for these buffers are generated
by the buffer manager.
A.13.1 Buffer m~nager registers
The Spatial Decoder buffer manager is intended to be
configured once immediately after the device is reset. In
normal operation, there is no requirement to reconfigure
the buffer manager.
After reset is removed from the Spatial Decoder, the
buffer manager is halted (with its access register,
buffer_manager_access, set to 1) awaiting configuration.
. After the registers have been configured,
buffer_manager_access can be set to O and decoding can
commence.
Most of the registers used in the buffer manager cannot
be accessed reliably while the buffer manager is operating.
Before any of the buffer manager registers are accessed
buffer_manager_access must be set to 1. This makes it
essential to observe the protocol of waiting until the
value 1 can be read from buffer_manager_access. The time
taken to obtain and release access should be taken into
2145423
-
287
consider~tion when polllng such registers as cdb full and
cdb empty to monitor buffer conditions.
~egister name ~ O DescriDtion
buner_tn n g~r_acc-ss 1 1 ThiS c~c ss brt SlOpS the opera;t n c -~ ;e Duner rranager so t~at .-5
rw various registers can De accessed reliably See A 6 4 1
Note this acicess register is unusual as its detault state aner reSei s
I e aner reset the buner manager is nalted awalting corr Lra;
via the ~ ovr~ ~ inler~ace
~egister na~n- ~ ct
ih
buner-tn nag-r_t~-yhol-_addre~s 6 x Keyhol- access to th- exutnded aoCress space usec cr re Cu er
rw tnanager registers shown below See A 6 ~ 3 !or mote
buner_m nztger-t~eyho~e-dau 8 x ;~ aooutacctssingre9ls~ersthroushakeynole
rw
buner-limn 1~ x This specifies tho overall 512e ot ~nr ~ ; ar i anac^ec c u e
rw Spatial Decoden All buner aodresses arE ç u ecl ~1 ~ nls ~ut e!
siZ- and so will wraD round within ttte Ci ' ` o~ovideC
edb-base 1 a x These tegisters point to th- base ot the ~ c ~ata (cao) anc Tcken
tb_Oaset rw (tb) butters
edb_l-ngth 18 x These ~ specity ~he len5 h (Le see) o~ the codes Ca;a icCc
tb_leng~h rw and Tol r l b) buners
cdb_reed 1t~ x These registe s hdd an onset irom the bu! - ase anc ;nclcate
tb_r-ad ro wt~er- data - il be r -d Irom next
Cdb_numDer 1~ x These ~ sters show how much data ~ e nt~y helC In tne :L~ers
tb_number ~0
CdO_~UII 1 x Ttle~ ~ iters will b- set lo ~ It tt~ sd cata (C^:j cr ~-.~e- ::
tD_~ull ro bu -
caD_empry 1 x T~ -cglsters ~ll be set to 1 it tD~ ,oGec ca;a (cc~) c~ e- ~~
tb_empty ~o b r er empties
Table A.13.1 Buf~er manager registers (cortd)
2145423
--
288
A.13.~ 1 Buffer m~n~g-r pointer v~lues
Typically, data is transferred between the Spatial
Decoder and the off_chip DRAM in 64 byte bursts (using the
DRAM's fast page mode). All the buffer pointers and length
registers refer to these 64 byte (512 bit) blocks of data.
So, the buffer manager's 18 bit registers describe a 256 k
block linear address space (i.e., 128 Mb).
The 64 byte transfer is independent of the width (8, 16
or 32 bits) of the DRAM interface.
lo A.13.2 Use of the buffer m~n~ger registers
The Spatial Decoder buffer manager has two sets of
registers that define two similar buffers. The buffer
limit register (buffer limit) defines the physical upper
limit of the memory space. All addresses are calculated
modulo this number.
Within the limits of the available memory, the extent of
each buffer is defined by two registers: the buffer base
(cdb_base and tb base) and the buffer length (cdb length
and tb_length). All the registers described thus far must
be configured before the buffers can be used.
The current status of each buffer is visible in 4
registers. The buffer read register (cdb_read and tb_read)
indicates an offset from the buffer base from which data
will be read next. The buffer number registers (cdb_number
and tb_number) indicate the amount of data currently held
by buffers. The status bits cdb_full, tb full, cdb_empty
and tb_empty indicate if the buffers are full or empty.
As stated in A.13.1.1, the unit for all the above
mentioned registers is a 512 bit block of data.
Accordingly, the value read from cdb_number should be
r,ultiplied by 512 to obtain the number of bits in the coded
data buffer.
A.13.3 Zero buffers
Still picture applications (e.g.~ using JPEG) that do
214~423
289
not h~e a "real-time" requirement will not need the large
off-chip buffers supported by the buffer manager. In this
case, the DRAM interface can be configured (by writing 1 to
the zero buffers register) to ignore the buffer manager to
provide a 128 bit stream on-chip FIFO for the coded data
buffer and the Token buffers.
The zero buffers option may also be appropriate for
applications which operate working at low data rates and
with small picture formats.
Note: the zero_buffers register is part of the DRAM
interface and, therefore, should be set only during the
post-reset configuration of the DRAM interface.
A.13.~ Buff-r operation
The data transfer through the buffers is controlled by a
handshake Protocol. Hence, it is guaranteed that no data
errors will occur if the buffer fills or empties. If a
buffer is filled, then the circuits trying to send data to
the buffer will be halted until there is space in the
buffer. If a buffer continues to be full, more processing
stages "up steam" of the buffer will halt until the Spatial
Decoder is unable to accept data on its input port.
Similarly, if a buffer empties, then the circuits trying to
remove data from the buffer will halt until data is
available.
As described in A.13.2, the position and size of the
coded data and Token buffer are specified by the buffer
base and length registers. The user is responsible for
configuring these registers and for ensuring that there is
no conflict in memory usage between the two buffers.
2145423
-
- 290
SECTION A.14 Video Demux
The Video Demux or Video parser as it is also called,
completes the task of converting coded data into Tokens
started by the Start Code Detector. There are four main
processing blocks in the Video Demux: Parser State Machine,
Huffman decoder (including an ITOD), Macroblock counter and
ALU.
The Parser or state machine follows the syntax of the
coded video data and instructs the other units. The
Huffman decoder converts variable length coded (VLC) data
into integers. The Macroblock counter keeps track of which
section of a picture is being decoded. The ALU performs
the necessary arithmetic calculations.
A.1~.~ Vid~o D~mux r-gistt~r~
Regis ername ~ ~ C - ;~ti n
ui
d-mux_~ccess 1 0 This 8cc-sS bit StopS th- op ration o~ the Vdeo C)emux so t~a~ It s
CED_I~l_CTRLt7] rw vSrious tegiSt rs c n bo cct~d r-liably S~e A 6 4 t
huttman_ rror_cod- 3 Wh-n the V~d o D mus stopS tollowing the g-neration ot a
CED_H_Cri~Lt64] ~ hunm~n_ v-ntint rrtptr qU stthis3bitr-gislerholdsava~ue nCirating
why th- int-rrupt waS g ~n~ _ ~ S-e A 14 5 1
par~-r_error_code 6 When the Vid o D mux StopS ~ollowing the 9enerdtion oi a ~arser_even~
CED_H_OMUX_ERR ro interrtlpt requ St thiS e dt r~gist-r hold5 a value indicaDng why the
int-rrupt was; ~n~ _ S-e A 14 52
d-mux_keYhole_addrns 12 x Keyhol-ac~e#toth-VId oD muxsext-naeoaddr-sss~are See
CE3_H_KEYHOLE_AOD~ rw A 6 4 3 tor mor- i ,t~ ~n about acc-ssing reglsters
demux_k-ynole_data 6 x througn a k-yhol-
15 CEO_H_KEYHOLE rw Tat~les A 14 Z A 14 3 and A 14 4 describ- the reSisters that :a~ e
~cc-Ss d vu th- k yhol-
Table A.14.1 Top level Video Demux registers
21~5423
291
~j
n39 ~ C D ,~
c
dummy_bst_Dicture 1 0 When t~is reglstems sel ;o 1 the Vid~o Cemux ~ll genera e Inlorma~on
CED_*ALU_~r 5~ rw ~or a 'dummr Intra plcture as the la5t plc ~Jre ol an MPEG s~uence
r_rom_con~rol 'This ~uncDOn is use~ul when the Temporal Decoder is configureC lor
automatic picture ~r OrJ ~ (sn A 18 3 5 'Pictute sec~uence re
r dumrny_last trame_Oit
ord-ring to ~lush the last ~ or I picture out ol the emporal
Decoder
No 'tummy' picture is r-quired i~
the Temporal Decoder is no~ cv ~fi~ t ~or re crdenng
another MPEG sequerce will be decoCed; ~Ci~t. y (as this will also
nUsh OU~ tlU I~St ~icnlr~)
the coding standard is not MPEG
fi-ld_into 1 0 When this register is set ~o 1 ttle firs~ byta o~ any MpEG
CE!:)-H-Aw-f1Go rw extra_i"~o,. ~ _picture is plsc-d in the FIELD_INFO Token See
A 147 1
r_rom_conrro/
r_fielO_in~o_bd
continue 1 0 This regist r ~lows us r sotrware to control how much exua user or
CED_H_ALU_~EGO rw xtension data it w nts lo receive wh-n is it is Ce~ected by the Cecocer
r_rom_control See A 14 6 and A 14 7
r_continue_oit
rom_revision 6 I e~ y lollowing rcsel this holds a CoVy oi ~.~e micrococe RCM
CD-H-ALu-RlEG 1 ro r-vision num~er
r_rom_r~rision This register is also used to present to conuol solTwar- data values reaC
~rom t~e cod-d data See ~14 6 'ReceMng U#r and E~lension data
and A 14 7 'Receiving Extra Intor c~ion'
Table A. 1~ .1 Top level Vid-o De~ux registers (contd)
- ~9~ 2145423
o
- Register nam- O ~ ~ U - vbon
~n L
huttmsn_eve5t _ 1 0 A Hunrnar event iS gener ted i' an error iS louno in rhe cooec ca;a See
rw A 14 5 1 lor a C tin ~ ol these events
hunman_mask 1 0 l~ th- mask register is set to 1 then an interruDt can oe generaleo anc ~ ~e
rw Vldeo D~mux will Stop ~ th- mask r~gist~r is sel to O then no interru~l is
generated and th- Vldeo Demux vrill attemDt o recover irom ~ne e ^r
parser_even~ 1 0 A Parser even~ can oe in r~sponce ~o errors In rhe cocer~ ~ata cmo ~e
rw u ival d; ~ althe Vldeo Demux thatrecuires so~Tware
parser_mask 1 0 ~rve t~n S- A1452 loraC~n~tionoltheceeven!s
rw It ~he mask r-grst r is set to 1 then an inlerrupt can be generateC anC De
Vldeo D-mux will Stop It th- m~ r 9iSl r is set to O Ih n no interruDt ~s
9-nera~ed tUld t~ Vld o D rr~x wi~ attempt to continue
Table A 1~ 1 Top l-v-l Vid-o D-mux r-gist-r~ (contd)
Regis~er name ~ rnO D i~
rn L
- ~e t_nam-_O 8 x Dunng JPEG operation tne register cc ~ t_nam-_n holds an 8 Dl~ value
- ~nt_name_1 rw indicabng~ton~ )which~o~ourco ~ e tha5th- on~onc liDn
c ~ on~ ~t_name_2
s ~ ~nc t_n-m-_3
ri2-pels 16 x These registen hold the horizonatl and vert~cal di ns ons ol tne video Delng
rw decoded in pixels
ven_D-ls 16 x
Se- secbon A 14 2
rw
noru_ . s.t e 16 x These registers nold tn- horizontal and vert~al dlnlrnslol~c ol tne Vloeo !celrS
rw decoded in .. ~I~
ven_ lC ct~`ct 16 x
See section A'~ 2
rw
Table A 1~ 2 vid-o demux pictur-
construction r-gist-rs
2I45~t23
-
293
. ~
c
Reglsler name ~ D ,vtion
it.i tro
ma~it_h 2 x rhese t~g~sters hold the obl~k Wicith anci helshl In bloc~s (a ~ 3 Dl~els)
rvv Th- valu s O to 3 indicate a ~ c ghl ot 1 to 4 blocks
max v 2 x
S~e s ction A 14 2
r~
max_componcot_id 2 x The values O to 3 indicate that 1 to 4 ditteren~ video comDoner s are :ur e-t;y
rw being decoCed
Sec section A 14 2
Nt 3 x During JPEG operation this reoister holds the Dararne~er ~it (numDer oNma5e
rw C~l~ von_ ~ts in trune)
blocks_h_O 2 x For each ot the 4 coiour Co~ ~vn ,ts the regls~ers blocks_h_n anC
blocks_h_1 rw blocks_v_n hold th- number ot biocks ho ~or; 'ly and vertlcaily In a
blocks_h_2 " ,. ~bfi~ tor th- colow c~ ~na~ ,t with cr, nooncn~ ID n
blocks_h_3 S-e section A 142
blocks_v_O 2 x
blocks_v_1 rw
blocks_v_2
blocks_v_3
tQ 2 x The tvvo bit valu- h h by the regist-r tq_n r~escnt~es wh~ch lnverse
tQ1 rw Ciut~ntisation tabl- is lo t~ used wn-n decodins data wiln co ;~on~ s ID n
tQ2
tQ3
Ta~le A. 1~ . 2 Vid-o domux piCtUre
con~truCtion regi5terti~ (contd)
2145423
294
A.14.~ Regist-r loading and Tok-n g-neration
Many of the registers in the Video Demux hold values
that relate directly to parameters normally communicated in
the coded picture/video data. For example, the horiz pels
register corresponds to the MPEG sequence header
information, horizontal size, and the JPEG frame header
parameter, X. These registers are loaded by the Video
Demux when the appropriate coded data is decoded. These
registers are also associated with a Token. For example,
the register, horiz pels, is associated with Token,
HORIZONTAL_SIZE. The Token is generated by the Video Demux
when (or soon after) the coded data is decoded. The Token
can also be supplied directly to the input of the Spatial
Decoder. In this case, the value carried by the Token will
configure the Video Demux register associated with it.
`- 2145423
295
nu~ . C .vl,o
ac-hu~-o 2 rhe two bit value nela by the register dc_hun_n ~escrlDes wh~cn Hl ~tman
dc_hut~_1 rw decoding table is lo b- u#d wh-n decocing the DC; ~ Yi~ s ts ol data w~tn
dc-hun-2 co ~one ,l ID n
dc_hut~_3 Similarly ac_hun_n dexnbes ~he table to be used wnen Cecoc rS AC
,c hu~ o ~r ,t~
ac_hut~_1 fw
3aseline JPEG requires uP to two Hunman tables Der scan ~he or iy taeles
ac_hutt_2
1~ _n~ ~ are 0 and 1
~C_hUti_3
dc_bits_0~15 0] t Each o~ th-se is a table oi 16 eight bit v~lues They Crovi~e the BlTa
dc_bits_1[15 01 rw j ~ n ~#e JPEG Hunman lable t" ~i' ~ 1) which ~orm Dart of the
ac_bits_0~15 01 8 ~n~ ; b~l d two DC and t~vo AC Hunman tabtes
ac_bits_1t15 0] rw See secaon A 14 31
dC_hu~val_0~11 01 8 Each ot these is a table o~ 12 ight bQ valu~s A8hey provide the HUFrAVAL
dc_huttval_1 [t 1 0] rvv ; I~V l ' ~ (se JPEG Hu~man tabl- ~ ic l~ wllich iomm part of tt e
d ~ N7 ot two DC Hutiman tables
5- s cbon A 14 3 1
ac_hu~val_0(161 0] 8 E ch oi th~ is ~ tabh ol 162 ~ight bit values They provide the HUFrAVAL
ac-hu~tvat-1[161 01 rw in~ (se- JPEG HuthTuAn tabl- s; 3' ~ ~l) which form part ol the
J ~ ~ ; ti~ ~ ot two AC Hunman tables
Se~ s caon A 14 8 1
dc_z sss_0 8 These 8 bit r-gisters hold values that are 'speoal case~ to accelera~e ~Ae
rtc_zs~s5_1 rw decoding ot certain tr-r~wntly used JPEG VLCs~
ac_eob_0 8
dc_ssss magnitude o~ DC coenlcient is 0
~c_eob_1 rw
ac_eob end o~ block
ac_~rt_0 8
ac_zrl - run ot 16 zeros
ac_zrl_1 rw
T~ble A. 1~ . 3 Vid-o d-mux ~uffman t~ble regi~ter~
- 2145423
`
296
~ .~i
R gisler n~me`
~n rD
t~utlet_si2- 10 This reg~stet is baaeo when decodlng MpEG data wnh a value ~nc~cat~ng ne
rw size d V9V bun r r-quir d in n ide~l d coae
This vt~lu- is not usa by th~ d coder chlps However the value It hoi~s mal
b- use~ul to us~r sotfware when configunng the coCt data but;er slze anc '3
de~-min- whether th- d coder is capable o~ decoding a particular 1''^ C2 a
file
pel_aspect 4 This regiSter is baded when d coaing MPEG data ~th a value mCIca~ -9 ne
rw pel aspect ratio The Vtllue is 4 bit int pr thU is us d as an inde~ into a
table defin~d by MPEG
See the MPEG standard ~u a definition d this tabl-
This value is not us d by the deeoder chips However the value it holCs may
b- us-~ul to U#r sottw~tre wh n: 99 ~ a display or output dev!ce
bit_rate 1e This r gist r is bJdea when d coding MPEG data with a vaiue inC ca -g ~e
rw cod d d ta rate
5-- the MPEG st nd rd ~w a definition o~ this value
This value is not us d by the d coder chips However the value Q holds may
be u#hl to us r sohwue wh n co ~ i~ ; th- d cod-r start UD r~s ers
pic_r~e 4 This regist r is toad d when d coding MpEG dau Wlth a value inG~ca;~ng ~he
rw picture rate
See th- MPEG sUndard lor a d-finibon ot this value
This value is not us d by th- d coder chips However the value it ro!cs rna
b- u#hl to us r sottw re wh-n con6guring a disptay or output device
const \cd 1 This r~ist r is twtded wh n cecorting MpEG dau to indicate il the cxed ~a z
rw rne ts MPEGscor t~ ud ~ c s
Se- the MpEG standard ior a definition ot this nag
This value is no~ used by the docoCer ChiFs Howeve ~e va!ue ~ ~^ cs--a t
b~ us~tul to us~r soitwar~ to c~t-mln- wheth~r th~ ceccc~r is ;2~ C'
decoding a particular MpEG daU t~le
Table A.14.4 Other Video Demux registers
2145423
-
297
Registernarr~ 7 C l~iun
r~ t~
picture_typ- 2 Dunng MPEG opetaDon this teglsl~r hold5 Lh- plCtWe tyPe ol the ~icture belng
rw d coded
h_261_pic_type 8 This register is ~o~ded when C coding H 261 d~ta It holds in~orrraDon about
rw the picture ~ormaL
17161514131211101 1
¦ r ¦ r ¦ s ¦ d ¦ ~ ¦ q ¦ r ¦ r ¦
Flags
s - Split Scre-n Indicator
d C~ocument Camera
~ Fr eze Piaure Rdease
rnis valu- is not used by the d cod-r chips How-vet the ;r ~o aoon should
~ us d when configunng horiz_~ls vett_p IS nd the display or cutput
d-vice
hroken_closed 2 During MPE~i operation this register holds the Droken_link ana c osed_gop
rw ; ~ lot the group ol pictures being decoded
l,l6l5l4l3l21 ~1l
¦ r ¦ r ¦ r ¦ r ¦ r ¦ r ¦ c ¦ D ¦
Flags
c ~ closedsop
Table A.14.4 Other Vid-o Demux r-gist-r~ (contd)
2145~2~
,
298
Registet n~ ~ i
i~i æ
pr-a~CIion_mOde S Durmg MDEG and t~ 2610porat~on thls regiS~er nol~s th- curr enl value ol
rw pr diction moda
1,161sl4l3121 ' 1l
¦ r ¦ r ¦ r ¦ h ¦ y ¦ x ¦ b ¦ I ¦
Fiags
h ~nabl~ H 261 loop filter
y rasel bachvtrd v ctor pr dicbon
vbv_d lay 16 This r gisler is load d wh n d coding MpEG data wlth a value in~icating the
~w minimum s~an-up d-by bdors d~coding should stan
5~ the MPEB stand rd tor a d-finition ot this value
This value is not us d by the d coder chips How v r the value it holds may
be u~tul to user sOt~N wh n configuring th- d cod-r stan up regislers
pic_numb-r 8 This rogister hdds ~e pictute numb r tor the pictur~s that is currently being
rw d~d by the Vdeo D mux This numher wts generated by the stan coCe
d-t ctor when this picture um~ed there
Sae Tabla A 112 hr t description ot the pictur- number
dummy_bsl_plcture 1 0 Th-~erqisterstretlsovisbbatthetoDbvel SeeTable~l4 1
rw
thld_lnto 1 0
rw
continu- 1 0
rw
rom_revision 8
rw
coding_standard 2 This register is loaded by the CODING_STANDARD ~oken lo cor
ro ths Video ûemux s mode ol op ration
Se- s~ction A 21 1
Table A.14.4 Other Video Demux registers (contd)
2145423
299
Register name ~ r~. ~
resurt_lnterval 8 This register is haded when decwing JPEG dala wn~ a value InCica~lng r.e
rw minimum start-up delay oelore decooing should s:alt
Se~ ~Q MPEG standud ~or a d-finiuon o~ this value.
~bl- A.14.~ Oth-r Vid-o D-mux r-gi~t-r~ (contd)
r-gister Tok-n standard commen
CC~ 30/\ ,l_nam-_n COMPONENT_NAME JPEG in co~ed data.
MpEG not used in s~anduC.
H.261
tlori2_pels HORIZONTAL_SIZE MPEG in coded aau.
ven_p-ls VERTICAL_SIZE JPEG
H261 ~ ~ " '1~ derrvea Irom pictue
type.
horiz_,. .tQ Q HORIZONTAL_M8S MPEG controlsofrwuemuslcerivefrom
ven_.. .t `c ~ VERTICAL_MPS JPEG honzontal and vertical p,cture size.
H.261 aulo." 'l~ derrved from plc:ure
typ~.
ma~_h DEFINE_MAX_SAMPLING MpEG control sof~vue must confiçwe.
ma~_v Sampling struclure i5 fixed by
sfandard.
JPEG incoded ~ata.
H.261 auto",~i~cL: t configur~c lor 4:2:~
video.
T~ble A.14.5 Regi~ter to To~en cro~ r-f-rence
2145~23
300
r~ister Token st naard commen
ma~_c~ ~r~ ld MAX_COMP_îD MPEG conuol sottwu~ must configure
S~mpling sUucture is fi~ed Dy
standard
JPE~ in coaed data
H261 a t Iy configured lor 4 2 0
video
tq_o JPEG_TABLE_SELECT JPEG in codea data
tq_1 MPEG not us-a in slanaara
H 261
t~_2
tq_3
hlocks-n-o DEFINE_SAMPLING MPEG control Sonwue must conGgure
blocks_h_1 S~mpling structure is fixeC Dy
blocks_h_2 sundard
bloc~_h_3 JPEG incod ddata
11261 ~ configured lor 4 2 0
blocks_v_0
video
blocks_v_1
~locl~s_v_2
blocks_v_3
~c_hun_0 inJcanhe-d rdUIt JPEG incoa acata
dc hun 1 MPEG_DCH_TACLE MPEG conUolso~vue,nust conhgure
H261 nol us-d in sundud
~c_hu~t_2
dc_hutt_3
ac_hun_0 ir~san h ad rd-ta JPEG incoCea Cala
MPEG nol used in slanduC
~c_hun_1
H261
ac_hun_2
ac-hun-3
T~ble A. ~,~ . 5 R-gi~ter to Token cross
ref erence ( contd )
DEMANDES OU BREVE~S VOLUMINEUX
LA l~tu~ TE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVET
COMPREND PLUS D'UN TOME.
CECI EST LE TOME DE
NOTE: Pour les tomes additionels, veuillez c~ntacter le Bureau canadien des
brevets
2 )~t 5 sl~ 3
JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS
THIS SECTION OF THE APPLlCATlONliATENT CONTAINS MORE
THAN ONE VOLUME
THIS IS VOLUME l- OF
NOTE: For add;tional v~lumes please contact the Canadian Patent Office
